Published Copy 2013 Caterham Roadsport Championship ... - Knaf

2013 Caterham Roadsport Championship Regulations 

Issued by the BRSCC: 14th March 2013 

Published Copy 

2013 Caterham Roadsport 

Championship Regulations 

Version: Published Copy 

Index 

Introduction 

Section 1 

Sporting Regulations - General 

Section 2 

Sporting Regulations – Judicial Procedures 

Section 3 

Sporting Regulations – Championship 

Race Meetings & Race Procedures 

Section 4 

Championship Race Penalties 

Section 5 

Technical Regulations 

Section 6 

Appendices – Contacts 

Section 7 

Registration Form 

Championship Results 2012 

Roadsport Tracksport Supersport 

1 st Brad Smith David Robinson Aaron Head 

2 nd Elliott Norris Terry Langley Lee Wiggins 

3 rd Robert Smith Jonathan Mortimer Jeremy Webb 

Page 1 of 34




1 SPORTING REGULATIONS – GENERAL 

1.1 Title & Jurisdiction 

1.2 Officials 

The 2013 Caterham Roadsport Championship is organised and administrated by the British Racing and Sports Car 

CLUB (BRSCC) in accordance with the General Regulations of the Motor Sports Association (incorporating the 

provisions of the International Sporting Code of the FIA) and these Championship Regulations. 

MSA Championship Permit No: CH2013/R051 

Race Status: National B 

MSA Championship Grade: C 

The BRSCC reserve the right to amend or vary the Sporting Regulations in accordance with MSA Regulation [D 

11.1.3] at any time before or during the Championship and further issue additional statements concerning the 

Regulations from time to time, subject to MSA approval, and all such statements will be issued by Championship 

Bulletin to the MSA and to all registered competitors by email or by post to the address detailed on the 

Registration Form, or by delivery to the competitor by hand. It is a condition of entry into the championship that 

all competitors, teams, team members and persons associated with any of the above agree to be bound by the 

Regulations including any amendments, variations or statements relating thereto. 

The promoter and manufacturer, Caterham Cars Ltd is hereafter referred to as ‘Caterham’. Caterham operates 

from four sites; Dartford (Dartford, Kent; factory, engineering and Caterham Motorsport office), Midlands (nr 

Leicester; sales and race support), South (Caterham, Surrey; sales and marketing) and Westbury (Westbury, 

Wiltshire; chassis manufacture and repair). 

1.2.1 Coordinator 

Jennifer Grace 

Caterham Cars Ltd 

Kennet Rd., 

Dartford 

Kent 

DA1 4QN 

Tel – 07808776366 

1.2.2 Clerk of the Course 

Bernard Cottrell 

BRSCC 

Homesdale Business Centre 

Platt Industrial Estate 

Maidstone Road 

Borough Green 

TN15 8JL 

Tel 07836 684100 

Email Bernard@brscc.co.uk 

1.2.3 Eligibility Scrutineer Deputy Eligibility Scrutineer 

Ian Millar 

11 The Square 

Penicuik 

EN26 8LH 

(01628) 603188 (01968) 678752 

(07973) 864143 (07703) 765692 

Page 2 of 34 

Mike Hibbins 

4 Stacklands Close 

West Kingdown 

Sevenoaks 

Kent 

TN15 6DL 

Tel: Home (01474) 854121 

Mobile (07785) 247355



scrutineer@caterham.co.uk 

Email: mike@brscc.co.uk 


1.2.4. Championship Stewards 

B Armstrong, D Wells, R Smith & D Walton 

Any three Championship Stewards will constitute a quorum. In the event of any of the Championship Stewards 

listed above being unavailable or being unable to consider any particular matter due to a perceived conflict of 

interest, the organisers reserve the right to appoint an alternative Championship Steward or, if deemed to be 

necessary, more than one alternative Championship Steward. 

1.3 Competitor Eligibility 

1.3.1 Entrants must be a fully paid up valid membership card holding members of the BRSCC and be in possession of a 

valid 2013 Entrants Licence 

1.3.2 Drivers and Entrant Drivers must be fully paid up valid membership card holding racing members of the BRSCC, 

be registered for the Championship and be in possession of a valid MSA Competition (Racing) National (B) or 

above licences or be a professional driver in possession of a valid Licence (featuring an E.U. flag) and medical, 

issued by the ASN of a member country of the European Union. MSA Regulation [H 26.1.5] applies. 

A competitor shall not take time off school to participate in motor sport without the prior written approval of 

their school. If participation in the Championship requires absence from school, Drivers in full time school 

education are required to have the approval of their head teacher and a letter stating such approval from his/her 

school in order to fulfil registration for the Championship. 

1.3.3(a) 

1.3.3(b) 

All Drivers, with the exception of 1.3.3(b) must be registered for the 2013 Caterham Roadsport Championship in 

order to be eligible to take part in any of the races forming this championship. Unregistered drivers will not be 

permitted to qualify or take part in any of these events. 

Caterham reserves the right to enter a ‘Celebrity/Development/Guest’ car at any event. This car and driver(s) 

will not score points but may be awarded individual race trophies if the finish position merits it; the competition 

Number 7 will be reserved for this entry. 

1.3.4 All necessary documentation must be presented for checking at all rounds when signing-on. 

1.3.5 Competitors must ensure that their cars comply with the conditions of eligibility and safety throughout qualifying 

and racing. 

1.3.6 At each round, the car (identified by its unique chassis number) in which a driver races, must be the same car in 

which the driver qualified or, where a grid is determined by the outcome of a preceding race, must be the same 

car in which the driver competed in that race. 

Under some circumstances, the Clerk of the Course may grant permission for an alternative car to be used, 

should they feel this is appropriate. 

1.3.7 Technical & Race Support 

Tracksport And Supersport 

Full professional support allowed 

Roadsport 

Caterham will provide centralised technical support at all events. The support is mandatory and paid for by the 

drivers. It is a flat fee for the year, regardless of the number of events a competitor takes part in. The fee covers 

all rounds and test days when the test day falls the day prior to the race meeting (Support terms and conditions 

are covered in a separate document). Team support of any other kind is specifically prohibited at competitive 

events and pre-event test days when Caterham are present to provide support. A team is defined as an 

individual or organisation professionally involved in the build, preparation, set-up or transport, of track day 

and/or competition cars; or ARDS qualified instruction. Support is defined as providing assistance, transport, 

team shelter or team area, timing or any other activity associated with the running of a car at a competitive 

event. Competitors are permitted to help each other and enlist the support of family and friends on a strictly 

Page 3 of 34



amateur basis. 


It is permitted for a competitor to have their car transported to and from an event on their behalf. Where this 

service is carried out be a team as opposed to a transport company or any other non-motorsport related 

business, no team personnel may remain in the allotted Roadsport paddock area immediately after the car has 

been delivered, otherwise this will be considered as team support. A team may not return to the Roadsport 

paddock to collect the car until competition has finished. No work may be carried out at the venue, unless to 

make the car viable for transport. 

1.4 Registration 

1.4.1 All drivers must register with the Coordinator not less than two weeks before practice of the first round being 

entered for the championship by completing the online registration system found on the Caterham website. 

Each driver will be issued with a separate competition number. If an entrant wishes to nominate more than one 

driver during the course of the season he/she must complete one registration form for each driver. 

1.4.2 A registration fee of £425 with a £50 early registration discount if registered prior to 31 st December 2012 for the 

complete season, or £150 per race weekend, is payable for this championship in respect of each driver entered. 

Cheques should be made payable to Caterham Cars Limited. Registered drivers may allow substitute drivers to 

take part in events in their place without the payment of additional registration fees with the permission of the 

coordinator. However, registration forms must still be completed at least one week before the event in 

question. 

1.4.3 The organisers and promoters of the championship reserve the right to refuse registrations at their discretion. 

1.4.4 Registration numbers will be permanent competition numbers for the championship. Numbers will be allocated 

on request using a first come first served basis until the end of January 2013 with priority given to drivers 

competing in the 2013 Caterham Roadsport Championship wishing to retain their 2012 numbers. After 1 

February 2013 championship numbers will be allocated by the coordinator. 

#1 is reserved in the Tracksport championship for the 2012 Tracksport championship winner. #1 is reserved in 

the Supersport championship for the 2012 Supersport championship winner. The Academy and Roadsport 

champions cannot carry that status forward should they be upgrading to Roadsport, Tracksport or Supersport. 

#1 will not be allocated to any driver in Roadsport. If a 2012 champion does not compete in the same class in 

2013, #1 will not be allocated to any other driver. 

Drivers from the 2012 Academy championship will have their 2012 number reserved for Roadsport until the 31 

January 2013 (unless they register earlier and choose a different number), at which point it will be made 

available to others. Where two drivers have the same number, the option to retain the number will be given to 

the driver that finished highest in their respective 2012 Academy championships. In the event of these positions 

being equal, it will be resolved as per a tie in championship total score. 

Drivers from the 2012 Roadsport championship will have their 2012 number reserved for Tracksport until the 31 

January 2013 (unless they register earlier and choose a different number – or if their number is already taken by 

an existing Tracksport driver), at which point it will be made available to others. 

Drivers from the 2012 Tracksport championship will have their 2012 number reserved for Tracksport or 

Supersport until the 31 January 2013 (unless they register earlier and choose a different number), at which point 

it will be made available to others. 

Drivers from the 2012 Supersport championship will have their 2012 number reserved for Supersport until the 

31 January 2013 (unless they register earlier and choose a different number), at which point it will be made 

available to others. 

The regular race number of the 2012 Tracksport and Supersport champions will also be held in reserve for the 

duration of the season, to allow them to revert to their preferred number in 2014 if they do not win the 

championship. 

Page 4 of 34



1.5 Championship Rounds 


The 2013 Championship will be contested over 14 rounds at the following venues. 

1.6 Scoring 

Round Date Venue Licence Status Club 

1 & 2 April 20/21 Snetterton 300 National B BRSCC 

3 & 4 May 11/12 Anglesey International National B BRSCC 

5 & 6 June 8/9 Zandvoort National A KNAF 

7 & 8 July 13/14 Donington Nat National B BRSCC 

9 & 10 August 3/4 Brands Hatch Indy National B BRSCC 

11 & 12 September 14 Oulton Park International National B BRSCC 

13 & 14 October 19/20 Silverstone International National B BRSCC 

1.6.1 Points will be awarded to Competitors entering each Race as follows: 

1 st 

2 nd 

3 rd 

4 th 

5 th 

6 th 

7 th 

8 th 

9 th 

10 th 

11 th 

12 th 

13 th 

14 th 

15 th 

16 th 

17 th 

18 th 

19 th 

20 th 

21 st 

22 nd 

23 rd 

25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 

Note: All other finishers will receive 1 point 

One extra point awarded for fastest lap in each race. 

In the event of a Double Header, both races will score full points and be eligible for trophies and prizes. 

Trophies will be awarded to the top three competitors in each class in each race 

1.6.2 The totals from all rounds of the championship held, less two will determine the final Championship points and 

positions. Drivers excluded from results for sporting/technical infringements may not use that (those) event(s) as 

discarded rounds for the purpose of overall championship placings. 

1.6.3 Ties will be resolved according to MSA Regulation [W 1.3.4]. 

1.6.4 The ‘Celebrity/Development/Guest’ car driver(s) will not score points but may be awarded individual race trophies 

if the finish position merits it. 

1.6.5 Driver’s whose only races of the championship are the final double-header weekend races, will not score 

championship points for these rounds. 

1.7 AWARDS 

1.7.1 There will be prizes provided by the sponsors and distributed to drivers in the Caterham Roadsport Championship 

as follows: 

1.7.2 Per Round 

Trophies will be given for 1 st , 2 nd & 3 rd place winners in each class. 

1.7.3 End of the season awards will be presented as follows: 

Roadsport, Tracksport and Supersport 

1.7.4 Bonuses 

Trophies to 1 st 2 nd and 3 rd in each class 

Page 5 of 34




The organisers/sponsors/promoters reserve the right to provide additional awards for and during the 

Championship. 

1.7.5 Presentations 

Garlands and trophies will be provided for each round and shall be presented at the end of each round in the Race 

Centre. 

Competitors shall be obliged to attend all prize giving ceremonies for which the race meeting and championship 

organisers give adequate notice of the dates, times and venues for the same in their final instructions or bulletins. 

Competitors are reminded that if required to take part in a podium celebration, they must present themselves in 

their race overalls, worn correctly, for the purposes of neat and professional presentation. 

1.7.6 Entertainment Tax Liability 

In accordance with current Government Legislation, the Organisers of every round are legally obliged to withhold 

tax at the current basic rate on all payments to non-UK resident sportsmen/sportswomen and account to HMRC 

using form FEU1, the quarterly return of payments made to non-resident entertainers and sportsmen/women. 

That is, those persons who do not have a normal permanent residence in the UK. The UK does not include the Isle 

of Man, Channel Isles or Eire. 

This means that the Organisers of every round are required to deduct tax at the relevant rate, from such 

payments they may make to non-UK residents. Under certain circumstances, it is possible for competitors to enter 

into an agreement with the Inland Revenue to limit tax withheld. Any application for such an arrangement must 

be made in writing and not later than 30 days before their payment is due. 

For further information contact: - HMRC Personal Tax International, Foreign Entertainers Unit, St Johns House, 

Merton Road, Liverpool L75 1BB. Tel: (0151) 472 6488 Fax: (0151) 472 6483 

1.7.7 Title to all Trophies 

In the event of any Provisional Results being revised after any provisional presentations and if such revisions affect 

the distribution of any awards the competitors concerned must return such awards to the BRSCC in good condition 

within 7 days. 

Page 6 of 34




2. SPORTING REGULATIONS - JUDICIAL PROCEDURES 

2.1 Rounds 

In accordance with Section C of the current MSA Yearbook and these championship regulations. 

2.2 Championship 

In accordance with Section C of the current MSA Yearbook. 

Page 7 of 34




3. SPORTING REGULATIONS 

CHAMPIONSHIP RACE MEETINGS AND RACE PROCEDURES 

3.1 Entries 

3.1.1 Competitors are responsible for sending in correct and complete entries with the correct entry fees prior to the 

entry closing date, which shall be 14 days before every round. 

3.1.2 Incorrect or incomplete entries (including driver to be nominated entries) are to be held in abeyance until they are 

complete and correct. The date of receipt for acceptance of entry purposes shall be the date on which the Secretary 

of the Meeting receives the missing or corrected information or fee. 

3.1.3 Any withdrawal of Entry or Driver/Car changes made after the acceptance of any entry must be notified to the 

Secretary of the Meeting in writing. If Driver/Vehicle changes are made after publication of Entry Lists with Final 

Instructions the competitor concerned must apply for approval of acceptance by the stewards of the meeting 

before signing on. 

3.1.4 The Maximum entry fee for every round shall be as stipulated in the Supplementary Regulations plus any late entry 

surcharge imposed by the club. 

3.1.5 In the event of any rounds being oversubscribed the Organising Clubs in liaison with the coordinator / organiser 

may at their discretion run a Qualification Race System. The number of entries received will be reviewed 14 days 

prior to the event and the decision will be made if the qualifying system is required and the clubs/organisers 

decision is final. For Qualification Race procedures see 3.13 of these regulations. 

In the event that oversubscription becomes a possibility in the 2013 Roadsport championship, priority for entry is 

given to drivers in the following order ; unless they register after 31 January 2013 

• Drivers that competed in the 2012 Academy 

• 2011 or earlier Academy drivers returning racing, with preference to the most recent. 

• All others on a ‘first registered’ basis 

In the event that oversubscription becomes a possibility in the 2013 Tracksport championship, priority for entry is 

given to drivers in the following order; unless they register after 31 January 2013: 

• Drivers that competed in the 2012 Roadsport championship 

• Drivers that competed in the 2012 Tracksport championship 

• Lapsed drivers that competed in the 2011 Roadsport B championship returning to racing. 

• Lapsed drivers that competed in the 2011 Academy returning to racing. 

• All others on a ‘first registered’ basis. 

In the event that oversubscription becomes a possibility in the 2013 Supersport championship, priority for entry is 

given to drivers in the following order; unless they register after 31 January 2013: 

• Drivers that competed in the 2012 Tracksport championship 

• Drivers that competed in the 2012 Supersport championship 

• Drivers that competed in the 2011 Roadsport B championship 

• All others on a ‘first registered’ basis. 

By using an alternative measure as deemed most fair by the Organisers should the above result in an anomaly or 

does not sufficiently resolve the issue. Competitors are reminded that in line with nearly all other championships in 

UK motorsport, early registration will be in their interest as this is the most common measure used to resolve 

oversubscription. 

3.1.6 Reserves are to be nominated on the final list of entries published with Final Instructions or Amendment Sheet 

Bulletins. All Reserves will practice and replace withdrawn or retired entries Reserve Number order irrespective of 

class. If Reserves are given Grid Places prior to issue of the first Grid Sheets for any round the times set in Practice 

Page 8 of 34




shall determine their grid positions. If Reserves are given places after publication of the grid sheet and prior to cars 

being collected in the Official “Assembly Areas” they will be placed at the rear of the Grid and be started without 

any time delay. Otherwise, they will be held in the Pitlane and be released to start the race after the last car to start 

the GREEN FLAG LAP or last car to take the start has passed the startline or pitlane exit, whichever is the later. Such 

approval to start MUST be obtained from the Clerk of the Course. 

3.2 Briefings 

Organisers will notify competitors of the times and locations for all briefings in the Final Instructions for all 

meetings, competitors must attend all briefings. 

3.3 Practice 

3.3.1 The minimum period of practice to be as specified in the MSA Regulations in respect of circuit lengths. 

3.3.2 Should any practice session be disrupted the Clerk of the Course shall not be obliged to resume the session or rerun 

sessions to achieve the championship/series criteria and the decision of the Clerk of the Course shall be final. 

3.3.3. Should the need arise to stop any practice, RED LIGHTS will be switched on at the Start Line and RED FLAGS will be 

displayed at the start line and at all other Marshal Signalling Points around the circuit. This is the signal for all 

drivers to cease circulating at racing speeds, to slow to a safe and reasonable pace and return to the pit lane unless 

directed by officials not to do so. 

3.4 Qualification 

3.5 Races 

Each driver should complete a minimum of 3 laps practice in the car to be raced and in the correct session in order 

to qualify for selection and order of precedence as set out in the MSA regulations [Q 4.5]. The Clerk of the Course 

and or Stewards of the meeting shall have the right to exclude any driver whose practice times or racing are 

considered unsatisfactory as per MSA Regulation [Q 4.5.3]. 

3.5.1 The standard minimum scheduled distance for Tracksport and Supersport shall be 30 minutes (see 3.13 for 

exceptions to this) and for Roadsport shall be 20 minutes, but should any race distance be reduced at the discretion 

of the Clerk of the Course or Stewards of the meeting it shall still count as a full points scoring round. 

3.6 Starts 

3.6.1 All race start countdowns are to have a minimum elapsed period of 3 minutes from the time all cars are released to 

form up the grid to the start of the Green Flag lap(s) in the formation as specified on the Track Licence for the 

Circuit. 

3.6.2 The minimum countdown procedures/audible warning sequence shall be: 

Standing Starts 

1 minute to start of Green Flag lap - Start Engines/Clear Grid. 

30 Seconds - Visible and audible warnings for the start of Green Flag lap. 

3.6.3 You are reminded that the use of tyre heating/heat retention devices, tyre treatments and compounds is 

prohibited. 

3.6.4 Any cars removed from the grid after the 1-minute stage or driven into the pits on Green Flag shall be held in the 

pit lane. They may start the race after the last car to take the start from the grid has passed the start line or pit lane 

exit, whichever is the later. 

3.6.5 Any drivers unable to start the Green Flag lap or start are required to indicate their situation as per MSA Regulation 

[Q 12.13.2]. Any drivers unable to maintain grid positions on the Green Flag lap to the extent that all other cars are 

Page 9 of 34




ahead of them may complete the Green Flag Lap. They MUST remain at the rear of the last row of the grid but 

ahead of any cars to be started with a time delay. 

3.6.6 Excessive weaving to warm-up tyres using more than 50% of the track width and falling back in order to accelerate 

and practice starts, is prohibited. 

3.6.7 A 5 Second Board will be shown to indicate that the Grid is complete. The red lights will be switched on five seconds 

after the board is withdrawn. In the event that the starting lights fail the Starter will revert to using the National 

Flag. 

3.7 Race Stops 

3.7.1 Should the need arise to stop any race or practice, RED LIGHTS will be switched on at the Start Line and RED FLAGS 

will be displayed at the startline and at all Marshals Signalling Points around the circuit. 

This is the signal for all drivers to cease circulating at racing speeds, to slow to a safe and reasonable pace and to 

return to the starting grid area, which will automatically become a Parc Fermé area. 

Cars may not enter the pits unless directed to do so. Work on cars already in the pits must cease when a race is 

stopped. 

3.7.2 Case A – Less than two laps completed by the race leader 

The Race will be null and void. The race will restart from the original grid positions. Competitors unable to take the 

restart may be placed by reserves who will start from the back of the grid in reserve order. Gaps on the grid should 

not be closed up. The length of the restarted race will be determined by the Clerk of the Course. 

3.7.3 Case B – More than two laps completed by the race leader but less than 75% of the scheduled distance 

The Race will restart from a grid set out by the finishing order of part one (as per MSA Regulation [Q 5.4.2]). The 

result of the race will be the finishing order at the end of part 2. The length of the restarted race will be 

determined by the Clerk of the Course. 

3.7.4 Case C - More than 75% of race completed 

If the leader has completed more than 75% of the race distance or duration it shall not be re-started and the results 

will be declared in accordance with MSA Regulation [Q 5.4.3], unless the Clerk of the Course, in consultation with 

the Stewards deem it appropriate to restart the race. 

3.8 Re-Scrutiny 

All vehicles reported involved in contact incidents during races or practice must be re-presented to the Scrutineers 

before continuing in the races or practice. 

3.9 Pits and Pitlane Safety 

3.9.1 Pits 

Entrants must ensure that the MSA, Circuit Management and Organising Club Safety Regulations are complied with 

at all times. 

3.9.2 Pit Lane 

The outer lane or lanes are to be kept unobstructed to allow safe passage of cars at all times. The onus shall be on 

all Drivers to take due care and drive at minimum speeds in the Pit Lanes. 

3.9.3 Refuelling 

Refuelling may only be carried out in accordance with the MSA Regulations [Q 13], Circuit Management Regulations 

and SR’s or Final Instructions issued for every meeting. 

3.10 Race Finishes 

Page 10 of 34




After taking the Chequered Flag drivers are required to progressively and safely slow down. Remain behind any 

competitors ahead of them, return to the pit lane entrance as instructed, comply with any directions given by 

marshals or officials and to keep their helmets on and harnesses done up while on the circuit or pit lane. 

3.11 Results 

During races, drivers will be notified of the progress of the race in the following way: 

Tracksport and Supersport when the race has run for 25mins. 

Roadsport when the race has run for 15 minutes 

The leader and the whole field will be shown the 5 minute board to indicate that the race is into its final 5 minutes. 

The leader and the whole field will then be shown the last lap board to indicate that they are on the final lap of the 

race. On completion of the race, the chequered flag will be shown. 

All Practice Timesheets, Grids, Race Results are deemed provisional until all vehicles are released by Scrutineers 

after Post Practice/Race Scrutineering and/or after completion of any Judicial or Technical Procedures. 

3.12 Timing Modules 

3.12.1 All competitors will be required to fit Electronic Self Identification Modules to their cars for the purposes of 

accurate timing. Holders for these and detailed fitting instructions will be issued with the transponders and it will 

be the responsibility of the competitor to fit these in the car in the position and manner specified. The Modules 

must be in place and functioning correctly for all Championship qualifying practice sessions and races. The setting 

and servicing of these items must only be carried out by properly authorised MSA licensed Timekeepers. 

Competitors will be charged by the timing company for replacement of the Modules due to misuse or loss at any 

time during the season. 

3.12.2 Competitors may not place electronic timing equipment within five metres of the official Start, Finish or any other 

official timing lines at any event or test session/day. Any such equipment placed within these zones will be 

removed. 

3.13 Qualification Races 

In the event of any Roadsport, Tracksport or Supersport rounds being oversubscribed the Organising Clubs in 

consultation with the organisers may at their discretion run the following Qualification Race System. 

Qualifying 

Competitors will qualify in the session as detailed on the timetable. After qualifying competitors will be split into 3 

groups: 

• Group A 

• Group B 

• Group C 

Qualifying Group Allocation 

1 st A1 

2 nd B1 

3 rd C1 

4 th A2 

5 th B2 

6 th C2 

7 th A3 

8 th B3 

9 th C3 

And so on until all competitors are allocated into a group. Should any car not finish the qualifying, they will be 

placed into a group in reverse order of retirement. 

Page 11 of 34




Should it be necessary to provide two qualifying sessions, competitors will be split randomly between the two 

qualifying sessions. Upon completion of the qualifying sessions, Competitors will be allocated into Groups A, B and 

C as follows: 

Qualifying 1 Group Allocation Qualifying 2 Group Allocation 

1 st A1 1 st B1 

2 nd C1 2 nd A2 

3 rd B2 3 rd C2 

4 th A3 4 th B3 

5 th C3 5 th A4 

6 th B4 6 th C4 

7 th A5 7 th B5 

8 th C5 8 th A6 

9 th B6 9 th C6 

Qualifying 1 will be deemed to be the qualifying session in which the faster lap was set, irrespective of track 

conditions. Should equal fastest lap times be recorded in both qualifying sessions, qualifying 1 will be decided by 

referring to second fastest lap times recorded by the two competitors who recorded equal times and so on. 

Races 

Each group will then race against each other, each racing twice as follows: 

• Race 1 – Group A & B 

• Race 2 – Group B & C 

• Race 3 – Group C & A 

Each race will be a minimum scheduled race distance of 30 minutes for Tracksport and Supersport, and 20 minutes 

for Roadsport. 

Grids 

When there has been two qualifying sessions, the grids for each of these races will be simply formed by placing 

each group in order regardless of the time recorded in qualifying. Race 1 will have A1 on pole, Race 2 B1 on pole 

and Race 3 will have C1 on pole. 

When there has been a single qualifying session, the ‘pole position’ group will be the one with the faster recorded 

time in qualifying. 

Race 1 - A & B Race 2 - B & C Race 3 – C & A 

A1 B1 B1 C1 C1 A1 

A2 B2 B2 C2 C2 A2 

A3 B3 B3 C3 C3 A3 

A4 B4 B4 C4 C4 A4 

A5 B5 B5 C5 C5 A5 

A6 B6 B6 C6 C6 A6 

A7 B7 B7 C7 C7 A7 

A8 B8 B8 C8 C8 A8 

= Pole Position 

Points will be awarded as in 1.6 for each of the 3 races gaining competitors points for the usual 2 races. 

3.14 Operation of Safety Car 

3.14.1 The Safety Car will be brought into operation and run in accordance with Section Q, Appendix 2 of the MSA General 

Regulations. 

Page 12 of 34




4 CHAMPIONSHIP RACE PENALTIES 

4.1 Infringements of Technical Regulations 

4.1.1 Arising from post practice scrutineering or judicial action: 

Minimum penalty: As laid down in MSA Regulation [C 3.3] 

4.1.2 Arising from post race scrutineering or judicial action: 

Minimum penalty: The provisions of MSA Regulation [C 3.5.1 (a) & (b)]. 

For infringements deemed to be of a more serious nature or a deliberate attempt to gain an advantage the Clerk of 

the Course and/or Stewards of the Meeting are to invoke the provisions of Regulation [C 3.5.1 (c)]. 

4.1.3 Additional Specific Championship Penalties 

4.1.3.1 The Stewards of the Championship reserve the right to impose further penalties on competitors found to have 

transgressed any technical regulations. 

Penalties imposed by the Stewards of the Championship may include points penalties, race bans or exclusion from 

the Championship 

4.2 Infringements of Non Technical MSA Regulations and the Sporting Regulations Issued for the 

Championship 

4.2.1 For offences under MSA Regulations [C1.1.5], [C1.1.6], [Q14.4.2] and [Q14.5], the Clerk of the Course, at his 

discretion, may additionally impose a championship penalty in the form of the following: 

(i) For an offence in qualifying; a grid penalty of up to ten places 

(ii) For an offence in a race; a time penalty of up to one minute 

(iii) For an offence in a race where the offending driver is not classified; a grid position penalty in the next 

race/event. 

For a driver who has already received a penalty during the course of a season, any subsequent penalty WILL have a 

championship penalty applied. Where a championship penalty has previously been applied, the severity will be 

increased 

Otherwise as per MSA Judicial Procedure Regulations and the provisions of these championship regulations. 

4.2.2 If a competitor receives a penalty that includes licence points, a ‘3x points multiplier’ championship penalty will also 

be incurred, whereby the number of points will be multiplied by three and that number of championship points be 

deducted from their championship total. 


Single Qualifying Session, Single Race. 

At any meeting, event, official qualifying or race, where any competitor shall be found guilty of any of the following 

offences, they shall forfeit all points in the championship gained solely at that event to that point during the event 

and shall be ineligible to score any points for the remainder of that event. 

Multiple Qualifying/Multiple Races. 

In the case of double header races or multi-races, where an offence below is committed during any qualifying 

session(s) or the first race, then points gained for the qualifying session(s) and the first race will be forfeited. Where 

an offence occurs during any subsequent race then the points solely gained for that race shall be forfeited. 

Should two separate offences be committed, then all points shall be forfeited for that whole event, irrespective of 

Page 13 of 34




the timing of the offence committed at that event. Where a “double header” event takes place at the same venue 

over a weekend and is conducted as two separate race days then this regulation shall only apply to each day 

individually. 

The offences are; 

a Reckless or dangerous driving in the course of a meeting – MSA Regulation [C 1.1.5]. 

4.2.4 Any driver subject to disciplinary measures by the Clerk of the Course or the Stewards of the Meeting in relation to 

his driving of a car or his behaviour in the paddock at a meeting within this Championship may also be subject to 

additional penalties imposed by the Stewards of the Championship including points penalties, mandatory driving 

assessment, instruction, race bans or exclusion from the series. 

4.2.5 In order to maintain standards of conduct, the Championship Coordinator will monitor all Officials/Observers 

reports of adverse behaviour at race meetings. If any individual is included on two such reports during one racing 

season he or she will receive written warning from the Championship Coordinator that his or her driving/behaviour 

is to be specifically observed at future race meetings. Any adverse reports during this period of observation could 

result in official MSA action and will result in a Championship Stewards' enquiry, with possible loss of Championship 

points and refusal of further race entries. 

4.2.6 Any driver deemed by the Stewards of the Championship to have brought the promoter, Caterham, the 

championship or the sport into disrepute through his or her behaviour or actions, wherever this may be, may be 

subject to disciplinary measures imposed by the Stewards of the Championship including points penalties, 

mandatory driving assessment, instruction, race bans or exclusion from the series. 

4.2.7 Video recording equipment is mandated by the technical regulations for the championship. A competitor must 

ensure that this equipment is recording during races and make the recorded footage available on request by the 

Clerk of the Course or his representatives. Failure to do so may lead to disciplinary measures by the Clerk of the 

Course and may prejudice their defence in the case of an incident. This request is not restricted to the single 

forward facing camera mandated, but any additional video recording equipment utilised on the car. 

Page 14 of 34




5. TECHNICAL REGULATIONS 

5.1 INTRODUCTION 

The following Technical regulations are set out in accordance with MSA specified format and it should be clearly 

understood that if the following texts do not clearly specify that you can do it, you should work on the 

principle that you cannot. All references to the MSA Yearbook (blue book) relate to the current edition. 

Due to the continued development of the chassis and associated parts, Caterham reserve the right to change 

parts or part numbers specified within these regulations, at any time during the life of these regulations, and 

without prior notice, subject to MSA Regulation [D 11.1.3]. 

The official MSA Eligibility Scrutineer or his appointed deputy will be attending rounds of the championship and 

he is available to provide advice as well as ensuring that the regulations are strictly enforced to ensure fair play. 

All Caterham Roadsport Championship cars must comply with the requirements as laid down in the Technical 

regulations at all times, whether during official practice or racing and it is the Entrant's responsibility to ensure 

all such requirements are met. Any infringement of the Technical Regulations will render the competitor liable 

to penalties as set out in Section 4 of these regulations. 

Technical checks may be carried out before, during and after practice and again at the end of the race. The 

Eligibility Scrutineer or his appointed deputy is empowered to undertake any form of technical verification 

procedure that he deems necessary and may order the removal of parts from the car, substitution of standard 

parts, or for the car to be otherwise dismantled in order to carry out inspection. This specifically includes the 

substitution of parts at random and the Scrutineer has the right to swap components from car to car. All costs 

will be borne by the competitor 

Cars may be taken back to Caterham after any race meeting for full technical examination. 

The Eligibility Scrutineer or his appointed deputy reserves the right to check any suspect part directly with a 

standard part as supplied by Caterham. Suspect parts that might need to be removed for checking elsewhere 

will be marked by official MSA approved seals and a certificate of sealing will be handed to the competitor or his 

agent. This certificate will detail the seals and the precautions that need to be taken to keep the seals intact. 

Should the competitor or his agent not be present whilst his car is being dismantled for checking, no dispute 

over his vehicle or its components will be entertained. All costs will be borne by the competitor. 

It is a condition of the championship that any vehicle may be selected for an engine power test by the Eligibility 

Scrutineer or his appointed deputy at any time and its brake horsepower measured over a representative range 

of engine speeds. The organisers cannot be held responsible for mechanical damage to engines and 

transmissions when under test. However such tests will not put the cars through any stresses beyond normal 

design limitations. 

Although the coordinator and technical personnel from Caterham are happy to advise competitors on rules and 

regulations, they are not empowered to give any kind of judgement regarding the eligibility of cars. 

Finally, don't forget that although your Scrutineer is happy to speak to you about these regulations, it is 

extremely discourteous to contact him after 10.00pm. 

5.1.2 Parc Fermé 

At all events the showing of the Chequered Flag (for both Qualifying and Racing) will indicate the 

commencement of Parc Fermé Regulations. Any vehicle that is in the pit lane at this time will be under Parc 

Fermé rules. 

It is prohibited to work on any vehicle after the chequered flag has been shown. This includes tyre pressure 

checking, wheel changes or changes of driver. 

Page 15 of 34




Any vehicle in the pit lane must be immediately taken to the designated Parc Fermé area. No team personnel 

may enter Parc Fermé unless authorised by the Eligibility Scrutineer or their Deputy. 

No tools of any type may be passed by team members or mechanics to drivers whilst in Parc Fermé. 

Competitors are reminded that the area designated as Parc Fermé area is a secure area and it is not permitted 

for any supporters to be in Parc Fermé unless at the behest of the eligibility scrutineer or their deputy. 

5.2 General Description 

The 2013 Caterham Roadsport Championship is a one make racing championship for competitors competing in 

1.6 Ford Sigma powered Caterham Sevens in road going form. 

The 2013 Caterham Tracksport Championship is a one make racing championship for competitors participating 

in Ford Sigma power Caterham Sevens in road going form, with exceptions allowed for racing. 

The 2013 Caterham Supersport Championship is a one make racing championship for competitors participating 

in Ford Sigma power Caterham Sevens in road going form, with exceptions allowed for racing. 

All three championships are to controlled specifications. No modifications whatsoever are allowed from the 

basic specification except those described below. 

All cars must be road registered and registration documents must be available for inspection at all meetings 

Tracksport and Supersport cars must be road legal at all times with the exception of removal of number plates, 

headlamps, headlamp brackets, front indicators, side repeater lamps, number plate light, reverse light and rear 

fog light. 

All Roadsport cars must be road legal at all times, with the exception of the removal of side repeater lamps. 

In all classes it is acceptable to fit the front wheels so that the tyres are in the opposite direction of rotation to 

that indicated on the tyre. 

MOT certificates and road tax are not required in either class. 

5.2.1 Examination of Vehicles 

The organisers (in addition to any other powers they may have under these Regulations) reserve the right 

before or after any race in the championship/series to designate any one or more of the competing cars for 

special eligibility scrutineering. Upon such election being made the competitor shall immediately place the car 

under the control of the organisers and be deemed to have permitted all such scrutineering, examination and 

testing as the organisers may responsibly require to undertake. The organisers have the right to: 

a 

b 

c 

Examine the car at the circuit for such period as they may reasonably require and take fuel samples and/or 

Retain the car for detailed examination at premises chosen by the organisers. If the organisers elect to retain 

the car they shall make it available for collection by the competitor at least seven days prior to the qualification 

session for the next race in the championship/series unless the car is found to be in breach of these regulations 

and/or 

Seal the car and its components in such a manner as they may choose and require the competitor at their own 

expense to present the car at any other premises chosen by the organisers for detailed examination within a 

specified period and/or remove the car by transporter at no expense to the competitor to an appointed 

location. The competitor will be advised in writing of the time, date and location of the subsequent testing or 

eligibility examination. 

The overseen stripping of the engine or any required component will be undertaken by the competitor and/or 

mechanic/technician nominated by the competitor. 

The organisers reserve the right to re-inspect vehicles at any time during the course of the season, should there 

Page 16 of 34



have been a regulation infringement or circuit incident. 


Competitors will be personally and solely responsible for ensuring that their cars comply with their registration 

details and with these regulations for each event at which they are entered. Failure to comply in either respect 

will be a breach of these regulations and will be deemed ineligible. Queries concerning eligibility should be 

referred in writing to the series Eligibility Scrutineer at least seven days prior to an event entered, to permit a 

ruling in advance of any meeting at which it is intended to compete. 

Tests to establish the power output and max rpm of any car’s engine may be carried out by the organisers or 

their representatives. Such power testing will be carried out using Caterham’s nominated facility. 

5.3 Safety Requirements 

All cars must conform to the general and competition regulations of the MSA, which define minimum safety 

requirements for racing purposes. All cars must conform to these regulations before they can be accepted for 

racing or official practice. You should refer to the current MSA Yearbook sections [J 5], [Q 19] and Section K. 

5.3.1 A Caterham supplied FIA approved rollover cage (Caterham part numbers 30P022A or 30P022B) must be fitted 

to all cars without further modification and must be bolted, not welded in place. 

A head restraint to MSA Regulation [K 13] must be fitted which must measure a minimum of 10cm x 10cm and 

be situated not more than 5cm behind the driver's head. The design of the head restraint is free provided that 

it conforms to MSA regulation [K 13]. There must be clearance of at least 5cm between the top of the driver's 

helmet and the top of the rollover cage. Competitors should note that Caterham composite seats part numbers 

73467 and 73468 must have an additional restraint fitted behind the headrest area to met the requirements of 

MSA Regulation [K 13]. 

Fitment of roll cage padding Caterham part number 79136 to the rollcage main hoop, roof diagonal and drivers 

side cant rail is mandatory 

5.3.2 Use of the Caterham supplied side impact / rear wheel protection bar (Part no; 37P034A or 30P306A) is 

mandatory. 

5.3.3 A six point full harness safety belt must be fitted complying with MSA Regulation [K 2.1.4]. Belts designed to pick 

up on the correct points on the chassis are available from Caterham. 

The use of arm restraints is mandatory and these are also available from Caterham. 

Competitors are recommended to replace complete belt sets involved in accidents. 

5.3.4 It is mandatory for all cars to be fitted with a minimum of a 2.25 litre AFFF plumbed in or equivalent fire 

extinguisher system. Ref: MSA Regulation [Q 19.14.7]. 

Under MSA and FIA regulations, fire extinguishers need to be recertified every two years. If your car is two 

years old this year, it is likely that your extinguisher will require this. 

Caterham recommend sending it to Lifeline Systems in Coventry for servicing and approval. To arrange return, 

please contact Lifeline directly on 02476 712999; address: Burnstall Road, Coventry, CV5 6BU. 

5.3.5 An electrical master switch to MSA Regulation [K 8] capable of isolating the battery and ignition systems must 

be fitted in such a position that it can be operated from both inside and outside the car. The switch and wiring 

provided allows it to be located on the offside of the scuttle within the windscreen stanchion where the 

protective eyebrow must be used. It is not mandatory to use a Caterham supplied switch. 

5.3.6 The electrical cut out must be marked by a red 'spark' on a blue triangle. 

5.3.7 The ignition switch 'OFF' position must be marked. 

Page 17 of 34




5.3.8 The battery (Caterham part number 53034W) must be located within the engine bay and its terminal must be 

protected by a non-conductive cover. The earth lead must be clearly marked in yellow. MSA regulations require 

that only the battery master switch and an electrically operated fire extinguisher may be connected to the 

battery. 

5.3.9 The rear bulkhead behind the driver and over the petrol tank must be made flameproof to MSA Regulation [Q 

19.1.1]. The boot floor over the petrol tank must be an aluminium honeycomb panel as supplied by Caterham. 

An aluminium shield should be placed over the rubber fuel filler hose. The use of tank tape to seal the boot 

floor to the rear bulkhead is not considered sufficiently flame proof. Suitable tape is available under Caterham 

part number 77519. Alternatively, the Caterham supplied F1 style safety cell may be fitted. 

5.3.10 The Caterham supplied FIA approved LED type high intensity rain light (Caterham part number 37L048A) is 

mandatory in all classes. A high intensity rear light must be fitted in the standard position on all Roadsport cars. 

(Caterham part number 71187) 

5.3.11 The engine may be fitted with the 36EB01A remote breather system. 

5.3.12 All chassis are manufactured with aluminium honeycomb chassis side impact protection, which must not be 

removed. 

5.3.13 You should also refer to MSA Regulation Q 10.1 concerning personal safety equipment, overalls boots and crash 

helmet. The wearing of balaclavas and flameproof gloves are mandatory in BRSCC championships. The wearing 

of open faced helmets in the Roadsport, Tracksport and Supersport championships is prohibited. Competitors 

are also strongly advised to wear flameproof underwear. 

Use of an FIA approved HANS device is only permitted if the device, competitor’s helmet, 6 point harness and 

car have all been presented simultaneously to Arch Motor & Manufacturing Ltd, Caterham’s approved HANS 

device fitters, to allow any necessary chassis modifications to the upper seat belt anchorages to be made. 

Competitors should note that chassis modification will be refused unless supporting paperwork is supplied to 

specify the correct locations of the upper seat belt anchorages. Furthermore modifications will be refused 

unless the helmet presented is specifically manufactured to be used in conjunction with a HANS device. A 

charge will be made to modify the chassis and proof of modification will be issued by Arch Motor & 

Manufacturing Ltd. Competitors may be asked to prove FIA compliance of their HANS device and to present 

their proof of modification paperwork at scrutineering. 

5.3.14 All chassis are manufactured with towing eyes front and rear and these should be clearly marked with an arrow 

in a contrasting colour. 

5.4 General Technical Requirements and Exceptions 

5.4.1 This is a one make formula and all cars are to be in identical class specification with the exception of the 

adjustments permitted by these regulations. 

5.4.2 No standard components can be modified, substituted, relocated or changed in any way except those specified 

herein. 

In recent years Caterham’s part numbering system has been revised. New part numbers now consist of seven 

digits. The last digit of this seven digit number is a suffix which will be ‘A’ for any new part. If there is a minor 

change to the part such that it is completely interchangeable with the outgoing part and supersedes it 

completely (for example, a change of supplier or material), the part number suffix will be changed to ‘B’ and so 

on. As a change may occur during the racing season, such a part may be used to replace a part identified with 

an earlier suffix (only) within these regulations. 

5.4.3 If in the light of experience safety related changes to these regulations are necessary, competitors will be given 

at least 10 days notice to effect modifications. 

5.4.4 All vehicles must comply with MSA General Technical Regulations contained within Sections C, H, J, K, L and Q 

of the current MSA Yearbook. 

Page 18 of 34




5.4.5 It is mandatory that any space between the driver’s seat back and the seat back bulkhead is filled with twin pack 

seat foam. 

5.5 Chassis (See Chassis/Bodywork) 

5.6 Chassis/Bodywork 

All cars eligible for this championship must be built using one of the following chassis: 

30P001x – where x indicates a chassis suffix of A, B, C, D or E and so on. 

30P008x – where x indicates a chassis suffix of A, B, C, D or E and so on. 

5.6.1 Modifications Permitted 

General 

Fitment of Caterham lowered drivers floorpan (part no: 30P044A or 30P228A) and a passenger lowered floor 

(part no: 30P043A or 30P229A) is permitted using steel rivets but cockpit floor bracing tubes must be retained if 

the chassis features them. 

5.6.2 All chassis repairs must be carried out by Arch Motor & Manufacturing Ltd or Caterham (Westbury, Dartford or 

Midlands), except temporary repairs undertaken at an event, where it is permissible to add or remove material 

from the chassis if the car has been involved in a practise, qualifying or race accident. Any such repairs must be 

sanctioned by the series scrutineer or his appointed deputy. All such repairs must then be checked by Arch 

Motors & Manufacturing Ltd or Caterham before the car competes at another race weekend. Any bolt-on part 

repaired must be replaced by an undamaged part before the car competes in another race weekend. 

The replacement or reinstallation of rivets/rivnuts into existing panels or the pushing/beating out of panels are 

exempted from this clause. For clarity, any repairs that require welding must be conducted by Caterham or 

Arch Motor and Manufacturing Ltd. If in doubt, contact the Series Scrutineer. 

It is permitted to fit heat insulation kit 30P242A (or just parts of it) to the footbox, tunnel and engine bay to 

reduce the heat in the cockpit. 

It is permitted to remove rubber trim and nut covers associated with compliance of IVA. 

Interior 

5.6.3 The driving seat is free but it is important to note that the driver's helmeted head must be at least 5cm below 

the top of the rollover bar when normally seated. 

Any apertures in the seat through which the harness shoulder straps, lap straps or crotch straps pass should be 

protected with rubber piping to prevent chaffing of the belt (this is standard fitment on the Caterham race seat 

supplied with the car and must not be removed. Competitors are reminded to periodically check the piping is in 

place and secure, as regular wear and tear can cause it to become detached.) 

It is permissible to modify the seatbelt/harness apertures to ensure that there is no contact between the straps 

and the seat when the driver is seated and secured in the car. 

5.6.4 It is permitted to leave the passenger seat in place. 

5.6.5 It is permitted to cut slots into the seat back aluminium panel to allow the shoulder straps of the seat belts to be 

fitted underneath the harness tube rather than above. 

5.6.6 It is permitted to drill fixing holes for a brake limiting valve. 

Exterior 

5.6.7 External mirrors are free provided at least two are fitted at all times, including when doors are removed for 

competition and that they conform to MSA requirements. 

5.6.8 Use of rear wing piping is not mandatory 

Page 19 of 34




5.6.9 The alternative front wingstays (Caterham part numbers 76101 and 76102) are permitted. 

5.6.10 Plastic screws (Part number BM5 x 25) may be used in place of the standard steel screws supplied to retain the 

rear wings. 

5.6.11 Caterham stainless steel or carbon fibre wing protectors may not be fitted to the rear wings. 

5.6.12 A short undertray designed to protect the crankshaft pulley and belt is available from Caterham (Part number 

70113). No other undertrays are permitted. It is permitted to cut a hole in this tray to allow use of an MST 

transponder. 

5.6.13 In Tracksport and Supersport the full windscreen may be removed and replaced by the Superlight race perspex 

screen part number 53330R which may not be modified or altered in any way. 

5.6.14 If the full windscreen is retained tape extending from the top of the windscreen to the front loop of the roll 

cage, but no further, is permitted. Tape may be used to help secure doors/half doors, but cannot be used to seal 

bonnet gaps. It is permitted to use tape as a temporary measure to secure damaged wings and nose cones at 

events, but competitors are expected to present their cars at scrutineering at the next event properly repaired. 

5.6.15 It is permitted to use Caterham half side screens (Part numbers 76257A and 76258A), but no other alternatives. 

5.6.16 It is permitted to fit a plain windscreen glass (Part no: 76050) in place of the standard heated glass in Roadsport. 

5.6.17 It is permitted to use Caterham Wind Deflectors (Part no. 77321) 

5.1.8 It is permitted to fit stainless steel sill protectors (Part no. 30P071A). Carbon Fibre sill protectors, though 

available from Caterham, are not permitted. 

5.6.19 Hood sticks are standard fitment to the car and must remain fitted to maintain the correct fitting of the 

standard boot cover, regardless of whether the car has a hood or not. 

Silhouette 

5.6.18 No modifications allowed. 

5.6.19 Modifications Prohibited 

General 

5.6.20 The standard Caterham supplied chassis must be used unmodified in any way and strengthening or stiffening by 

whatever means is expressly forbidden, other than those specified in 5.6.1. 

5.6.21 An alternative chassis must not be modified to conform to race specification. 

5.6.22 Only the honeycomb panels permitted in these regulations may be fitted. These should not be bonded into 

place, but can be riveted to the aluminium floor, not the chassis rails. 

Interior 

5.6.23 Do not attempt to add any extra stiffness to the chassis frame. The Eligibility Scrutineer or his deputy reserves 

the right to select cars to be returned to the Caterham factory to have torsional stiffness measured. Should 

there be any deviation from accepted production tolerances the assumption will be made that modifications 

have been made and that chassis will not be permitted to race again, notwithstanding the application of any 

penalties. 

5.6.24 The bolt in the cockpit stiffening wishbone supplied as standard with chassis part number CRD01.5RK may not 

be removed or its fastenings loosened. 

5.6.25 Removal of the drivers side honeycomb panels (part no: 76817 and 76818) is prohibited unless Caterham 

lowered floor (part no: 76470) is fitted. 

Page 20 of 34



5.6.26 Fitment of passenger side aluminium honeycomb panels is prohibited. 


5.6.27 Fitment of a carbon fibre dashboard is prohibited. 

Exterior 

5.6.28 Hoods and tonneau covers are prohibited for both practice and racing. 

5.6.29 Chassis are supplied without a spare wheel carrier. It is prohibited to fit one 

5.6.30 It is not permitted to drill any holes into or to modify the outer skin or inner panelling of the car except where 

specified in the assembly instructions, other than where chassis bushes have been factory drilled to expose 

them. 

5.6.31 The rear wings and nosecone must remain in GRP as standard and be original Caterham supplied parts. Cycle 

wings may either remain in GRP as standard and be original Caterham supplied parts, or the Caterham part 

number 30P317A ABS plastic wings. The substitution of aluminium or carbon fibre items even though available 

from Caterham is not permitted. 

5.6.32 In Roadsport, standard UK number plates measuring 520mm x 110mm must be fitted in the standard Caterham 

road position and orientation front and rear although these do not need to display the registration number of 

the vehicle. 

In Tracksport and Supersport, front number plates must be removed for racing. 

5.6.33 In Supersport it is mandatory to fit locking bonnet catches part number 30Z1079A in place of the standard overcentre 

items on the rear bonnet fixing. This ensures the integrity of the seal between the airbox and the bonnet 

intake hole. The locking bonnet clips are optional in Roadsport and Tracksport. 

Silhouette 

5.6.34 In Roadsport a standard full windscreen must be fitted at the correct angle and no additional holes are 

permitted to be made in the bodywork. 

5.6.35 The front wings must be either bolted or bonded in position as designed by Caterham. The leading edge of the 

wing to the forward-most edge of the wingstay must be no more than 80mm. The wingstay must not be 

modified in any way, such as bending the legs or mounting in a non-standard way that would lead to the wing 

being out of its factory standard position. A wingstay that has been lightly damaged in an accident may require 

replacement (at the Scrutineer’s discretion) if it affects the position in which the wing sits in relation to the 

wheel. 

Ground Clearance 

5.6.36 Ride height may be adjusted subject to a minimum 120mm ground clearance measured from the lowest point 

on the chassis side rails underneath the second suspension leg with the driver normally seated in the car at all 

times. A section of aluminium side-skin 30x30mm may be removed to expose the chassis member on both sides 

to allow for ride height to be measured. The measurement will be taken from the chassis member, not any 

weld. 

In the event of a puncture on arrival at Parc Ferme, it will be permissible for an alternative wheel and tyre to be 

fitted, inflated to 24psi, to ensure a valid ride height check; excepting when the puncture has been signalled to 

the driver by way of the ‘Mechanical failure’ flag (black with an orange disc) during the session. 

5.7 Engines 


Only 1.6 Ford Sigma sealed engines are eligible for this championship as supplied by Caterham. 

• In the event of an engine failure or wear, the engine must be returned to Caterham Dartford or Caterham 

Midlands to be rebuilt and resealed. It is the competitor’s responsibility to return his or her engine, fully 

kitted, to Caterham and to pay the cost of the rebuild. 

• Use of spark plugs Caterham part number 36E038A is mandatory 

Page 21 of 34



• The use of uprated valve springs and caps Caterham part number 30E169A is mandatory 

Tracksport 


Page 22 of 34 



Midlands to be rebuilt and resealed. It is the competitor’s responsibility to return his engine, fully kitted, to 

Caterham and to pay the cost of the rebuild. 


• The use of uprated valve springs and caps Caterham part number 30E169A is mandatory. 

• The use of injectors part number (36E080A) and accompanying fuel rail is mandatory. 

Supersport 



Midlands to be rebuilt and resealed. It is the competitor’s responsibility to return his engine, fully kitted, to 

Caterham and to pay the cost of the rebuild. 


• The use of uprated valve springs and caps Caterham part number 30E169A is mandatory. 

• The use of injectors part number (36E080A) and accompanying fuel rail is mandatory. 

• The use of camshaft kit part number 30E297A is mandatory. 

• It is permitted to fit the Caterham Sigma lightened flywheel, part number 30E259A. 

All Classes 

It is mandatory for the ECU to be programmed with the latest race tune as advised by and provided by 

Caterham. 

Caterham provide a spare sealed engine for all classes at all rounds that may be purchased. 

5.7.1 Permitted Modifications 

It is permitted to use cap head bolts to secure the engine mounting brackets to the rubber engine mountings. 

No other modifications are permitted 

5.7.2 Prohibited Modifications 

It is strictly forbidden for a competitor to modify, remove or substitute any component or part of the engine or 

any of its ancillaries, nor should the MSA seals be removed or tampered with. Should these seals be damaged 

or removed for whatever reason except under the direction of the MSA scrutineer or Caterham, the car should 

not be raced or practised until the MSA scrutineer or Caterham has inspected the engine and refitted the 

correct seals. 

The scrutineer or his appointed deputy may require that the engine be removed to be power tested, the costs 

of which will be borne by the competitor. If considered necessary, the engine will be dismantled for inspection 

and the cost of this, and subsequent rebuild, will be borne by the competitor. All instances of broken seals are 

logged and reported to the championship organiser. Suspect engines are most likely to be subjected to strip 

and inspection at the competitor’s costs. 

Dry sump equipment is prohibited in all classes 

The throttle potentiometer and its fixings must remain standard and in the original position. 

Cam sprockets, crank sprockets and cam belt must remain standard and in original positions. 

It is prohibited for competitors to make modifications to the oil pressure relief mechanism. 

In Roadsport and Tracksport classes, the standard Caterham Sigma 125bhp flywheel must be used. The 

lightweight flywheel for the Sigma (part number 30E259A), though available from Caterham, is strictly 

prohibited.




All engine rebuilds or the fitment of updated components that require seals to be broken must be carried out by 

Caterham, or in the presence the series Scrutineer or an appropriate Caterham representative appointed by 

him, who will refit the appropriate seals before engines are returned to competitors. 

5.7.3 Location 

On no account must the engine be relocated within the chassis and only the standard Caterham engine 

mounting brackets and rubbers are permitted. 

5.7.4 Cooling System 

All cars may use either the standard Caterham radiator part number 73157 (73157PA or 73157PL) and standard 

cooling fan part number 73150, or the R400 road car aluminium radiator part number 38C036B and fan part 

number 58514 and associated brackets. 

The standard thermostat must remain fitted, unmodified and operational. 

It is permitted to fit a dashboard mounted, manually operated cooling fan switch 

It is mandatory to fit the “7” grill Part Number: 77777A and mesh grill Part Number: 77778 behind it. 

No other modifications other than those listed above are permitted. 

5.7.5 Induction System 

A throttle pedal stop must be used and whilst the design of this is free, Caterham part numbers 74128, 30P048A 

and 30P253A are available but not mandatory. 

For Roadsport and Tracksport, the standard air filter 36E073A for the Sigma 125bhp engine must be retained. 

For Supersport, the cold air induction system must be used and with the KN air filter 30E211A fitted. It is 

permitted to use bonnet part number 30P174A, which has a matching, but redundant, bonnet cut-out on the 

right-hand side of the bonnet, or modify the standard bonnet in the same way, so as to match the intake duct 

on the left hand side. The cut-outs must be fitted with a 30P159B grille. 

5.7.6 Exhaust System 

The Caterham exhaust system incorporating a catalytic converter is supplied as standard to allow registration of 

the vehicle and comply with Construction and Use regulations and must be fitted at all times. The only 

permissible exhaust system is available under the following Caterham part numbers: 

Silencer 

Cat/Collector 

Cylinder No 1 

Cylinder No 2 

Cylinder No 3 

Cylinder No 4 

36X013A 

36X012A 

36X014A 

36X015A 

36X016A 

36X017A 

Use of a cat/collector guard part number 70262 or 70262B is mandatory. 

Use of an exhaust guard part number 70261 or 70261B is optional. 

5.7.7 Ignition System 

The electronic management system (Caterham part number 36L038A) must be used unmodified in any way and 

may be exchanged or tested by direct comparison with a factory supplied unit. It is mandatory for the ECU to be 

programmed with the latest race tune as advised by and provided by Caterham. 

It is specifically prohibited to fit any ducting to the starter motor or elsewhere in the system. 

5.7.8 Fuel Delivery System 

It is permitted to move the fuel pump from the standard location only if a fuel cell is fitted and the standard 

Caterham supplied item must be used. Competitors should note that the performance of the fuel cell fuel pump 

will be impaired if it is allowed to run without fuel. To ensure reliable operation it is recommended that the fuel 

Page 23 of 34



cell pump be replaced at least once per season. 


Use of the standard fuel pressure regulator integral in the fuel pump is mandatory. At 12 volts the unit delivers 

fuel at 380kpa. 

In Tracksport and Supersport, it is permitted to fit FIA approved dry break connections to the fuel lines to ease 

removal/replacement of the engine. 

In Tracksport and Supersport, to facilitate sampling and draining of the fuel tank of cars fitted with a dry-break 

connection, it is permitted to add wiring and a switch to enable the fuel pump to be operated without the 

ignition system switched on. When using the fuel pump to drain the tank, fuel must only be drained via the drybreak 

connection. 

No other modifications are permitted. 

5.8 Suspension 

Tracksport and Supersport cars must use front "widetrack" suspension comprised of double unequal length 

wishbones; lower wishbone part numbers 34F013A (left) and 34F014A (right), upper wishbone numbers 

34F011A (left) and 34F012A (right); an anti-roll bar and features Bilstein competition dampers and coil springs. 

The only permitted dampers for Tracksport and Supersport are those provided by Caterham under part 

numbers 74501 (front) and 74502 (rear). These dampers are stamped with the code number M1 

The only permitted springs in Tracksport and Supersport are part number 77843 (front) and part number 77844 

(rear) 

Roadsport cars must retain narrow track front suspension. 

The only permitted dampers in Roadsport are part number 75526 (front) code number M0 and part number 

75531 code number M2. 

Front dampers must be fitted with the main body fixed to the lower wishbone. Rear dampers must be fitted 

with the main body fixed to the De Dion tube (right way up). 

Radius arms should be mounted with the forward point in the lower of the two mounting holes in the chassis. 

De Dion tubes should be changed as a matter of course following an accident. Furthermore it is recommended 

that tubes are regularly inspected for damage. Failure to tighten damper securing bolts to the threaded bushes 

may result in the bush being torn out of the tube. 


Adjustable spring seats (Part number DSSU01) are permitted. Ride height may be adjusted subject to the 

minimum ride height requirements detailed in section 5.6.2. Front and rear damper spring seats may be 

modified by removal of metal only to allow greater adjustment of spring positioning. Circlip grooves may be 

added to the body of the shock absorber to allow the fitment of different length springs. No other machining or 

modification to the dampers themselves is permitted. 

It is permissible to adjust front camber to a maximum of 3º (negative) and castor angles by means of the 

adjustable length top wishbone provided and by shimming the lower wishbone with washers. 

It is permitted to substitute the standard lower wishbone front mounting bolt with a longer bolt of a similar 

specification. 

No modification can be made to the De Dion tube except that shims may be inserted to adjust camber to a 

maximum of 3° (negative) and toe angles as required. 

It is permitted to use the R300 2° De Dion ears part number 30R036A in place of the standard ears. 

Page 24 of 34



The following Caterham supplied front anti roll bars are permitted: 


Diameter Colour Code Tracksport and Supersport Pt No Roadsport Pt. No 

18 mm Green 75556 72094 

⅝" Red 75561 72090 

9 / 16 " Blue 75559 not available 

½ " Orange 75552 72088 

The front anti roll bar may be removed, but if fitted must be properly connected. 

Only ½" diameter Caterham supplied rear anti roll bars are permitted. 

It is permitted to remove or disconnect the rear anti-roll bar 

It is permissible to use the plastic packing shim part number ZZ021463 between all suspension bushes and 

mounting points, it is not permitted to fit metal washers. 

It is permitted to fit cap head bolts to secure front spring / damper assembly to the chassis. 


No other modifications whatsoever are permitted to the car's suspension and suspension components must not 

be modified in any way nor may suspension pick up points be changed. 

The bump rubbers may not be cut down or removed from the mandatory Bilstein dampers. 

5.8.3 Wheelbase and Track 

Wheelbase: 2225mm 

Front Track: 1336mm (Tracksport and Supersport) 

1270mm (Roadsport) 

Rear Track 1336 -1346mm 

Overall Length: 3100mm 

Overall Width: 1575mm 

A tolerance of plus or minus 5mm is permitted to account for dimension changes caused by permitted 

suspension adjustment. 

5.9 Transmission 

The standard transmission specification including gearbox, bellhousing, clutch, axle and differential must be 

retained and all parts must be fitted an assembled correctly. 

Use of the Caterham clutch pedal stop (Part number 74127) is mandatory. 

The use of clutch kit Caterham part number 36Q013A is mandatory. 


It is mandatory to fit a clutch pedal stop. The design and supply of this is free although Caterham provide a 

suitable part under part number 30P224A. 

Design and supply of the gear knob is free. 

It will be permitted to fit any further upgraded parts if introduced by Caterham. 

Wire locking of the selector rod pins is permitted. 

Use of two roll pins to fix the selector mechanism to the selector rod is permitted. 

Page 25 of 34



Use of a standard clutch pedal or the high ratio clutch pedal is permitted. 


No other modification are permitted 


In Roadsport and Tracksport, use of a limited slip differential is prohibited. 

In Supersport, use of a limited slip differential is mandatory. 

Use of the gearlever in quick shift position is prohibited. 

Mis-assembly of standard parts, particularly with respect to synchromesh mechanism is prohibited. 

It is specifically prohibited to fit steel baulk rings and blocker bars in the gearbox. 

5.9.3 Transmission and Drive Ratios 

The Ford 5 speed non-close ratio Type 9 gearbox part number 36G003C is mandatory. The ratios with the 

gearbox must remain as per standard Ford/Caterham specification. 

First 3.65:1 

Second 1.97:1 

Third 1.37:1 

Fourth 1.00:1 

Fifth 0.82:1 

5.10 Electrics 

The mandatory final drive ratio for both Classes is 3.92:1 (Caterham part number 1627164R, or for limited slip 

differentials, 1630675E ). 

For the limited slip differential, ramp angles must remain in the standard 30/90 configuration, as supplied by 

Caterham/Titan. The maximum permissible pre-load is 50lbft. 

In all classes a ‘standalone’ datalogging system may be used, provided that it does not integrate with the 

vehicle, other than to take an rpm signal and power feed. Choice and manufacturer of system is free. 

Competitors are advised that when choosing a system they should be mindful that this regulation will be 

reviewed for 2014 and may be more specifically written if it is found that the ‘spirit’ in which it is intended is 

being abused. 

It is permitted to fit a simple countdown timer or stopwatch to the dash or steering wheel centre to provide an 

indication of session duration. 

A Stack manufactured standalone datalogging system (not dash mounted system) that has capability to record 

engine data via the ECU CAN interface will be permitted when available. This is the only system that can 

connect to the vehicle’s systems that is permitted. 

It is recognised that there are many ‘standalone’ sport video systems that are capable of logging speed, g-forces 

and other data. These are permitted providing that they are completely independent from the car (with the 

exception of a power feed) and do not record any information directly from it. 

In Tracksport and Supersport a shift-light or sequential shift-light system may be used and choice of system and 

manufacturer is free. Caterham recommend the use of the ACES programmable sequential shift lights, available 

under part number ACES01. 

It is permissible to disconnect the wiring loom from the speed sensor near the rear wheel (rendering the 

speedometer and odometer inoperable). This prevents the ECU fuse from blowing should the wiring to the 

speed sensor be damaged, for instance in the event of running through gravel. 

All instrumentation must remain standard. 

Page 26 of 34




The standard electrical wiring looms must be retained. 

Lap timing equipment is permitted in all classes. 

The specification of the ignition and starter switch is free and may be repositioned on the dashboard. 

The standard fuel inertia cut out switch may be removed or relocated. Caterham strongly recommend the 

relocation to the left hand side of the gear lever mounted on the centre tunnel just in front of the passenger 

seat. 

It is mandatory to have video recording equipment fitted and operating during qualifying and racing. This must 

consist of at least one forward facing camera providing a reasonable view of circuit ahead such as would be 

expected to provide a representative ‘driver’s eye’ view. Location of the camera to provide this is free. The 

choice of system is free, provided that playback is possible at the circuit by regular means, such as via a laptop 

PC, or by using equipment designed for the purpose provided by the competitor. 

All power feed to the vehicle and engine looms must be connected via the master battery switch 

5.10.1 Exterior Lighting 

In the Supersport class only, the standard rear wing mounted light cluster (containing the indictor, rear light and 

brake light) may be removed and replaced with the roll-cage mounted race brake light solution, part number 

30L170AK or 30L170AP. 

In Tracksport and Supersport the headlamps, front indicators, mounting brackets and repeater lamps may be 

removed from the front, and the rear number plate light, reverse light and rear fog light may be removed from 

the rear panel. 

In Roadsport all exterior lighting must remain both standard and fully operative with the exception of the side 

indicator repeaters which may be removed and the rear high intensity fog light which needs to be fitted but not 

working. See below 5.10.2. 

Only 5¾” headlights, are permitted. 

5.10.2 Rear High Intensity Light 

A high intensity rear light to MSA Yearbook K5 must be fitted. The Caterham FIA approved LED type high 

intensity rear light, pre-fitted with the correct plug for ease of fitting to the existing vehicle loom, under part 

number 37L048A is mandatory, it must be fitted on the X braces of the rear cage with the supplied clamp type 

bracket under part number RSGU140-15. It is not permitted to drill or weld the roll cage. 

5.10.3 Battery 

In both classes the battery position and the battery (part no: 53034W) itself must be standard. 

5.10.4 Alternator 

The standard alternator (Part number 36E116A) must remain fixed, unmodified standard and working. 

5.10.5 Starter Motor 

The standard starter motor must be retained at all times 

5.11 Brakes 

The standard braking system must be retained apart from the following specific modifications. 


It is mandatory to fit the AP racing ‘race’ type master cylinder cap (part number 77175) in place of the standard 

item. This part does not provide a low fluid level warning and is therefore not strictly road legal. 

In Tracksport and Supersport, fitment of race specification brake master cylinder (part number 77176) is 

Page 27 of 34



permitted. 


Brake friction materials are free. 

In all classes it is permitted to fit a brake limiting valve in the rear circuit. It is also permitted to mount the valve 

in the cockpit so as to be adjustable by the driver when normally seated in the car. The make of valve is free 

(Caterham recommend the use of the lever type (part number 58541) or the rotary type (part number 

19X066542R) and it is permitted to drill fixing holes in the chassis to mount it. It is permitted to fit the brake 

limiting valve using braided hose 

Use of a standard brake pedal or the high ratio brake pedal is permitted. 

Rear pipe pipes from the 3 way union on the dedion tube to the rear brake calipers may be replaced with 

braided stainless steel hoses part no: 77201L and 77201R. 


No other brake modifications are permitted. The uprated brake packages available from Caterham are 

prohibited. 

5.12 Wheels and Steering 

5.12.1 Permitted Options 

Use of 6" x 13" aluminium wheels as supplied by Caterham under part no. 77296 is mandatory. The wheels may 

be painted any colour. 

The wheels are supplied with a plastic centre cap and badge as standard. These must be removed for races. 

Roadsport cars must retain the standard steering rack part number 75615A. 

Any of the following steering rack assembles are permitted in Tracksport and Supersport 

Standard width standard speed rack Part No: 75615A* 

Widetrack standard speed rack 

Part No: 75608A 

Standard width quick (22%) rack Part No: 75605A* 

Widetrack quick (22%) rack 

Part No: 75604A 

*Must be used in conjunction with rack extensions Part No: 74081 

It is permitted to raise the height of the steering rack using spacer shims Part number 75607 

It is permitted to fit the reversible 30S018A steering rack clamp, introduced into Caterham standard production 

at the end of 2009 (replacing the existing clamp). This rack clamp provides either standard height, or 9mm of lift 

under the rack, depending on which way up it is fitted. 

The steering wheel is free, however the steering wheel must comply with J5.7 

It is permitted to fit a spacer between the wheel and the boss. 

It is permitted to fit Caterham quick release upper steering column part number 75030A 

It is permitted (and recommended by Caterham) to remove or deactivate the steering lock in accordance with 

MSA regulations [Q 19.6]. 

5.12.2 Prohibited Options 

The standard steering mechanism must be used without modification other than detailed in 5.12.1. 

5.12.3 Construction and Materials 

Page 28 of 34



No changes are permitted except as specified in these regulations. 


5.12.4 Dimensions 

All dimensions must remain within manufacturer's specification, except where permitted within these 

regulations. Refer to section 5.8.3 

5.13 Tyres 

5.13.1 Specification 

Cars must run on Avon CR500 treaded tyres of the following sizes and specification: 

Front: 175/55R13 Part number 14401M 

Rear: 175/55R13 Part number 14401M 

However, for the first two race weekends of the 2013 season (rounds 1,2,3 and 4), it will be permitted for cars 

to run on the old specification tyres: 



This is to ease the transition period between the tyre specification, enabling competitors to use up their existing 

tyres. 

Competitors are reminded that, other than where specified, road-legality must be maintained AT ALL TIMES in 

all classes. Road legality for tyres requires that they have 1.6mm of tread depth in a continuous band 

throughout the central three-quarters of the tread width, throughout the whole circumference. Allowances will 

be made for ‘flat-spots’. 

Use of tyre pressure limiting valves is prohibited. 

Use of tyre heating and heat retention devices is prohibited. 

Use of tyre treatment compounds is prohibited. 

Tyre buffing is prohibited, as is shaving or any other method of removal of tread depth from the original tyre, 

other than by normal wear through contact with the track/paddock/road surface. 

Use of any gas other than air to inflate tyres is prohibited. 

The eligibility scrutineer reserves the right to request a tyre or tyres to be deflated and then inflated with a foot 

pump in the assembly area prior to qualifying or a race. Where a car is considered to have team support, it will 

be the team’s responsibility to carry this out under supervision. For independent drivers, a member of 

Caterham personnel will undertake this task. 

5.13.2 It is permitted (and recommended by Avon tyres) to run the front tyres in the opposite direction from that 

indicated on the tyre. In wet conditions, it is recommended to run the tyres in the standard configuration to 

help disperse standing water from underneath the tyre. 

5.13.3 Nominated Manufacturer 

Cooper Tire & Rubber Company Europe Limited 

5.14 Minimum Weight Limit 

Competitors are recommended to weigh their cars and add sufficient ballast to allow for loss of bodywork 

during racing and/or variations in readings given by the weighbridges at individual circuits. Remember that it is 

the reading recorded by the circuit weighbridge on race day which counts. 

The minimum weight limit including driver (complete with helmet, suit, gloves & overall) for Tracksport and 

Page 29 of 34




Supersport cars is 600kg, and for Roadsport cars is 620kg. Drivers lighter than 90 Kg may need to add ballast. 

Any ballast required must be attached to the chassis in accordance with J5.15 using a minimum of 4 mounting 

points using bolts with a minimum diameter of 8mm each with steel washers of at least 400 square mm surface 

area and 3mm thickness. 

Where ballast is fitted it shall be fitted on the passenger side of the cockpit. 

Substitution of alternative, non standard, lightweight fasteners is specially prohibited. 

5.15 Fuel Tank and Fuel 

5.15.1 Type of Fuel Tank 

The standard fuel tank may be retained. An aluminium honeycomb protection kit (package number TI04) is 

supplied as standard on all race cars (unless a fuel cell is used) and fitment is mandatory. Alternatively a fuel 

cell kit as supplied by Caterham and fitted as standard on Caterham Superlight R300 race car may be fitted and 

is recommended. 

It is permitted to use the Caterham ‘aero’ style fuel filler, part numbers 30T065A (black) and 30T066A (silver) in 

place of the standard cap. The cap tether may be removed. 

The fuel tank vent must be installed to prevent spillage through the breather system. It may be necessary to fit 

a vent tube and additional check valve to prevent spillage when the tank is full. 

5.15.2 Location of the Fuel Tank 

The tank must be located in its correct standard position at the rear of the car 

5.15.3 Fuel 

All cars must run on pump fuel as defined by the MSA. 

5.16 Silencing 

Use of the Caterham Silencer (part number 36X013A), which when new complies with MSA Regulation [J 5.17] 

and [J 5.18] is mandatory. Performance of this silencer will degrade with use and accident damage. It is the 

competitor’s responsibility to ensure that their car always complies with the noise limits which are strictly 

enforced at many circuits. 

5.17 Competition Numbers/Decals 

5.17.1 Positioning of Decals 

Competition numbers must be positioned so as to be clearly visible from above and from the side, as per MSA 

regulations under J4. In particular, side facing numbers wrapped across the bonnet side are not acceptable, as 

the timekeepers cannot clearly read them. Decals must be positioned in accordance with the Championship 

decal plan as detailed in the appendices. 

The correct number squares must be used showing the championship title mounted on the nosecone and on 

each body side. Trade and sponsorship decals must be carried at all times and competitors will be notified of 

these before the first round. All cars must carry BRSCC shields. 

5.17.2 Supply of Decals 

Championship decals are available from the championship coordinator, spares are available at events from 

Caterham, all competitors must provide their own racing numbers. BRSCC shields are obtainable directly from 

the BRSCC, one of which must be displayed on each side of the car at all times 

It is not permitted for Roadsport class cars to display decals/logos of professional race teams (as defined in 

1.3.7) 

Page 30 of 34




6. APPENDICES 

6.1 Race Organising Club and Contacts 

The Following Commercial Undertakings are not subject to the Judicial Procedures of either the Championship 

Stewards and/or the MSA/MSC. 

BRSCC H.Q 

Homesdale Business Centre, 



Borough Green 

Kent 

TN15 8JL 

Tel: 01732 780100 

Fax: 01732 885783 

www.brscc.co.uk 

6.1.2 Useful Contacts 

Caterham 

(Midlands) 

Brett Glover 


The Knoll, Leicester Road, Earl Shilton, Leicester LE9 7TJ 

Tel: 01455 841616 

E mail: brettg@caterham.co.uk 


(Factory) 

Arch Motor & 

Manufacturing Limited 


(Westbury – chassis 

repair centre) 

Motor Sports 

Association Ltd 

James Gibson 

Bruce Robinson 

Linda Humphries 


Kennet Road, Dartford, Kent DA1 4QN 

Tel: 01322 625800 

Email : jamesg@caterham.co.uk 

Redwongs Way, Huntingdon, Cambs PE29 7HD 

Tel: 01480 459661 


Unit 1A, Brook Lane Ind Est, Westbury, Wilts, BA13 4EP 

Tel: 01373 858585 

Email : lindah@caterham.co.uk 

Motor Sports House, Riverside Park, Colnbrook, Slough SL3 9HG 

Tel: 01753 765000 

Eligibility Scrutineer Ian Millar 11 The Square 

Penicuik 

EN26 8LH 

Tel: 01968 678752 

Mobile: 07703 765692 

Email: scrutineer@caterham.co.uk 

Page 31 of 34



Coordinator Jennifer Grace Caterham Cars Ltd 

Kennet Rd., 

Dartford 

Kent 

DA1 4QN 

Tel: 01322 625800 

Mobile: 07808 776366 

Email: jennyg@caterham.co.uk 


Demon Tweeks Dave Kimberley 75 Ash Road South, Wrexham Industrial Estate, Wrexham, North 

Wales LL13 9UG 

Tel: 01978 663027 

Cooper Avon Tyres James Weekly Bath Road, Melksham, Wilts SN12 8AA 

Tel: 01225 357874 

Fax 01225 707443 

6.2 COMMERCIAL UNDERTAKINGS 

6.2.1 Vehicle Presentation 

The presentation of the car is fundamental to the profile of the championship/series its sponsors and its audience. 

Therefore in considering whether to permit any car to race, any point during the season, the organisers will regard 

as paramount the presentation of the car. In taking into account its appearance inherent in which is the standard of 

its presentation (including interior) they may exclude any car which they consider may prejudice the reputation of 

the championship/series or is otherwise unacceptable. 

This will include where the car is presented at a race event bearing accident damage sustained at a previous event 

and which has not been subject to the completion of a full and proper repair. Note: A double header can be 

regarded as one event for the purposes of this regulation. 

In addition to presentation of the car, the way that competitors and teams present themselves in the paddock is a 

reflection upon Caterham Motorsport. Therefore, competitors and teams are reminded to abide by the paddock 

plan issued within the final instructions, wherever possible. Private cars, trailers and working vehicles should be 

parked out of view allowing for the presentation of only Caterham race cars at the leading edge of the paddock 

area. Race cars should preferably be parked ‘nose-out’ and at ninety degrees to the paddock edge. Where 

conditions allow, teams should arrange their awnings so that they are grouped together in a ‘team village’. Failure 

to cooperate in this fundamental piece of housekeeping may result in a competitor or team being advised to move 

their awning or vehicles during a race weekend and until done so to the satisfaction of Caterham and the 

organisers, may not be able to take any further part in the meeting. 

6.2.2 On-circuit promotional activities 

Competitors will be issued with championship sponsor decals and number squares. These must be displayed 

correctly positioned in order for the competitor to be eligible for points. 

6.2.3 Television coverage 

Competitors accept that in car television cameras may be fitted to their cars at any race or official practice session 

for a race as part of the promotion for the championship without charge. On no account should advertising be 

carried on cars in the cockpit area. 

Page 32 of 34

2013 Caterham Roadsport Championship 

Championship Registration Form 

(Please indicate which class you are entering by ticking the appropriate box below) 

ROADSPORT TRACKSPORT SUPERSPORT 

Name 

Address 

Telephone 

Email 

Date of Birth 

Nationality 

Post Code 

Daytime Evening Mobile 

If not British 

Licence & Club 

Entrant Name 

& address 

MSA Licence Grade MSA Licence No. BRSCC Membership No. BRSCC Membership Expiry 

If not driver 

Car Details 

Transponder No. Body Colour Wing/Nose Colour 

(Please help us supply you with the right decals by completing the above colour questions accurately). 

I agree to abide by all rules and regulations laid down in the 2013 Caterham Roadsport Championship Sporting and Technical 

Regulations, including any amendments or clarifications that may be made by the organisers during the course of the season and to 

observe all rules and regulations of the MSA Ltd. I agree to rounds of the championship being substituted in the event of a 

Terms and 

cancellation. I enclose payment to Caterham Cars Limited for the appropriate full annual fee (as listed below) or £150 per race 

Conditions weekend and I undertake to inform the coordinator if the car is sold or if I cease participation in the Caterham Roadsport 

Championship. I understand that this registration cannot be assigned and that I will notify the coordinator of any changes to the 

foregoing information. The registration fee is non-refundable after the start of the season 

Signature Driver Entrant (if not driver) 

Please state preferred competition number from 2 - 99 

NB: Numbers will be allocated in accordance with the details laid down in “Registration priority” on the following page. 

REGISTRATION FEES: ROADSPORT - £425* TRACKSPORT/SUPERSPORT- £425 EARLY REGISTRATION 

DISCOUNT less £50 

(The early registration discount is available for registration fees received before 30 November 2011) 

* An additional mandatory support fee for Roadsport is also payable upon registration – cost £495 

Please complete card payment details below OR send a cheque made payable to Caterham Cars Ltd to the below address. 

Type of Card Please debit my (tick) □ VISA □ MASTERCARD □ MAESTRO 

Details 

Card Number 

Name on Card 

Start date Expiry date Security No. Issue No. (Maestro only) 

Administration Date Received: 

use only 

Caterham Motorsport Roadsport Registrations: Jennifer Grace Caterham Cars Ltd, 2 Kennet Rd., 

Dartford, Kent DA1 4QN telephone – 07808 776366 

Forwarded:

2013 Caterham Roadsport Championship 

Registration Priority 

COMPETITION NUMBERS 

Registration Priority 

Registration numbers will be permanent competition numbers for the championship. Numbers will be allocated on request 

using a first come first served basis until the end of January 2013 with priority given as indicated below. After 1 February 

2013 championship numbers will be allocated by the coordinator. 

Supersport 

• #1 is reserved in the Supersport championship for the 2012 Supersport championship winner. If the 2012 champion 

does not compete in the same class in 2012, #1 will not be allocated to any other driver. Drivers from the 2012 

Tracksport championship will have their 2012 number reserved for Supersport until the 31 January 2013 (unless 

there is already an existing Supersport driver remaining from 2012 wishing to compete for another year or they 

register earlier and choose a different number at which point it will be made available to others. ) Drivers from the 

2012 Supersport championship will have their 2012 number reserved for Supersport until the 31 January 2013 

(unless they register earlier and choose a different number), at which point it will be made available to others. The 

regular race number of the 2012 Supersport champion will also be held in reserve for the duration of the season, to 

allow them to revert to their preferred number in 2014 if they do not win the championship. 

Tracksport 

• #1 is reserved in the Tracksport championship for the 2012 Tracksport championship winner. If the 2012 champion 

does not compete in the same class in 2012, #1 will not be allocated to any other driver. Drivers from the 2012 

Roadsport championship will have their 2012 number reserved for Tracksport until the 31 January 2013 (unless 

there is already an existing Tracksport driver remaining from 2012 wishing to compete for another year or they 

register earlier and choose a different number at which point it will be made available to others. ) Drivers from the 

2012 Tracksport championship will have their 2012 number reserved for Tracksport until the 31 January 2013 

(unless they register earlier and choose a different number), at which point it will be made available to others. 


• Academy champions cannot carry that status forward should they be upgrading to Roadsport and the previous 

year’s Roadsport champion cannot compete the championship again; therefore #1 will not be allocated to any driver 

in Roadsport. Drivers from the 2012 Academy championship will have their 2012 number reserved for Roadsport 

until the 31st January 2013 (unless they register earlier and choose a different available number), at which point it 

will be made available to others. Where two drivers have the same number, the option to retain the number will be 

given to the driver that finished highest in their respective 2012 Academy championship. In the event of these 

positions being equal, it will be resolved as per a tie in championship total score.

2013 BRSCC Porsche Championship Regulations 

Issued by the BRSCC: 2 nd April 2013 



2013 BRSCC Porsche 


Regulations 

Index 

Introduction 

Section 1 


Section 2 


Section 3 



Section 4 


Section 5 


Section 6 


Section 7 


Page 1 of 35






The 2013 BRSCC Porsche Championship is organised and administrated by the BRITISH RACING AND SPORTS CAR 

CLUB (BRSCC) in accordance with the General Regulations of the Royal Automobile Club Motor Sports Association 

(incorporating the provisions of the International Sporting Code of the FIA) and these Championship Regulations. 

MSA Championship Permit No: CHR2013/R062 






Bulletin to the MSA and to all registered competitors by email or by post to the address detailed on the Registration 

Form, or by delivery to the competitor by hand. It is a condition of entry into the championship that all competitors, 

teams, team members and persons associated with any of the above agree to be bound by the Regulations 

including any amendments, variations or statements relating thereto. 

1.2 Officials 

1.2.1 Co-ordinator 

John Clark 

14 Chetwode Road 

Tadworth 

Surrey 

KT20 5PW 

Tel: (01737) 352567 

Fax: (01737) 362646 

Email: jc70vsr@live.co.uk 

1.2.2 Eligibility Scrutineer 

Tom Williams 

White Heather 

Village Road 

Dorney 

Windsor 

Berks 

(01628) 603188 

(07973) 864143 

whgcoltd@btconnect.com 








1.3.1 Entrants must be fully paid up valid membership card holding members of the BRSCC and in possession of a valid 

current MSA Entrants Licence, where applicable. 

1.3.2 Drivers and Entrant Drivers must be fully paid up valid membership card holding Racing members of the BRSCC, be 

Page 2 of 35




registered for the Championship and be in possession of a valid MSA Competition (Racing) National (B) or above 

licences, or equivalent (MSA Regulation [H 26.1.5]) or be a professional driver in possession of a valid Licence 

(featuring an E.U. flag) and medical, issued by the ASN of a member country of the European Union. 

A competitor shall not take time off school to participate in motor sport without the prior written approval of their 

school. If participation in the Championship requires absence from school, Drivers in full time school education are 

required to have the approval of their head teacher and a letter stating such approval from his/her school in order 

to fulfil registration for the Championship. 



and racing. 

1.3.5 BRSCC reserve the right to invite Porsche cars other than those as outlined in Championship Regulation 5.2 


1.4.1 All drivers must register as competitors for the Championship by returning the Registration Form with the 

Registration Fee to the Registration Secretary/Co-ordinator prior to the Final closing date for the first round being 

entered. 

1.4.2 The Registration Fee is £385 payable to the BRSCC. 

1.4.3 Registration will be accepted from 1st January until the closing date for entries to the last round. 

1.4.4 Upon registration permanent competition numbers for the championship will be issued. 

1.4.5 Acceptance or rejection of registration is entirely at the discretion of the organisers and promoters. 

1.4.7 A class for “shared cars” will be available (Registration Fees as per paragraph 1.4.2) with the proviso that one 

named registered competitor is limited to 60% of the rounds held during the season. 

1.4.8 A registration fee of £35.00 payable to the BRSCC can be paid for one off races by unregistered competitors. The 

driver will not score championship points. This must be by prior arrangement with the championship co-ordinator. 

1.5. Championship Rounds 

The 2013 Championship will be contested at the following venues. 

Rounds Dates Venue Licence Status Club 

1, 2 & 3 April 6/7 TH Rockingham National B BRSCC 

4 & 5 May 11/12 DH Silverstone National National B BRSCC 

6, 7 & 8 June 8/9 TH Zandvoort National A KNAF 

9 & 10 July 13/14 DH Snetterton 300 National B BARC 

11, 12 & 13 August 3/4 TH Brands Hatch Indy National B BRSCC 

14 & 15 August 31 DH Oulton Park Inter National B BRSCC 

16 & 17 September 21 DH Cadwell Park National B BRSCC 

18, 19 & 20 October 19/20 TH Donington Nat National B BRSCC 

DH = Double Header. TH = Triple Header 

1.6 Scoring 

1.6.1 Points will be awarded to competitors listed as classified race finishers in each class as follows: Note: Half points 

only will be awarded in any class where fewer than 6 cars in that class start the race. 

Page 3 of 35




6 or more starters in each class 

1 st 2 nd 3 rd 4 th 5 th 6 th 7 t 

h 

8 th 9 th 10 th 11 th 12 th 13 th 14 th 15 th 16 th 17 th 18 t 

h 

19 t 

h 

20 th 21 st 

25 23 21 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 

Note: All other finishers will receive 1 Point. Plus 1 Point will also be awarded to the driver with the fastest lap in each round. 

1.6.2 The totals from all rounds of the championship held, less three will determine the final Championship points and 

positions. 

1.6.3 Ties will be resolved according to W1.3.4 of the current MSA Yearbook. 

1.7 Awards 

1.7.1 All awards are to be provided by the BRSCC. 


Trophies per class: 

Over 6 Starters 1 st 2 nd 3 rd 

4 – 6 Starters 1 st 2 nd 

Up to 4 Starters 1 st 

1.7.3 Championship 

Trophies to the 1 st - 2nd - 3rd placed drivers in Class and to Overall winner and to the named registered Competitors 

who win the “shared car” class. 

1.7.4 Bonuses 

The organisers/sponsors/promoters reserve the right to provide additional awards for and during the Championship. 


Garlands and trophies will be provided for each meeting (as applicable) and shall be presented at the end of each 

round/event. 




using form FEU1, the quarterly return of payments made to non-resident entertainers and sportsmen/women. That 

is, those persons who do not have a normal permanent residence in the UK. The UK does not include the Isle of 

Man, Channel Isles or Eire. 

This means that the Organisers of every round are required to deduct tax at the relevant rate, from such payments 

they may make to non-UK residents. Under certain circumstances, it is possible for competitors to enter into an 

agreement with the Inland Revenue to limit tax withheld. Any application for such an arrangement must be made in 

writing and not later than 30 days before their payment is due. 




In the event of any Provisional Results being revised after any provisional presentations and such revisions affect the 

distribution of any awards the competitors concerned must return such awards to the BRSCC in good condition within 

7 days. 

Page 4 of 35





2.1 Rounds 

In accordance with Section C of the current MSA Yearbook 



Page 5 of 35





CHAMPIONSHIP RACE MEETINGS & RACE PROCEDURES 

3.1 Entries 




complete and correct. The date of receipt for acceptance of entry purposes shall be the date on which the 

Secretary of the Meeting receives the missing or corrected information or fee. 







3.1.5 In the event of any rounds being oversubscribed the Organising Clubs in liaison with the co-ordinator / organiser 

may at their discretion run Qualification Races. For Qualification Race procedures see 3.13 of these regulations. 

3.1.6 Reserves are to be nominated on the final list of entries published with Finial Instructions or Amendment Sheet 








3.2 Briefings 

3.3 Practice 






3.3.3 Should the need arise to stop any practice, RED LIGHTS will be switched on at the Start Line and RED FLAGS will be 

displayed at the startline and at all other Marshal Signalling Points around the circuit. 

This is the signal for all drivers to cease circulating at racing speeds, to slow to a safe and reasonable pace and 

return to the pit lane unless directed by officials not to do so. 



to qualify for selection and order of precedence as set out in the MSA Regulation [Q 4.5]. The Clerk of the Course 


considered unsatisfactory as per MSA Regulation [Q 4.5]. 

Page 6 of 35



3.5. Races 


3.5.1 The standard minimum scheduled distance shall be 12 miles but should any race distance be reduced at the 

discretion of the Clerk of the Course or Stewards of the meeting it shall still count as a full points scoring round. 

3.6 Starts 



Circuit. 

3.6.2. The minimum countdown procedures/audible warning sequence shall be: 

Standing Starts: 



3.6.3 The use of tyre heating/heat retention devices, tyre treatments and compounds is prohibited on the grid. 





[Q 12.13.2]. Any drivers unable to maintain grid positions on the Green Flag to the extent that all other cars are 





3.6.7 A 5 Second Board will be shown to indicate that the Grid is complete. The red lights will be switched on five 

seconds after the board is withdrawn. 

In the event that the starting lights fail the Starter will revert to using the National Flag. 


3.7.1 Should the need arise to stop any race, RED LIGHTS will be switched on at the Start Line and RED FLAGS will be 

displayed at the startline and at all Marshals Signalling Points around the circuit. This is the signal for all drivers to 

cease circulating at racing speeds, to slow to a safe and reasonable pace and to return to the starting grid area, 

which will automatically become a Parc Fermé area. Cars may not enter the pits unless directed to do so. Work on 

cars already in the pits must cease when a race is stopped. 

3.7.2 Case A – Less than two laps completed by the race leader. 

The race will be null and void. The race will restart from the original grid positions. Competitors unable to take the 

restart may be replaced by reserves who will start from the back of the grid in reserve order. Gaps on the grid 

should not be closed up. The length of the restarted race will be determined by the Clerk of the Course. 

3.7.3 Case B – More than two laps completed by the race leader but less than 75% of the scheduled distance. 

The race will restart from a grid set out by the finishing order of part one (as per Q5.4.2) The result of the race will 

be the finishing order of part two. The length of the restarted race will be determined by the Clerk of the Course. 


If the leader has completed more than 75% of the race distance or duration it shall not be restarted and the results 

will be declared in accordance with MSA General Regulations Q5.4.3, unless the Clerk of the Course, in consultation 

with the Stewards deem it appropriate to restart the race. 

3.8 Rescrutiny 

Page 7 of 35






3.9 Pits and Pit Lane Safety 

3.9.1 Pits 

Entrants must ensure that the MSA, Circuit Management and Organising Club Safety Regulations are complied with 

at all times. 





May only be carried out in accordance with the MSA Regulation [Q 13], Circuit Management Regulations and 

Supplementary Regulations or Final Instructions issued for every meeting. 


3.11 Results 




All cars must report to Parc Fermé unless alternative arrangement have been made by the Eligibility Scrutineer. 

Failure to comply may result in exclusion from the results 

No personnel are permitted in Parc Fermé unless requested by the Eligibility Scrutineer. 













removed. 


In the event of the need for any qualification races, the procedures will be as published in the Final Instructions for 

the events concerned. 



Regulations. 

Page 8 of 35






4.1.1 Arising from post practice Scrutineering or Judicial Action. 

Minimum Penalty: The provisions of MSA Regulation [C 3.3]. 

4.1.2 Arising from post race Scrutineering or Judicial Action: 

Minimum Penalty: The provisions of MSA Regulations [C 3.5.1 (a) & (b)]. 

For infringement deemed to be of a more serious nature the Clerk of the Course and/or Stewards of the Meeting 

are to invoke the provisions of Regulation [C 3.5.1 (c)]. 

4.2 Infringements of Non-Technical MSA Regulations and the Sporting Regulations Issued for the 


4.2(a) 

The Clerk of the Course reserves the right to impose a ‘Stop-Go Penalty/Drive Through Penalty’ in accordance with 

MSA Regulation [Q 12.6]. 

4.2.1 As per current MSA Judicial Procedure Regulations. 






Multiple Qualifying/Multiple Race. 



an offence occurs during any subsequent race then the points solely gained for that race shall be forfeit. 


the timing of the offence committed at that event. Where a “double header” event take place at the same venue 


individually. 


a Reckless or dangerous driving in the course of a meeting. MSA Regulation [C 1.1.5]. 



season he will receive written warning from the Championship Coordinator that his driving/behaviour is to be 

specifically observed at future race meetings. Any adverse reports during this period of observation could result in 

official MSA action and will result in a Championship Stewards' enquiry, with possible loss of Championship points 

and refusal of further race entries. 

4.2.4 Grid Position Penalties 

For offences under MSA regulations [C1.1.5], [C1.1.6], [Q14.4.2] and [Q14.5], the Clerk of the Course, at his 



(ii) 

(iii) 

For an offence in a race; a time penalty of up to one minute 

For an offence in a race where the offending driver is not classified; a grid position penalty in the next 

race/event. 



increased 

Page 9 of 35





5.1 Introduction 

The following Technical Regulations are set out in accordance with the MSA specified format and it should be clearly 

understood that if the following texts do not clearly specify that you can do it you should work on the principle that 

you cannot. All references to the MSA Yearbook (blue book) relate to the current edition. 

Competitors are advised to read sections [J 4.1], [J 5], Section Q, Section B, Nomenclature & Definitions, Section L of 

the current Motorsport Association UK Competitors’ and Officials’ Yearbook. For the purposes of clarification the 

term ‘standard’ shall within these regulations mean as per the manufacturers U.K. specification (whether as to shape, 

size, material, manner of construction or otherwise) for the model or component. The term “free’ is qualified as “free 

within the constraints of MSA technical/safety regulations”. 


The 2013 BRSCC Porsche Championship is for Competitors competing in the following classes: 

Class Boxster (A) 

Class Production 

Boxster (B) 

Class 924 (C) 

Porsche Boxster S, 3.2 litre, Model 986 and 987 conforming to these class regulations 

Porsche Boxster S, 3.2 litre, Model 986 conforming to these class regulations 

Porsche 924, 2 litre vehicles, running in standard form. 

5.2.2 Examination Of Vehicles 

The organisers (in addition to any other powers they may have under these Regulations reserve the right before or 

after any race in the championship/series to designate any one or more of the competing cars for special eligibility 

scrutineering. Upon such election being made the competitor shall immediately place the car under the control of the 

organisers and be deemed to have permitted all such scrutineering, examination and testing as the organisers may 

responsibly require to undertake. The organisers have the right to: 

a 

b 

c 


Retain the car for detailed examination at premises chosen by the organisers. If the organisers elect to retain the car 

they shall make it available for collection by the competitor at least seven days prior to the qualification session for 

the next race in the championship/series unless the car is found to be in breach of these regulations and/or 



specified period and/or remove the car by transporter at no expense to the competitor to an appointed location. The 

competitor will be advised in writing of the time, date and location of the subsequent testing or eligibility 

examination. 



The organisers reserve the right to re-inspect vehicles at any time during the course of the season, should there have 

been a regulation infringement or circuit incident. 


details and with these regulations for each event at which they are entered. Failure to comply in either respect will be 

a breach of these regulations. Queries concerning eligibility should be referred in writing to the 

organisers/championship/series Eligibility Scrutineer at least seven days prior to an event entered, to permit a ruling 

in advance of any meeting at which it is intended to compete. 

Repetition 

Tests to establish the power output of any car may be carried out by the organisers or their representatives. Such 

power testing will be carried out using rolling dynamometer equipment. Refer to reg 5.7.2 

Page 10 of 35





5.3.1 All MSA Section K Safety Criteria Regulations apply as relevant, & specifically as follows:- Section K Safety Roll Over 

Structure, Introduction & Definitions)]; [K 2.1 – K2.1.3]; Section [K 3.1.2(a)], [K 5], [K 6], [K 8], [K 9], [K 10], [K 11] and 

[K 13]. 

5.3.2 The fitting of a roll cage that meets the requirements of Section K1 of the current MSA Yearbook is mandatory. 

All roll cages not having a valid bona-fide manufacturer’s roll cage prior to 1 st January 1995 must seek clarification via 

an MSA approved source and be available for inspection. This certification requirement includes any roll cage of socalled 

‘free concept’ design. 

Class 924 only 

5.3.3 The cage must be as per drawing No.5 or 6 as a minimum with the addition of extra bracing as per Drawings 9 and/or 

10. An additional transverse member may be fitted in compliance with MSA Regulation [K 1.3.5 to 1.3.7] across the 

vehicle to enable fitment of seat belts to a HR Device fitted in accordance with MSA Regulation [K 10.4]. NOTE: 

Drawing No 6 is for a left-hand drive car. The upper mounting of the diagonal brace MUST be on the driver’s side of 

the car. The front hoops of the roll cage may abut or be positively attached at one point on each hoop to the front 

passenger compartment bulkhead (dashboard area). However, no part of any attachment may pass through the front 

bulkhead. 

5.3.4 The vertical section of the main hoop behind the driver may only be attached to the bodywork at one point on each 

side of the car, using a bolted attachment at the ‘B’ pillar seat belt mounting. The front horizontal roof bar of the roll 

cage may be attached to the windscreen header rail at two points. Such attachments may include welds of no longer 

than two inches and no more than one weld at each attachment point. 

5.3.5 Door bars are mandatory. These may be welded in or removable and should go from the front hoop to the rear hoop 

and be as high as possible but in any event not higher than one third of the total height of the door aperture 

measured from its base. 

5.3.6 No part of the roll cage nor its attachment points to the chassis/body may be rearward of the rear transverse chassis 

rail nor the position of the rear seat hinge. 

Class Boxster and Production Boxster 

5.3.7 Class Boxsters and Production Boxster vehicles must be fitted with the control roll cage supplied by Custom Cages 

Ltd. Part Number PB/06C. 


5.4.1 In these regulations “standard” shall mean in accordance with MSA Regulation Section B Nomenclature & Definitions 

– Standard Part. 

5.4.2 The Organisers shall establish the manufacturer’s recognised specification by reference to information provided by 

the manufacturers or by comparison with items or components which the Organisers consider accord with such 

specification or in any other manner which the Organisers consider appropriate. The Organisers shall be the sole 

arbiters and any finding by the Organisers as to whether or not any item is “standard” for the purpose of these 

regulations shall be a Judgement of Fact 

5.4.3 The decision of the Organisers upon all matters in relation to interpretation, application, breaches and enforcement 

of these Regulations (including without limit eligibility and classification) shall be binding upon all competitors who 

shall by registering for the championship be deemed to have full knowledge of the Regulations and to have accepted 

the same in full. 

5.4.4 Expressed prohibitions of particular modifications, parts or processes are for guidance only and are not exhaustive. 

5.4.5 Unless specifically authorised in these Regulations the use, modification of and/or the addition of any parts material 

Page 11 of 35




processes or adjustments incompatible with those appearing in the manufacturer’s recognised specification is 

prohibited. Similarly, only welding or repairing of material or the fitting of the manufacturers standard replacement 

parts for the sole purpose in every respect of restoring the vehicle and/or its component parts to the manufacturers 

recognised specification,/ or to comply with MSA obligatory safety requirements, is permitted. 

5.4.6 Throughout the car any nut bolt or screw may be replaced by any other nut bolt or screw and have any kind of 

locking device provided that it is directly interchangeable with the one that was originally fitted. It is not permitted to 

drill out holes to fit larger diameter bolts or screws. Under no circumstance must safety be compromised and any 

“hardware” fitted must be more than adequate for the application to which it is put. 

5.4.7 All cars must have a manufacturer’s chassis identification number permanently attached to the body shell. Engines 

must be stamped with a manufacturer’s engine identification number. 

5.4.8 A high standard of presentation for competing cars will be considered of paramount importance. The judges in this 

matter will be the Championship Coordinator and the Championship Scrutineer. In considering whether to permit 

any car to participate, the Organisers reserve the right to take into account, at any point during the season, its 

appearance and the standard of its presentation (including its interior) and may exclude any car, the appearance of 

which they consider may prejudice the reputation of the Series or is otherwise not acceptable. 

Page 12 of 35




Class Boxster 

5.5(A) 

Chassis 

Must remain as standard. Both the removal and addition of any material except that specified in these regulations 

is prohibited. 

Seam welding is not permitted. Where chassis repairs are necessary after accident damage the standard spot 

welding may be replaced by stitch welding. Welds must be no longer than 50 mm with a gap of 50mm between 

welds. 

The specified roll cage manufactured by Custom Cages Ltd (Part Number PB/06T), must be fitted in accordance 

with the manufacturer’s instructions and must not be subjected to any additions, deletions, drilling, additional 

welding or any other modification. 

Strengthening and relocation of jacking points is prohibited. The fitting of on-board jacking systems is prohibited. 

The removal of metal from the standard body shell by cutting is prohibited. 

All undersealant, rust proofing and sound deadening materials may be removed. 

5.6(A) 

Bodywork 


Must remain as standard except for the following; 

Interior 

The steering wheel and drivers’ seat are free. Passenger seat may be removed but if retained must match the 

driver’s seat. 

All carpets and trim may be removed including rubber door, bonnet and boot seals. The standard dashboard must 

be retained. Minimal trimming of the dashboard is permitted, to allow for roll cage fitment only. 

The central dashboard vents and fascia may be substituted for a single piece of appropriate sheet material. Door 

interior panels must be fitted but may be non-standard. Bare sheet metal is not acceptable and if used must be 

painted. The interior must be painted a uniform colour. 

Dashboard instrumentation is free. 

The gear change lever and pedals may be altered to improve the ease of use but must remain in the original 

location and cannot be made lighter. Material may be added. ‘Shortshift’ gear levers are permitted. 

A false floor may be fitted to the drivers’ foot well to provide a level support for the drivers’ feet. 

All safety airbags and their triggering mechanisms must be removed. 

The standard windscreen must be retained in its original position. The window winding mechanisms and any other 

internal door components that are attached with removable fixtures can be removed. It is permitted to use a 

heated windscreen. 

The use of plastic type side windows is permitted provided that they comply with MSA Regulations (min 4mm 

thickness) and that adequate ventilation is provided to the interior (MSA Regulation [J 5.2.9]) 

A metallic hardtop roof (not carbon fibre) must be used. The folding roof mechanism must be rendered 

inoperative. 

All parts of the heating and air conditioning system may be removed. 

Page 13 of 35




The central locking system must be removed or rendered inoperative. 

Spare wheel and toolkit may be removed. 

Standard engine inspection covers must remain securely fitted at all times. 

Exterior 

Inner metal bumpers and brackets for their mounting may be removed. 

The mechanism for raising the rear spoiler may be removed and the spoiler fixed in either raised or lowered 

position. 

Number plate mounting brackets must be removed. 

Non-visible external trim such as the wheel arch linings may be removed. 

A single hole may be made in each bumper panel (front and rear) to allow for a non-standard towing eye to be 

fitted if the inner bumpers have been removed. It must be no larger than is reasonably necessary and serve no 

other function than allowing fitment of the towing eye. In accordance with MSA Regulation [Q 19.1.3]. 

Windscreen washer systems and horn may be removed. 

Standard bonnet and boot catches must be removed and replaced with safety locking pins or clips 

The fitting of factory “Aero-kit” body parts available as manufacturer options on 986 and 987 models is permitted. 

Front bumpers, headlights and front wings from 996 and 997 models may be fitted provided no modification to 

the fitted parts or the chassis is required. 

A detachable hard top as supplied by the manufacturer as an option must be fitted. The roof must correspond 

with the manufacturer’s standard profile. 

The inner door skin may be cut or removed to facilitate the fitting of non-standard door cards. 

It is permitted to roll inwards the protruding flange at the wheel arch edge on all wings. The original profile of the 

wing must be maintained. 

Modifications Prohibited 

Other than those modifications permitted above, all bodywork must be as produced by the manufacturer in all 

respects as to material, thickness & contour. For the avoidance of doubt, this includes the wings, doors, bonnet, 

boot-lid, and all other body panels. 

The opening or use of additional apertures other than modifications permitted above or the taping of normal 

bodywork gaps, spoilers or any profiles is prohibited. 

The silhouette and plan must remain as standard except as modifications permitted above. 

The minimum ride height is 85mm with the driver in the car. When the standard sill of the vehicle is swept by an 

85mm block, the block should not jam against any component except the manufacturer’s standard plastic wheel 

arch trim pieces. 

5.7(A) 

Engines 


The power train and its components must be as the manufacturer’s standard for the model. It is not permitted to 

change any of the power train units for that of a different model. 

Minimum removal of metal from moving components, solely for the purpose of balancing is permitted. Only the 

methods described in the official Porsche workshop manual for that model may be used. Polishing of any 

Page 14 of 35




components is strictly prohibited. Casting marks and sharp edges must be seen as the manufacturer originally 

produced the item. 

For balancing purposes, con rods may be lightened down to the weight of the lightest con rod, which must remain 

in its standard manufactured form and all original markings and marks remaining untouched. 

Remanufacture of the standard crankshaft to facilitate regrinding of bearing surfaces, and the fitting of nonstandard 

bearing shells is permitted, provided that no material is removed from the crankshaft other than from 

the bearing surfaces. 

Early style Air Oil Separator may be replaced by a late style Air Oil Separator. 

Early style Intermediate Shaft support bearings may be replaced by late style part(s) or by non-standard bearings. 

A spacer may be fitted between the engine crankcase and the sump plate to increase engine oil capacity. Where 

such a spacer is fitted, it is permitted to extend the oil pick up pipe. Oil sump baffles may be modified and 

additional baffles fitted. A non-standard sump plate may be fitted. 

An oil accumulator designed to maintain the supply of oil under pressure during cornering may be fitted. If this 

unit is fitted in the habitacle then it must have a secondary casing or bulkhead to separate the accumulator from 

driver/passenger compartment. MSA Regulation [J 5.2.1]. 

An adaptor may be fitted to replace the standard oil filter housing and allow the use of a spin-on type oil filter. 

The standard crankshaft belt drive pulley may be replaced by one of a smaller diameter. No other drive pulleys 

may be modified but the air conditioning compressor and associated pulley may be removed. 

5.7.2 Engine Power Output 

Engine power output measured at the flywheel shall be declared at registration as: 

Engine Code: M96.21 



Maximum output 210kW/282hp 



The engine code applied by the manufacturer will be taken as indicative of power output only. In case of doubt the 

organisers may require engines to be sealed and submitted for power testing. The maximum power output 

permitted at the flywheel is that of the engine type declared at registration. 

The tests will consist of a suitable "warm up period" followed by three test runs back to back. 

The average figures obtained will be the figures used. 

The designated power test location is: 

Marlin Motorsport 

5 Wellington Place 

Bletchley Telephone 

Milton Keynes 

Buckinghamshire 

MK3 5NA 

(01908) 769032 – Contact Martin 


The standard flywheel must be used without modification but may be replaced by the unit manufactured by 

TF Motors Sport – Part Code TFMS2105. This unit must be used as supplied and may not be modified in any way. 

The minimum weight for the unit is 4.7kg. 

Standard variable camshaft timing elements may not be modified to alter the camshaft timing or phasing beyond 

the original manufacturer settings and must be operational at all times. 

Page 15 of 35




Pistons, connecting rods, camshafts, valves and valve springs must remain as standard. Cams must be as supplied 

standard to the engine specification by the manufacturer. 

5.7.4 Engine Location Within The Chassis 

The engine must remain in its original position. Engine mounts must be standard. 


The fitting of additional cooling systems within the bodywork is permitted. 

The standard radiators must be retained. 

The standard thermostat may be replaced by one of different temperature rating. 


The standard, unmodified air filter box must be fitted but the primary air intake pipe may be removed. 

An unmodified air filter element must be fitted in the standard location. This may be of the free flow type 


The fuel delivery system must remain as standard. 

Fuel systems must be standard except that pipework may be changed to stainless steel braided hose or other 

robust type. Fuel pipes may be passed through the habitacle provided that compliance with MSA regulation J5.13 

is maintained 


The standard exhaust manifolds and catalytic converters must be retained. The exhaust system beyond the 

standard catalytic converter is free. The final outlet of the exhaust system must be in the standard location. 

Silencing to MSA Regulations [J 5.17] & [J 5.18] must be maintained. 


The standard Engine Control Unit (ECU) for the model may not be modified in any way, either by the changing of 

components or re-programming (re-mapping) of the standard Porsche DME (Digital Motor Electronics). 

The ECU must be located in the standard position and must be the only system controlling the engine operation. It 

is not permitted to modify the operation of the ECU by the fitment of components or software either internally or 

externally. 

Standard Traction Control systems if fitted must remain fully functional but may be switched off. 

The championship organisers reserve the right to require the fitment of a data/power logger to any or all 

competing vehicles. 

Spark plugs are free. 

5.8(A) 

Suspension 

5.8.1 Dampers and springs must be to the Championship specification manufactured by GAZ shocks Part Numbers: 

Complete Race Kit TGA986. Individual Struts – fronts: SAS123 rear SAS124. No modification of the 

dampers/springs is permitted and must be run as supplied by GAZ Shocks. It is permitted to fit a spacer to allow 

the dampers to be fitted to the 987 suspension. 

5.8.2 Wheelbase and track are to remain as standard with the exception of Championship Regulation 5.12.2. 

5.8.3 Any anti-roll bar manufactured for the Porsche Boxster, Porsche 996 and Porsche 997 may be fitted provided that 

no modification to the mounting points is made. Modified drop links may be fitted provided they attach to the 

standard mounting points 

Page 16 of 35




5.8.4 All bushes must be standard Porsche parts. No rose jointed, spherical bearings or polyurethane bushes are 

permitted. It is permitted to fit rose joints to the ends of the anti-roll bar to allow for adjustment. 

5.8.5 Adjustable lower suspension control arms from the Porsche GT3, Porsche part numbers; 996-341-121-90 (Left) and 

996-341-122-90 (Right) may be fitted in conjunction with control arm bearing flange(s), Porsche part number 996- 

341-441-90. Control arms must be fitted to the correct side of the car. Motor sport lower control arms with metal 

bushing from the racing GT3 are not permitted 

5.8.6 It is permitted to use a front strut brace, provided it is of a bolt on type and is only connected directly between the 

two front suspension turrets. 

5.9(A) 

Transmission 

5.9.1 Both manual and Tiptronic gearboxes are permitted. Gear ratios and final drive ratio must remain as standard for 

the type of gearbox used. 

5.9.2 Only gearboxes available as factory fitted options for the model may be used. The gearbox type used must be 

declared at registration for the series and no change of gearbox type will be permitted during the season. 

5.9.3 The clutch unit must remain as standard but the friction material is free. Torque biasing differential units of any 

specification/country of origin are prohibited. 

5.9.4 Gearbox mounts must be standard. 

5.10(A) 

Electrics 

5.10.1 The standard ignition switch must be retained. 

5.10.2 All exterior lights must be as standard, be fitted correctly and be fully operational. Opaque headlamp covers are 

prohibited. 

A rear warning lamp to MSA regulation [K.5] is mandatory 

5.10.3 Battery type is free. The battery may be relocated to either front or rear luggage compartment. Alternatively it 

may be placed in an approved container and attached securely in the passenger footwell. 

5.10.4 The alternator must be of the original type and the pulleys must remain standard and working at all times. No 

device to change the standard output of the alternator is permitted. 

5.10.5 The standard wiring harness must be retained. The standard immobiliser system, all fault diagnosis connections 

and fault recording systems must remain fitted and fully functional. Any other non-essential wiring may be 

removed. 

5.10.6 If a data logging system is fitted it must be used for the monitoring and display of information only. All data 

obtained must be made available to the eligibility scrutineer upon request. 

5.11(A) 

Brakes 

5.11.1 Brake calipers and discs must be as standard for the model. 

5.11.2 Ceramic composite brakes are not permitted. 

5.11.3 Brake fluid hoses may be replaced with stainless steel braided hose. Brake pipes may be passed through the 

habiticle provided that compliance with MSA Regulation [J 5.12.1] is maintained. 

5.11.4 Brake pads must be either RC6 material manufactured by Carbone Lorraine or from the controlled brake supplier 

Mintex Racing / Questmead Front Pads Part Number: MDB2038F2R and Rear Pads Part Number: MDB1874F2R. 

5.11.5 Deforming or removal of brake backing plates is permitted. Additional brake cooling may be fitted provided no 

bodywork has to be removed or modified. 

Page 17 of 35




5.11.6 Standard ABS, ABD (Active Braking Differential) must be fitted to the manufacturer’s original specification and fully 

operational at all times. ESP (Electronic Stability Program) may be disabled if required. 

5.11.7 Any blanking of the rear brake hydraulic circuit is prohibited 

5.12(A) 

Wheels And Steering 

5.12.1 Wheels must be to the Championship specification as manufactured by Rimstock PLC. Rear wheels: ProRace 1.3 

10.0 x 18 e45. Front wheels: ProRace 1.3 8.5 x 18 e45. 

5.12.2 Wheels are allowed to be spaced within the constraints of the standard body profile (Note MSA Regulations [J 

5.8.2] and [Q 19.7.1] & [Q 19.7.2]. 

5.12.3 Standard wheel retaining bolts may be replaced by studs and wheel nuts. 

5.12.4 The steering rack must be standard for the model. Power steering system must remain fitted. Additional cooling of 

the power steering system is permitted. 

5.12.5 The steering lock pin must be removed. 

5.12.6 The turning circle must be limited to prevent tyre/bodywork contact. MSA Regulation [J 5.7.4]. 

5.13(A) 

Tyres 

5.13.1 The mandatory control tyre for the Championship is the R888 manufactured by Toyo. The following sizes must be 

used. Front 225/40R18. Rear 265/35R18 

All tyres must be purchased from the nominated distributor and will be marked to identify the source of the tyre. 

The use of tyres purchased from any other source is prohibited. It is mandatory to highlight the PDA markings on 

the outside of the tyre. 

The nominated tyre distributor is; 

Tyres (South Shore) Ltd 

57 Cowley Road 

Marton 

Blackpool 

FY4 4NE 

Tel: 01253 761362 

5.13.2 The use of any heating/heat retention devices is prohibited. 

5.13.3 The use of tyre softening treatments is prohibited. 

5.14(A) 

Minimum Weight 

5.14.1 Minimum weight will be:- 

Mk 1 engine (M96.21) 



1300 Kg including driver 

1325 Kg including driver. 

1365 Kg including driver. 

5.14.2 In the interests of equality, the organisers reserve the right to review the minimum weights after every two 

championship rounds 

5.14.4 If ballast is required to achieve the minimum weight this must be affixed in the form of not more than two metal 

weights attached to a chassis member, clearly visible within the passenger space or luggage compartments, and 

secured with drilled bolts to allow wire seals to be applied. MSA Regulation [J 5.15]. 

Page 18 of 35




5.15(A) 

Fuel Tank and Fuel 

5.15.1 The standard fuel tank must be retained and fitted in the standard location. 

5.15.2 Fuel is to be Pump Fuel as defined in the current MSA Yearbook. Additives are prohibited. MSA Regulation Section 

B, Nomenclature & Definitions (see Pump Fuel). 

5.16(A) 

Competition Numbers/Decals 

5.16.1 Positions 

The car number must be displayed on the door panel in accordance with MSA Regulation [J 4.1]. The forward 

facing number must be displayed on the windscreen in accordance with MSA Regulation [Q 11.4.2]. 

All cars must carry identification of the BRSCC and Porsche Racing Drivers Association in allocated positions on 

either side of the car. 

The windscreen must carry a sunstrip across the top which will carry the sponsors logo. 

The strip will be provided by the PDA. 

No car shall display it’s vehicle registration number (front and rear) during any Race meeting at which it competes. 

5.16.2 Suppliers 

Numbers are for sale & BRSCC decals (which must be displayed on each side of the car in an unobscured manner) 

are available at signing-on at each BRSCC meeting. 

Competitors must display in unaltered form on the outside of their cars such championship sponsors and 

organisers’ decals and / or stickers as the organiser may supply. The Organisers decals, logos and graphics must be 

placed in the positions as shown on any officially issued layout form (Appendix 1). 

Diagrams demonstrating the mandatory positions of the series decals and racing numbers and areas available for 

individual sponsors will be provided by the organisers. 

Page 19 of 35




Class Production Boxster 

5.5(B) 

Chassis 

Must remain as standard. Both the removal and addition of any material except that specified in these regulations is 

prohibited. 

Seam welding is not permitted. Where chassis repairs are necessary after accident damage the standard spot 

welding may be replaced by stitch welding. Welds must be no longer than 50 mm with a gap of 50mm between 

welds. 

The specified roll cage as per Championship Regulation 5.3.7 must be fitted in accordance with the manufacturer’s 

instructions and must not be subjected to any additions, deletions, drilling, additional welding or any other 

modification. 

Strengthening and relocation of jacking points is prohibited. The fitting of on-board jacking systems is prohibited. 

The removal of metal from the standard body shell by cutting is prohibited. 

All undersealant, rust proofing and sound deadening materials may be removed. 

5.6(B) 

Bodywork 

5.6.1 A metallic hardtop roof (not carbon fibre) must be used. It must have the lining removed and the OEM glass must 

remain. The folding roof mechanism must be rendered inoperative. 


Must remain as standard except for the following; 

Interior 

The steering wheel is free. 

The driver’s seat must be replaced by a race seat from a recognised manufacturer. FIA homologated seat is strongly 

recommended. Seat and mountings must comply with K.2.2 (a)-(f). Passenger seat may be removed. 

All carpets must be removed. All other trim must remain in place including rubber door, bonnet and boot seals. The 

standard dashboard must be retained. Minimal trimming of the dashboard is permitted, to allow for roll cage 

fitment only. 

The horn, windscreen washers and handbrake must be retained and in working order 

Door cards (Right and Left) must be removed and replaced with a flat panel of either GRP, Alloy or Carbon Fibre. 

Dashboard instrumentation must remain standard. 

The OEM gear change lever and pedal box must be retained. “Shortshift” gear levers are not permitted. Material 

may be added to the face of the pedal(s) only. 

A false floor may be fitted to the drivers’ foot well to provide a level support for the drivers’ feet. 

All safety airbags and their triggering mechanisms must be removed. 

The standard windscreen and side windows must be retained in the original position The window winding 

mechanisms and any other internal door components that are attached with removable fixtures must be retained. It 

is permitted to use a heated windscreen. 

All parts of the heating and air conditioning system may be removed. 

Page 20 of 35




The central locking system must be removed or rendered inoperative. 

Spare wheel and toolkit must be removed. 

Standard engine inspection covers must remain securely fitted at all times. 

Exterior 

Number plate mounting brackets must be removed. 

Non-visible external trim such as the wheel arch linings may be removed. 

A single hole may be made in each bumper panel (front and rear) to allow for a non-standard towing eye to be fitted 

if the inner bumpers have been removed. It must be no larger than is reasonably necessary and serve no other 

function than allowing fitment of the towing eye. In accordance with MSA Regulation [Q 19.1.3]. 

Standard bonnet and boot catches must be removed and replaced with safety locking pins or clips unless the car is in 

full road trim and currently taxed. 


Other than those modifications permitted above, all bodywork must be as produced by the manufacturer in all 

respects as to material, thickness & contour. For the avoidance of doubt, this includes the wings, doors, bonnet, 

boot-lid, and all other body panels. 

The opening or use of additional apertures other than modifications permitted above or the taping of normal 

bodywork gaps, spoilers or any profiles is prohibited. 

The silhouette and plan must remain as standard except as modifications permitted above. 

The minimum ride height is 150mm with the driver in the car. Measurement will be made under the door sill 

ignoring the jacking point and the standard plastic wheel arch trim. 

5.7(B) 

Engines 


The engine and its components must be as standard for the model except as detailed in this section. 

Remanufacture of the standard crankshaft to facilitate regrinding of bearing surfaces, and the fitting of nonstandard 

bearing shells is permitted, provided that no material is removed from the crankshaft other than from the 

bearing surfaces. 


Engine power output measured at the flywheel shall be declared at registration as: 





The engine code applied by the manufacturer will be taken as indicative of power output only. The organisers may 

require engines to be sealed and submitted for power testing. The maximum power output permitted at the 

flywheel is that of the engine type declared at registration. 


The average figure obtained will be the figure used. 





Page 21 of 35



Milton Keynes 


MK3 5NA 




Standard variable camshaft timing elements may not be modified to alter the camshaft timing or phasing beyond 

the original manufacturer settings and must be operational at all times. 

5.7.4 Engine Location Within The Chassis 

The engine must remain in its original position. Engine mounts must be standard. 


The standard radiators must be retained. 


The standard unmodified air filter box and filter including the primary inlet pipe must be used. 

An unmodified air filter element must be fitted in the standard location. An aftermarket replacement filter element 

may be used providing it fits the OEM filter box without modification. 


The fuel delivery system must remain as standard. 

Fuel systems must be standard except that pipework may be changed to stainless steel braided hose or other robust 

type. Fuel pipes may be passed through the habitacle provided that compliance with MSA regulation [J 5.13] is 

maintained 


The standard complete exhaust system and catalytic converters must be retained. The final outlet of the exhaust 

system must be in the standard location. 

Silencing to MSA Regulations [J 5.17] & [J 5.18] must be maintained. 


The standard Engine Control Unit (ECU) for the model may not be modified in any way, either by the changing of 

components or re-programming (re-mapping) of the standard Porsche DME (Digital Motor Electronics). 

The ECU must be located in the standard position and must be the only system controlling the engine operation. It is 

not permitted to modify the operation of the ECU by the fitment of components or software either internally or 

externally. 

Standard Traction Control systems if fitted may be disabled. 

The championship organisers reserve the right to require the fitment of a data/power logger to any or all competing 

vehicles. 

Spark plugs are free. 

5.8(B) 

Suspension 

5.8.1 Dampers and springs must be standard original equipment 

5.8.2 Wheelbase and track are to remain as standard. 

5.8.3 Front and Rear standard OEM anti-roll bars must be retained. 

5.8.4 All bushes must be standard Porsche parts. No rose jointed, spherical bearings or polyurethane bushes are 

Page 22 of 35



permitted. 


5.8.5 A front strut brace is not permitted. 

5.9(B) 

Transmission 

5.9.1 Both manual and Tiptronic gearboxes are permitted. Gear ratios and final drive ratio must remain as standard for 

the type of gearbox used. Torque biasing differential units of any specification/country of origin are prohibited. 

5.9.2 Only gearboxes available as factory fitted options for the model may be used. The gearbox type used must be 

declared at registration for the series and no change of gearbox type will be permitted during the season. 

5.9.3 The clutch unit must remain as standard. 

5.9.4 Gearbox mounts must be standard. 

5.10(B 

Electrics) 

5.10.1 The standard ignition switch must be retained. 

5.10.2 All exterior lights must be as standard, be fitted correctly and be fully operational. Opaque headlamp covers are 

prohibited. 

A rear warning lamp to MSA Regulation [K 5] is mandatory 

5.10.3 Battery type is free. The location of the battery must remain as per OEM. 

5.10.4 The alternator must be of the original type and the pulleys must remain standard and working at all times. No device 

to change the standard output of the alternator is permitted. 

5.10.5 The standard wiring harness must be retained. The standard immobiliser system, all fault diagnosis connections and 

fault recording systems must remain fitted and fully functional. Any other non-essential wiring may be removed. 

5.10.6 If a data logging system is fitted it must be used for the monitoring and display of information only. All data obtained 

must be made available to the eligibility scrutineer upon request. 

5.11(B) 

Brakes 

5.11.1 Brake calipers and discs must be as standard for the model. 

5.11.2 Ceramic composite brakes are not permitted. 

5.11.3 Brake fluid hoses may be replaced with stainless steel braided hose. Brake pipes may be passed through the 

habiticle provided that compliance with MSA Regulation [J 5.12.1] is maintained. 

5.11.4 Mintex Friction material must be used. Specification is free providing it fits the original equipment calipers without 

modification. 

5.11.5 Deforming or removal of brake backing plates is permitted. Additional brake cooling may be fitted provided no 

bodywork has to be removed or modified. 

5.11.6 Standard ABS, ABD (Active Braking Differential) and ESP (Electronic Stability Program) as fitted, to the manufactures 

original specification, must be fitted and fully operational at all times. 

5.11.7 Any blanking of the rear brake hydraulic circuit is prohibited 

5.12(B 

Wheels And Steering 

5.12.1 Front Wheels must be OEM 17 X 7 ET55 Alloy (pt no 986.362.124.00) 

Page 23 of 35



Rear Wheels must be OEM 17 X 8.5 ET50 Alloy (pt no 986.352.126.05) 


5.12.2 Wheel spacers of any type are not permitted 

5.12.3 Standard wheel retaining bolts may be replaced by studs and wheel nuts. 

5.12.4 The steering rack must be standard for the model. Power steering system must remain fitted. The OEM power 

steering pully must be retained. Additional cooling of the power steering system is permitted. 

5.12.5 The steering lock must be made inoperative unless the vehicle is used on the highway. 

5.12.6 The turning circle must be limited to prevent tyre/bodywork contact. MSA Regulation [J 5.7.4]. 

5.13(B) 

Tyres 

5.13.1 The mandatory control tyre for the Championship is the R888 manufactured by Toyo. The following sizes must be 

used. Front 225.45 X 17 Rear 255.40 X 17 

Dry tyres will be limited to 4 sets (8 front & 8 rear) for the championship season. 


The use of tyres purchased from any other source is prohibited. It is mandatory to highlight the PDA markings on the 

outside of the tyre. 




Marton 

Blackpool 

FY4 4NE 

Tel: 01253 761362 

5.13.2 The use of any heating/heat retention devices is prohibited. 

5.13.3 The use of tyre softening treatments is prohibited. 

5.14(B) 

Minimum Weight 

5.14.1 Minimum weight will be:- 

MK 1 engines (M96.21) 

MK 2 engines (M96.24) 

1300Kg including Driver 

1325Kg including Driver 

5.14.2 In the interests of equality, the organisers reserve the right to review the minimum weights after every two 

championship rounds 

5.14.3 If ballast is required to achieve the minimum weight this must be affixed in the form of not more than two metal 

weights attached to a chassis member, clearly visible within the passenger space or luggage compartments, and 

secured with drilled bolts to allow wire seals to be applied. MSA Regulation [J 5.15]. 

5.15(B) 


5.15.1 The standard fuel tank must be retained and fitted in the standard location. 

5.15.2 Fuel is to be Pump Fuel as defined in the current MSA Yearbook. Additives are prohibited. MSA Regulation Section 

B, Nomenclature & Definitions (see Pump Fuel). 

5.16(B) 


Page 24 of 35





The car number must be displayed on the door panel in accordance with MSA Regulation [J 4.1]. The forward facing 

number must be displayed on the windscreen in accordance with MSA Regulation [Q 11.4.2]. 

All cars must carry identification of the BRSCC and Porsche Racing Drivers Association in allocated positions on either 

side of the car. 

The windscreen must carry a sunstrip across the top which will carry the sponsor’s logo. 

The strip will be provided by the PDA. 


5.16.2 Suppliers: Numbers are for sale & BRSCC decals (which must be displayed on each side of the car in an unobscured 

manner) are available at signing-on at each BRSCC meeting. 

Competitors must display in unaltered form on the outside of their cars such championship sponsors and organisers’ 

decals and / or stickers as the organiser may supply. The Organisers decals, logos and graphics must be placed in the 

positions as shown on any officially issued layout form (Appendix 1). 



Page 25 of 35




Class 924 

5.5(C) 

Chassis 

The floor pan (including the spare wheel well) must remain as standard except that aluminium Checker plate can 

be bolted to the floor pan. If your spare wheel well has been damaged or removed it needs to be reshaped or 

refitted by the next round. Additionally it is not permitted to cover the spare wheel well. The body sills (either 

side) can be foam filled. 

5.6(C) 

Bodywork 


Must remain as standard except for the following : 

Steering wheel and driver’s seat are free. Passenger seat may be removed but if retained must match the drivers 

seat. 

Spare wheel and tool kit may be removed. 

All carpets may be removed but all other trim must remain except that, at driver’s discretion, all vertical trim may 

be removed other than dashboard and centre console. Door interior panels must be fitted and the interior 

painted to a uniform colour. 

G.R.P. front wings, bonnet and one-piece front panel/headlight lids may be fitted. If this is fitted, headlights and 

their mechanism may be removed. 

However the forward facing fog lamps must be fitted, (they may be substituted by alternatives of the same size) in 

working order in the original position and protected by transparent material (MSA Regulation [Q 19.14.4]). There 

may be no gaps between the lamp assemblies in the front bumper. Additionally, it is not permitted to remove the 

indicators, which must be in correct position, and working order. 

Undertray: The standard front undertray may be replaced by an undertray manufactured from GRP, aluminium or 

steel this undertray must not extend beyond the engine oil sump reservoir, the engine bay chassis rails to each 

side, or the front lower body panel (valance). All brackets and fittings must be of a strength to hold the undertray 

in position at all times. 

Brake apertures are permitted in the front valence (lower). 

Bumpers, and all other body trim must remain as standard profile save for the side body trims, which may be 

removed. The fitting of a 924 Turbo style front lower panel is permitted. 

The silhouette and plan profile should be as the standard 924 plus a rear spoiler if fitted in accordance with 

Regulation 5 6.1 Para 16. 

The minimum ride height is 76mm with the driver in the car. When the standard sill seam of the vehicle is swept 

by a 76mm block, this block should not jam against any component. 

The use of plastic type side windows is permitted in that they comply with the MSA Regulations. (min. 4mm 

thickness) and that adequate habitable ventilation provided MSA Regulation [J 5.2.9]. The windscreen and all 

windows must be fitted in their original locations directly affixed to the body shell surface or complete with the 

original pattern rubber seals. Tilting of the windscreen from its original location and flush fitting of windows is 

prohibited. In the case of door windows, they may be fixed to both or either of the inner faces of the channel 

section. 

In the case of the rear quarter windows, they can only be fitted to the outer face of the window aperture flange. 

Additionally, it is permitted to seal the windows from water ingress by the use of a proprietary sealant. 

The replacement of the original rear windscreen is permitted by a transparent plastic type provided it is of an 

Page 26 of 35



identical shape to the original with a minimum thickness of 4mm. 


The replacement must be fitted in the original rear windscreen frame/aperture and strengthened in position by 

two longitudinal 25mm wide metal straps, set 25cm either side of the vehicle centre line, and must be securely 

affixed to the vehicle bodywork above and below the rear screen. The metal straps must be fitted to Bodywork or 

the original frame, which in turn must be securely locked in the closed position. 

The fitment of standard rear spoilers from Porsche models 924/S/GTS/GTR or 944 is permitted. 

Sponsor/advertising windscreen banners may not extend beyond the upper edge of the windscreen glass surface. 

Mirrors: as per MSA Regulation [Q 19.15.1]. 


Strengthening and re-location of jacking points is prohibited. 

The fitting of on-board jacking systems is prohibited. 

The opening or use of additional apertures or the taping of normal bodywork gaps, spoilers or any profiles is 

prohibited. 

Seam Welding: Not permitted. Where body repairs are necessary after accident damage the standard spot welding 

may be replaced by stitch welding panel joints: these welds must not be longer than 50mm with a gap of 50mm 

between welds. 

5.7(C) 

Engines 


The engine and components must be as standard except it is permitted to use oversize pistons up to and including 

1.0mm dia (3rd oversize) 

It is permitted to use Piper camshaft designated and stamped thereon PDA001 supplied direct from Piper Cams, 2 

St John Court, Ashford Business Park, Sevington, Ashford, Kent, TN24 0ST Tel: 01233 500200 

The use of a Vernier cam pulley is permitted. 

The cylinder block may be machined to recover a damaged block provided that standard components re used. 

The cylinder head may be machined to recover a damaged head provided that the manufacturers minimum deck 

height dimensions are maintained. 

It is only permitted to remove sufficient metal from a connecting rod and piston to achieve balance. Material may 

only be removed from the balancing bosses on the big end cap and the piston skirts. Material may only be 

removed from the rods down to the lightest rod in the set, which must remain as original Porsche. 


The power output (to din 70020) shall not exceed 143Bhp (105.17kW) at the flywheel. To convert to/from BHP 

/kW the conversion value will be 0.7355. 


The highest figures obtained will be the figures used. 





Milton Keynes 


MK3 5NA 

Page 27 of 35






It is prohibited to remove metal from any component, except for the sole purpose of balancing reciprocating parts. 

The compression ratio at no time may exceed 9.6:1 

5.7.4 Engine Location within the Chassis 

The engine must remain in its original position. 

Engine mounts and gearbox mounts may be stiffened provided the modified components are based on standard 

Porsche parts. 


The fitting of additional cooling systems within the bodywork is permitted. Oil sump baffles and modified sump oil 

pick-ups are permitted. 


The original air filter box must be fitted but the primary intake pipe may be removed completely, however, it may 

not be replaced by any other form of air intake. An unmodified air filter element must be fitted in the standard 

location. 

All air used in the combustion process must pass through the airflow metering flap. 

Any form of device to accelerate the airflow into the air filter box aperture is prohibited. 


Must remain as standard except a large throat body is allowed. Maximum bore size 60 mm diameter. It is 

permitted to modify the standard 924 throttle body assembly provided that the total diameter of the two 

butterflies does not exceed 60mm. Slide throttles are not permitted. 

An aluminium spacer block may be fitted between the manifold and the throttle body. The bore not to exceed 

60m/m, Max depth/ thickness 30m/m 

The fuel injection metering head must display the standard Bosch part number relevant to the particular Porsche 

924 year/model, with a sensor plate diameter not exceeding 80mm. 

The fuel pressure must not exceed the manufacturers standard at any time. 

5.7.8 Exhaust System & Silencing 

The exhaust beyond the standard manifold is free as long as no bodywork has to be cut to locate it, and it complies 

with MSA Regulations [J 5.17] & [J 5.18]. Left-hand drive vehicles must fit right-hand drive exhaust manifolds. 

The final exhaust outlet must be within the body plan view and silhouette. 

The exhaust beyond the standard manifold is free so long as the system ends at the same point as the standard 

system. 

Silencing levels as defined under MSA Regulation [J 5.17] & [J 5.18] must be maintained. 


The position of any ignition control box is free. 

Ignition triggering system is free provided that it is fitted within the original distibutor body and is the only method 

for triggering the LT current, distributing the HT ignition current and timing the ignition spark. 

Distributor drive is to remain as standard. 

5.8(C) 

Suspension 

Page 28 of 35




5.8.1 Shock absorbers: Must be as per the 924 championship specification from the designated suppliers: Leda 

Suspension Ltd or GAZ equivalent (N.B. these units are code-stamped) 

5.8.2 Spring & torsion bars: Are free so long as they fit without modification to other components. Non-ferrous materials 

are prohibited. 

5.8.3 Wheelbase and track are to remain as standard, except see Championship Regulation 5.12.2. 

5.8.4 A front strut brace may be fitted provided that it is of the bolt on type and is only connected directly between the 

two front suspension turrets. No additional bracing is permitted. 

5.8.5 Anti Roll Bars: Only anti roll bars manufactured to fit 924/944/968 floor pans are allowed to be used. 

5.8.6 The use of non standard suspension bushes are permitted in place of original rubber bushes 

5.9(C) 

Transmission 

5.9.1 Only the standard Audi 5 speed (part no.Type16/8MDas fitted from 1981) gearboxes are permitted. The ratios and 

final drive must be as to standard UK specification. 

5.9.2 Only the standard Porsche 924 differential in unmodified form may be used. No LSDs or torque biasing or locked 

differentials may be used. 

5.9.3 The clutch unit must remain as standard. Linings are free but not their surface area. 

5.10(C) 

Electrics 

5.10.1 Exterior Lighting 

All exterior lights must be as standard, be fitted correctly and be fully operational, except as provided by 

Championship Regulation 5.6.1 paragraph 5. 

5.10.2 Batteries 

Battery location may be placed in an approved container and attached securely in the passenger foot-well. 

5.10.3 Alternators 

The alternator must be of the original type, and the pulleys must remain standard, and working at all times. No 

device is permitted to stop the alternator giving its standard output during practice and Race. 

5.10.4 The wiring harness is free provided that the construction is of a high standard and it contains no system that has 

any influence whatsoever on the behaviour of the car other than that permitted elsewhere within these 

regulations. 

5.10.5 Instruments are free provided that replacement units are intrinsically safe. Electronic instruments and data logging 

equipment is permitted provided that their operation has no influence whatsoever on the behaviour of the car 

during competition. Any information obtained from such equipment shall be made freely available to the Eligibility 

Scrutineer on request. 

5.10.6 Additional instrumentation may be fitted provided that is installed in an intrinsically safe manner. 

5.11(C) 

Brakes 

5.11.1 Brake systems must be as standard except that flexible hoses and lining materials are free. 

5.11.2 All brakes may be cooled by ducting as long as no bodywork has to be removed or modified to fit any ducting. 

5.11.3 The deforming and removal of back plates is permitted. 

5.11.4 Brake pipes may be passed through the habitacle provided that compliance with MSA Regulation [J 5.12.1] is 

Page 29 of 35



maintained. 


5.12(C) 

Wheels and Steering 

5.12.1 Wheels will be 7" x 15" diameter are free but must be approved for competition use by the Manufacturer . 

5.12.2 Wheels are allowed to be spaced to within the constraints of the standard body profile (Note MSA Regulations [J 

5.8.2] and [Q 19.7.1] & [Q 19.7.2]). 

5.12.3 The steering lock pin must be removed 

5.12.4 The steering Rack is free providing that it is a Porsche part. 

5.13(C) 

Tyres 

5.13.1 The mandatory control tyre for the championship is: Toyo Proxes R888 205.50.15, 


The use of tyres purchased from any other source is prohibited. It is mandatory to highlight the PDA markings on 

the outside of the tyre. 




Marton 

Blackpool 

FY4 4NE 

Tel: (01253) 761362 

5.13.2 The use of any heating/heat retention devices, tyre treatments and compounds is prohibited. 

5.14(C) 

Minimum Weight Limit 

5.14.1 The Vehicle must weigh a minimum of 1000 kg with the driver on board. See MSA General Regulation [J 5.15]. 

5.14.2 No additional ballast in any form may be added prior to or during any official weighing procedure. 

5.14.3 If ballast is required to achieve minimum weights, this must be previously affixed in the form of a single metal 

weight attached to a chassis member clearly visible within the passenger space and secured with drilled bolts to 

allow wire seals to be applied as per MSA Regulations. 

5.15(C) 


5.15.1 Type Of Fuel Tank 

Fuel systems must be as standard, excepting that the pipework may be changed to Aeroquip or other robust type, 

but must keep to the original layout. Fuel pipes may be passed through the habiticle provided that compliance 

with MSA Regulation [J 5.13] is maintained. 


You may substitute the standard fuel tank for a type approved by the MSA and PDA and must be fitted in the 

manufacturers’ original location. 

5.15.3 Fuel 

Fuel is to be Pump Fuel as defined in the current MSA Yearbook Regulation [MSA Regulations Section B, 

Nomenclature & Definitions (see Pump Fuel)]. Additives are prohibited. 

5.15.4 The filler tube should be suitably isolated from the interior of the vehicle by a suitable fireproof material also fuel 

Page 30 of 35



tank inspection covers also to be of similar material. 


5.16(C) 



The car number must be displayed on the door panel in accordance with MSA Regulation [J 4.1]. The forward 

facing number must be displayed on the windscreen in accordance with MSA Regulation [Q 11.4.2]. 

All cars must carry identification of the BRSCC and Porsche Racing Drivers Association in allocated positions on 

either side of the car. 


5.16.2 Suppliers 

Numbers are for sale & BRSCC decals (which must be displayed on each side of the car in an un-obscured manner) 

are available at signing-on at each BRSCC meeting. 

Competitors must display in unaltered form on the outside of their cars such championship sponsors and 

organisers’ decals and / or stickers as the organiser may supply. The Organisers decals, logos and graphics must be 

placed in the positions as shown on any officially issued layout form (Appendix 1). 



Page 31 of 35




6. APPENDICES 




BRSCC H.Q. 

BRSCC (British Racing & Sports Car Club) 




Borough Green 

Kent 

TN15 8JL 

Tel: 01732 780100 

Fax: 01732 885783 


Driver Representatives 

Porsche Boxster 

Nick Hull 

07967 315 897 

Email: njh@tbmltd.co.uk 

6.2 Commercial Undertakings 

6.2.1 Trade Support 

6.2.2 Advertising/Glass 

A All glass areas must remain clear and unobstructed by decals/advertising or any other obstruction unless these 

regulations specify different or approved by the BRSCC/Championship Co-ordinator. 

B 

C 

The only exception being the rear side windows that should have the drivers’ surname and championship class (if 

any), clearly displayed in simple bold type, unless these championship regulations specify a different option. 

All surfaces, which have not been claimed for stickers by the Championship, it’s sponsors or used for the application 

of starting numbers, are free for use. The Championship Co-ordinator must approve conflicting sponsor’s stickers in 

advance and the position, size and colours (if approved) will be at the discretion of the Championship Co-ordinator. 

6.2.3 Vehicles, Decals And Overalls/Patches 

Competitor’s overalls must be clean and maintained to a reasonable standard, patches should be affixed as instructed 

locations and cars deemed to be of an unacceptable standard of presentation may not be permitted to Race. 

6.2.4 Promotional Activities 

Competitors may be asked and will be expected to participate in championship promotion activities at the circuits, as 

requested by the organisers 


The presentation of the car is fundamental to the profile of the championship/series its sponsors and its audience. 

Therefore in considering whether to permit any car to race, at any point during the season, the organisers will regard 

as paramount the presentation of the car. In taking into account its appearance inherent in which is the standard of 

its presentation (including interior) they may exclude any car which they consider may prejudice the reputation of the 

championship/series or is otherwise unacceptable. 

Page 32 of 35




This will include where the car is presented at a race event bearing accident damage sustained at a previous event 

and which has not been subject to the completion of a full and proper repair. Note: A double header can be regarded 

as one event for the purposes of this regulation. 

Page 33 of 35



Appendix 1 


Race Suits – positioning of supplied sponsor cloth badges. 

Reserved 

PORSCHE CHAMPIONSHIP 

MANDATORY DECAL POSITIONS 

1. Racing Number 

2. GAZ 

3. Mintex 

4. Title Sponsor 

5. BRSCC 

6. Drivers Surname 

7. Secondary Sponsor 

8. Third Sponsor 

9. Tyres Southshore 

10. Jasmine Porsche 

Page 34 of 35

BRSCC Porsche Championship 

REGISTRATION FORM 2013 

All drivers must register as competitors for the Championship by returning this Registration Form with the Registration Fee of £350 to the BRSCC at 

least 21 days prior to the Final closing date for the first round being entered. Acceptance or rejection of registration is entirely at the discretion of 

BRSCC. Please complete all Sections 

Section 1 - Contact Details 

Name 

Address 

Date of Birth 

Post Code 

Telephone Daytime Evening Mobile 

Email 

MSA Lic Grade MSA Lic No BRSCC Mem. No Expiry Date 

Section 2 - Vehicle Details 

Vehicle Model Class A - Boxster Please indicate engine M96.21 M96.24 M96.26 

Class B - Boxster Please indicate engine M96.21 M96.24 

Class C - 924 

Chassis Identification No 

Gearbox Identification No 

Engine Identification No 

Transponder No 

Please state preferred Competition 

No 

1 st Choice 2 nd Choice 

Section 3 - Declaration 

I agree to abide by all rules and regulations laid down in the BRSCC Porsche Championship Sporting and Technical 

Regulations, including any amendments or clarifications that may be made by the organisers during the course of the 

season and to observe all rules and regulations of the MSA Ltd. I agree to rounds of the championship being 

substituted in the event of a cancellation. 

Signature 

Date 

Please indicate with an “X” if submitting electronically 

Section 4 – Payment Details 

Please complete card payment details below OR attach a cheque for £385.00 made payable to BRSCC 

Please debit with £385.00 my Visa Mastercard Maestro 

Card Number 

Start Date Expiry Date Issue No. Security No (3 digits on reverse) 

Section 5 – Championship Clothing 

Upon Registration, a Championship Fleece will be issued. Please indicated the size required below by ticking relevant box. 

Small Medium Large X-Large 

Please send completed form including payment to 

By Post: BRSCC, Unit E, Homesdale Business Centre, Platt Industrial Estate, Maidstone Road, Borough Green, Kent TN15 8JL 

By Fax: (01732) 885783

2013 Teekay Couplings Production GTi Championship Regulations 

Issued by the BRSCC: 18 th March 2013 



2013 Teekay 

Couplings 

Production GTi 


Regulations 

Index 

Introduction 

Section 1 


Section 2 


Section 3 



Section 4 


Section 5 


Section 6 


Section 7 


Page 1 of 16






The 2013 BRSCC Production GTi Championship is organised and administrated by the British Racing and Sports Car 

Club (BRSCC) in accordance with the General Regulations of the Royal Automobile Club Motor Sports Association 

(incorporating the provisions of the International Sporting Code of the FIA) and these Championship Regulations. 







Bulletin to the MSA and to all registered competitors by email or by post to the address detailed on the Registration 

Form, or by delivery to the competitor by hand. It is a condition of entry into the championship that all competitors, 

teams, team members and persons associated with any of the above agree to be bound by the Regulations 

including any amendments, variations or statements relating thereto. 

1.2 Officials 

1.2.1 Co-ordinator 

Amanda Mitchell 

27 Crossley View 

Marine Parade East 

Clacton On Sea 

Essex 

CO15 6JZ 

Tel: (07872) 045 061 

Email: info@productiongti.com 

1.2.2 Eligibility Scrutineer 

Stephen Rose 

30 Marlow Close 

Netherton 

West Midlands 

DY2 9LX 

Tel: (07905) 666960 

Email: stephenrose1000@aol.com 


D Furlong, D Wells, R Smith & D Walton 







current Entrants Licence, where applicable. 

1.3.2 Drivers and Entrant Drivers must be fully paid up valid membership card holding Racing members of the BRSCC, be 

registered for the Championship and be in possession of a valid MSA Competition (Racing) National (B) or above 

licences, or equivalent (MSA Regulation [H 26.1.5]) or be a professional driver in possession of a valid Licence 

(featuring an E.U. flag) and medical, issued by the ASN of a member country of the European Union. 



Page 2 of 16



Page 3 of 16 






and racing. 


1.4.1 All drivers who are deemed suitable to compete in the championship will be invited by the BRSCC/Championship 

Co-ordinator to register as competitors for the championship after returning the championship registration form 

with the correct fee of £115. 

1.4.2 The Registration Fee is £115 payable to Production GTi. 

1.4.3 Registration numbers will be the permanent Competition numbers for the Championship. Each registered driver will 

be allocated a permanent number for the season by the Championship Co-ordinator and these will be issued strictly 

on receipt of a fully completed registration form and registration fee. 

The organisers reserve the right to decline any driver’s registration for the championship. The organisers empower 

Production GTi Limited on their behalf to accept or refuse any entry or registration and withdraw a registration at 

any time, should the inclusion of the competitor or team be deemed by them, with absolute discretion not to be in 

the interests of the championship. 

1.4.4 Official Championship Registration Cards will be issued by the Championship Co-ordinator only on receipt of a 

completed registration form. 



The 2013 BRSCC Production GTi Championship will be contested on the following dates at the following venues: 

Rounds 2013 Dates DH Venue Licence Status Club 

1 & 2 April 1 X Castle Combe Nat B BRSCC 

3 & 4 May 25 X Oulton Park Nat B BRSCC 

5, & 6 June 8/9 X Zandvoort Nat A KNAF 

7 & 8 August 3/4 X Brands Hatch Nat B BRSCC 

9 & 10 September 7 X Rockingham Nat B BRSCC 

11 & 12 October 19/20 X Donington Park Nat B BRSCC 

X = Double Header. 

1.6 Scoring 

1.6.1 Points will be awarded to competitors in each class listed as classified race finishers as follows: 

Position 

6 or more 5 starters 4 starters or 

starters in class in class less in class 

1 st 20 Points 15 Points 10 Points 

2 nd 16 Points 11 Points 7 Points 

3 rd 13 Points 8 Points 5 Points 

4 th 11 Points 6 Points 4 Points 

5 th 10 Points 5 Points 

6 th 9 Points 

7 th 8 Points 

8 th 7 Points 

9 th 6 Points 

10 th 5 Points 

11 th -15 th 3 Points 

16 th -20 th 2 Points



21 st + 1 Point 

Fastest Lap 2 Points 2 Points 2 Points 


1.6.2 Competitor’s lowest scoring round will be dropped for their total championship points tally. 

1.6.3 Ties will be resolved in accordance with MSA Regulation [W 1.3.4]. 

1.7 Awards 

1.7.1 All awards are to be provided by the race organisers. 


Trophy to 16V Class 1 st , 2 nd and 3 rd placed driver in each race 

Trophy to 8V Class 1 st , 2 nd and 3 rd placed driver in each race 


Trophy to 16V Class 1 st , 2 nd and 3 rd placed driver in the championship 

Trophy to 8V Class 1 st , 2 nd and 3 rd placed driver in the championship 

1.7.4 Bonuses 




round/event in the Production GTi paddock area. 


In accordance with current Government Legislation, the Organisers of every round are legally obliged to withhold tax 

at the current basic rate on all payments to non-UK resident sportsmen/sportswomen and account to HMRC using 

form FEU1, the quarterly return of all payments made to non-resident entertainers and sportsmen/women. That is, 

those persons who do not have a normal permanent residence in the UK. The UK does not include the Isle of Man, 

Channel Isles or Eire. 

This means that the Organisers of every round are required to deduct tax at the relevant rate, from such payments 

they may make to non-UK residents. Under certain circumstances, it is possible for competitors to enter into an 

agreement with the Inland Revenue to limit tax withheld. Any application for such an arrangement must be made in 

writing and not later than 30 days before their payment is due. 


merton Road, Liverpool L75 1BB. Tel: (0151) 472 6488 Fax: (0151) 472 6483 



distribution of any awards the competitors concerned must return such awards to the BRSCC in good condition within 

7 days. 

Page 4 of 16





2.1 Rounds 




Page 5 of 16






3.1 Entries 


entry closing date, which shall be 20 days before each round. 


complete and correct. The date of receipt for acceptance of entry purposes shall be the date on which the 








3.1.5 In the event of any rounds being oversubscribed the Organising Clubs in liaison with the co-ordinator / organiser 


3.1.6 Reserves are to be nominated on the Final List of Entries published with Final Instructions or Amendment Sheet 








3.2 Briefings 


meetings. Competitors must attend all briefings. 

3.3 Practice 


3.3.2 Should any practice session be disrupted, the Clerk of the Course shall not be obliged to resume the session or rerun 








to qualify for selection and order of precedence as set out in the MSA Regulation [Q 4.5]. The Clerk of the Course 


considered unsatisfactory as per MSA Regulation [Q 4.5]. 

3.5. Races 

3.5.1 The standard minimum scheduled time shall be 15 minutes but should any race time be reduced at the discretion 

of the Clerk of the Course or Stewards of the meeting it shall still count as a full points scoring round. 

Page 6 of 16




3.6 Starts 



Circuit. 





3.6.3 The use of tyre heating/heat retention devices, tyre treatments and compounds is prohibited. 





[Q 12.13.2]. Any drivers unable to maintain grid positions on the Green Flag to the extent that all other cars are 






seconds after the board is withdrawn. 



3.7.1 Should the need arise to stop any race, RED LIGHTS will be switched on at the Start Line and RED FLAGS will be 

displayed at the startline and at all Marshals Signalling Points around the circuit. This is the signal for all drivers to 

cease circulating at racing speeds, to slow to a safe and reasonable pace and to return to the starting grid area, 

which will automatically become a Parc Fermé area. Cars may not enter the pits unless directed to do so. Work on 

cars already in the pits must cease when a race is stopped. 





3.7.3 Case B – More than two laps completed by the race leader but less than 75% of the scheduled distance. 

The race will restart from a grid set out by the finishing order of part one (as per Q5.4.2) The result of the race will 

be the finishing order of part two. The length of the restarted race will be determined by the Clerk of the Course. 


If the leader has completed more than 75% of the race distance or duration it shall not be restarted and the results 

will be declared in accordance with MSA General Regulations [Q 5.4.3], unless the Clerk of the Course, in 

consultation with the Stewards deem it appropriate to restart the race. 





3.9.1 Pits Entrants must ensure that the MSA, Circuit Management and Organising Club Safety Regulations are 

complied with at all times. 

Page 7 of 16




3.9.2 Pitlane The outer lane or lanes are to be kept unobstructed to allow safe passage of cars at all times. The 

onus shall be on all Drivers to take due care and drive at minimum speeds in the Pit Lanes. 

3.9.3 Refuelling May only be carried out in accordance with the MSA Regulation [Q 13], Circuit Management 

Regulations and Supplementary Regulations or Final Instructions issued for every meeting. 


After taking the Chequered Flag drivers are required to progressively and safely slow down, remain behind any 



3.11 Results 













removed. 


In the event of the need for any qualification races, the procedures will be as published in the Final Instructions for 

the events concerned. 

3.14 Operation of the Safety Car 

The Safety Car will be brought into operation and run in accordance with Section Q, Appendix 2 of the MSA General 

Regulations. 

Page 8 of 16






4.1.1 Arising from post practice Scrutineering or Judicial Action 


4.1.2 Arising from post race Scrutineering or Judicial Action 


For an infringement deemed to be of a more serious nature the Clerk of the Course and/or Stewards of the Meeting 

are to invoke the provisions of Regulation [C 3.5.1 (c)]. 

4.2 Infringements of Non-Technical MSA Regulations and the Sporting Regulations issued for the 



4.2.2 The Clerk of the Course reserves the right to impose a ‘Stop-Go Penalty/Drive Through Penalty’ in accordance with 










an offence occurs during any subsequent race then the points solely gained for that race shall be forfeit. 




individually. The offences are; 

• Reckless or dangerous driving in the course of a meeting. MSA Regulation [C 1.1.5]. 



season he will receive written warning from the Championship Coordinator that his driving/behaviour is to be 

specifically observed at future race meetings. Any adverse reports during this period of observation could result in 

official MSA action and will result in a Championship Stewards' enquiry, with possible loss of Championship points 

and refusal of further race entries. 

4.2.5 For offences under MSA regulations [C1.1.5], [C1.1.6], [Q14.4.2] and [Q14.5], the Clerk of the Course, at his 





race/event. 



increased. 

Page 9 of 16







understood that if the following texts do not clearly specify that you can do it you should work on the principle that 

you cannot. All references to the MSA Yearbook (blue book) relate to the current edition. 

The word ‘standard ’ used within these technical regulations as a description of components is to be interpreted as: 

per MSA Regulation Section B ‘Standard Parts’. The term “free’ is qualified as “free within the constraints of MSA 

technical/safety regulations”. 

Should a disabled licence holder wish to join the championship and requires the car to be modified to allow this to 

happen, the organizers reserve the right to amend these regulations to permit any changes to the vehicle concerned. 

Such amendments will only apply to the car whilst being operated by a disabled licence holder. 


5.2.1 The Series is for VW MK2 Golf GTi cars running either the 8 valve 1.8 litre four cylinder engine, designated PB or EV 

or the 1.8 litre four cylinder engines designated KR as supplied fitted to the GTI 8V and GTI 16V models respectively. 

These models must have been produced in Germany for sale to the general public as shown in sales brochures and 

obtained through the United Kingdom VW dealer network. Left hand drive models are not eligible. 

The Series is intended to provide close racing between drivers and not a technical challenge for preparation 

experts. The intention of the technical regulations is to create a car that is as safe as possible, fun to drive and yet 

remain as close to standard as possible. If you are contemplating any modifications about which you are unsure, 

you should call upon the Championship Eligibility Scrutineer for a decision. Competitors should assume that unless 

a modification is specifically permitted, that any modification is prohibited. 

Cars must be presented to a high standard. Excessive corrosion, poor paintwork or significant bodywork damage may 

result in exclusion from the race / practice entered 


The organisers (in addition to any other powers they may have under these Regulations reserve the right before or 

after any race in the championship/series to designate any one or more of the competing cars for special eligibility 




(a) Examine the car at the circuit for such period as they may reasonably require and take fuel samples and/or 

(b) 

(c) 

Retain the car for detailed examination at premises chosen by the organisers. If the organisers elect to 

retain the car they shall make it available for collection by the competitor at least seven days prior to the 

qualification session for the next race in the championship/series unless the car is found to be in breach of 

these regulations and/or 

Seal the car and its components in such a manner as they may choose and require the competitor at their 

own expense to present the car at any other premises chosen by the organisers for detailed examination 

within a specified period and/or remove the car by transporter at no expense to the competitor to an 

appointed location. The competitor will be advised in writing of the time, date and location of the 

subsequent testing or eligibility examination. 





Competitors will be personally and solely responsible for ensuring that their cars comply with their registration details 

and with these regulations for each event at which they are entered. Failure to comply in either respect will be a 

breach of these regulations. Queries concerning eligibility should be referred in writing to the 

organisers/championship/series Eligibility Scrutineer at least seven days prior to an event entered, to permit a ruling 

in advance of any meeting at which it is intended to compete. 

Page 10 of 16





5.3.1 All MSA Regulation Section K, Section J and Section Q Safety Criteria apply as relevant and the following: 

i) A suitable FIA approved competition seat designed for use with a six-point harness and with appropriate 

mountings must be fitted according to MSA Regulation [K 2.2]. It is strongly recommended to fit a seat 

which includes lateral head restraints and is compatible with an FIA approved HR Device. 

ii) A suitable harness of six-point design and carrying an FIA approved label must be fitted in accordance with 

MSA Regulation [K2.1.4] 

iii) 

It is permitted to incorporate the use of the FIA approved HR Device fitted in accordance with FIA 

Regulations. 

iv) 

A plumbed-in fire extinguisher with a minimum capacity of 2.25 litres is required in accordance with MSA 

Regulation [K 3.2] 

5.3.2 A rollcage as defined by Section K must be fitted and the following; 

i) Doorbars must be fitted in accordance with MSA Regulation [K 1.3.5] 

ii) Optional reinforcement members may be fitted in accordance with MSA Regulation [K 1.3.5] 

iii) Protective padding must be fitted in accordance with MSA Regulation [K 1.3.6] and [K 1.6.6]. 

iv) The roll cage may only be attached to the bodyshell via the 6 mounting feet. 

5.4 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS AND EXCEPTIONS 

5.4.1 There should be towing eyes with minimum internal diameter of 60mm securely fixed to the main structure of the 

vehicle, front and rear, within the confines of the body to enable the vehicle to be moved in accordance with MSA 

Regulation [ Q 19.1.3] In respect to front towing eye, this may not protrude beyond the vertical plane of the 

front bumper by more than 10mm. For the avoidance of doubt this precludes the use of the standard towing eye in its 

standard location, competitors must find an alternative. 

5.4.2 In order to allow the Eligibility Scrutineer to affix seals, every installed engine must have 1.6mm holes drilled in at least 

two adjacent sump bolts and two adjacent rocker/cam cover bolts. 

5.4.3 Engines may be sealed from the cars first event. Thereafter the seals must be in place at all times. If a seal needs to be removed for 

any reason, the seal may only be removed in the presence of the Eligibility Scrutineer 

5.4.4 To facilitate technical scrutineering, engines will be power tested with a handheld dynomometer, known as a 

Schrick meter. 

Any engines which exceed any of the maximum permitted power measurements of 160bhp will be sealed and retested. 

If a second reading exceeds these figures then, the car will be subject to further investigation. This will include further 

power testing on a rolling road and may also include engine strip and internal investigation. 

5.4.5 Pattern parts meeting original manufacturer’s specification are permitted. 

5.5 Chassis 

The construction type, design and material must remain as standard. Lightening or reducing the chassis strength is 

prohibited. Additional strengthening of the chassis is prohibited (e.g. seam welding). The chassis as produced by the 

manufacturer with the original material must be retained in all aspects in respect of material, thickness and contour. 

For the benefit of doubt, chassis is defined here to include the body shell, all internal cross members and 

bracketry, wings, doors, bonnet, boot-lid, roof and panels. Proprietary body repair materials are permitted. 

5.6 Bodywork 

MSA Regulations [J 5.2] and [Q 19] apply. 

5.6.1 Modifications permitted but not mandated 

i) All sound proofing and heat shielding material may be removed 

ii) Mechanically operated items may replace electrically operated items. It is not permitted to replace an 

electrically operated part with a nonstandard alternative mechanical part or mechanism. All mechanical parts 

must be fully functioning. 

iii) Sunroof mechanisms can be removed entirely. If the sunroof panel is removed it must be replaced with a 

steel sheet at least the same material and thickness as the roof skin. MSA Regulation [Q 19.14.6] applies. 

iv) A strut brace between the front strut towers may be fitted. 

Page 11 of 16



Page 12 of 16 


v) A strut brace between the rear strut towers may be fitted. 

vi) Items originally fitted as optional extras to the vehicle may be removed. This includes, cruise control, air 

conditioning, headlamp wash/wipe, front fog lights and in-cabin headlamp height adjuster 

vii) Door cards may be removed. If removed, they must be replaced with an alternative panel that protects the 

driver from sharp edges and the intrusion of metal structures in the event of a side impact. 

viii) Number plates may be removed. 

ix) Headlamps may be covered with protective tape provided they are not coloured red. 

x) The bonnet catch mechanism may be replaced as per MSA Regulation [Q 19.2.6]. The bonnet must be secured 

by surface mounted bonnet pins. 

xi) 4-door models may remove the window mechanisms from the rear passenger doors. 

xii) The wheel arch liners may be removed and the inner lip of the wheel arch may be “rolled” to prevent fouling 

the tyre but no material may be removed 

xiii) Post-facelift big bumpers may be fitted to pre-facelift small bumpered cars. 

5.6.2 Interior 

i) All passenger seating must be removed. The driver’s seat must be replaced as per Championship Regulation 

[5.3.1.i]. The front passenger seat may be replaced with a competition seat, fitted as per MSA Regulation [K 

2.2]. 

ii) Any interior trim including dashboard trim, carpeting and sound proofing may be removed. 

iii) Window winding mechanisms, boot and door locks and catches must remain in place but can be disabled for 

safety reasons. 

iv) Windscreen vents must remain to allow demisting. Driver and passenger facing vents may be removed. 

5.6.3 Modifications prohibited 

i) Silhouette must remain as standard. All spoilers, dams, splitters, aerofoils and diffusers are prohibited other 

than that mentioned in Championship Regulation [5.6.1.xii]. 

ii) All window glass must be retained as originally fitted. If nets are used to cover open side windows then the 

glass must still be retained. 

iii) Material, thickness and profile of external body panels may not be changed. 

iv) Plan must be as standard with no extensions to wheel arches permitted. 

v) Wheel arches may not be modified to increase wheel clearance. 

vi) The use of any undertrays, diffusers or any other aerodynamic device fitted to the underside of the vehicle, 

other than those fitted as standard, is prohibited. 

5.7 Engine 

MSA Regulations [J 5.4] applies 

i) Only the 8-valve, four-cylinder engine (designated PB or EV) or the 16 valve four-cylinder engine 

(designated KR) fitted to the VW Golf GTI 8 valve or 16 Valve Golf GTi are eligible. 

ii) Cleaning and decoking of the cylinder head is permitted but polishing, deburring, machining or any other 

modifications are prohibited so that the original surface finish shall remain untouched. 

iii) The cylinder head may be skimmed to a minimum height of 118.5mm for the 16 valve and 133mm for the 8 

valve (measured through cylinder head bolt holes). 

iv) The crank journals may be machined, to solely permit the fitting of proprietary oversize bearings. 

v) The cylinder bores may be bored out to permit the fitment of oversize pistons, the maximum overbore piston 

diameter is 82mm for both classes. 

vi) The Cambelt pulley can be replaced for an adjustable item. The original chain pulleys and key ways must be 

used on the 16 valve engine. 

vii) Balancing of the reciprocating parts is allowed. This is restricted to a maximum of 3 pistons / connecting rods. 

viii) The standard flywheel and clutch assembly weights are 10kg and these must be within ±1% of these figures. 

ix) Camshafts can be either Standard UK Specification or Newman 272/10.5 profile for 16v and Profile no 

280/10.5 for 8v. It is not permitted to re-profile or regrind camshafts. 

x) The cylinder block upper face can be machined but the height must be no less than 277.8mm (measured 

between top and bottom faces) 

xi) The original radiator cowling may be removed but non-standard cowling is prohibited. 

xii) Coolant hose material is free and hoses may be modified to accommodate an additional temperature sender. 

xiii) 16 valve cars are allowed to fit the 8 valve specification radiator. 

xiv) An oil cooling system consisting of oil radiator, oil filter head and associated pipework may be fitted solely for 

the purpose of reducing engine oil temperature. 

xv) The standard sump may have baffles, a baffle plate, crank scraper or windage tray fitted to prevent oil 

starvation. No other sump modifications are permitted.



xvi) 

xvii) 

xviii) 

xix) 

xx) 

Page 13 of 16 


It is not permitted to run a mixture of engine components, either mechanical or electrical. Engines must use 

the correct specification components as they left the factory as a complete unit. Only engine block codes KR 

for 16 valve and EV or PB may be used for 8 valves. 

The fitment of a solid front engine mount is allowed. 

The air filter is free but must be of OEM design and size and fitted in the original location. The induction 

system must be of standard specification for the vehicle and be retained in its entirety. The air box may be 

modified on the atmospheric side of the air filter. 

The original ECU must be used without any additional form of electronic engine management. The 16 valve 

ECU can have a modified rev limit crystal fitted. The 8 valve standard ECU chip can be reprogrammed to 

optimize fuelling, ignition timing and move rev limiters. No other modifications are permitted. 

All cars must use the standard exhaust manifold as fitted to the right hand drive models and may not be 

modified in any way. The remainder of the exhaust system is free provided that it exits at the rear of the car 

and is compatible to MSA noise regulation J 5.17. 



5.8.1 Modifications permitted but not mandated 

i) The front suspension top mount can be changed for a standard item from a Mk2 Golf G60, Mk3 Golf VR6 or 

Corrado VR6 

ii) Spring rates and dampers are free subject to Championship Regulation [5.8.2]. Dampers can be height, bump 

and rebound adjustable but can only be adjusted mechanically and must work in the same orientation as 

standard. The damper centerline must run concentrically in the same plane as standard. Springs must be 

made of steel and be fitted in the same location and number as standard although it is permitted to fit helper 

springs to each damper. 

iii) All bushes must be of standard dimensions but may be substituted for polyurethane items of the same design 

and size as the original item. These bushes include and are limited to wishbone, steering rack, front cross 

member, rear beam, front antiroll bar, rear damper upper and lower mountings 

iv) The front camber can be adjusted to a maximum of 3 degrees using the original adjustment method only. 

Rear camber can be a maximum of 1.5 degrees. The use of minimal shim plates behind the rear hubs to 

achieve this is permitted. 

v) Front toe is free and rear toe must be between 30' toe in and 30' toe out (across axle) 

vi) Ground clearance as measured from the lowest point of the car, including the exhaust system shall be no less 

than 75mm whilst meeting minimum weight requirements as per 5.14i with the driver seated in the normal 

driving position. 

5.8.2 Modifications prohibited 

i) No changes to suspension pick up points are permitted. 

ii) Rod ends or other spherical bearings are not permitted 

iii) It is not permitted to have dampers that contain mechanisms to alter damping at different speeds (3 way or 

more). Remote reservoirs on dampers are prohibited. Damper stems must be a maximum of 28mm. Dampers 

cannot be inverted. 

iv) Anti roll bars must be standard (18mm front and 20mm rear), they must be connected in the original 

locations. 

v) Wheelbase and track must be standard subject to differences created by alterations allowed in Championship 

Regulation [5.8.1]. 

vi) All suspension components will be of the same design and made of the same material as that on the standard 

vehicle save as per Championship Regulations [5.8.1.ii], [5.8.1.iii] and [5.8.1.iv]. Specifically aluminium 

components may not be replaced by steel components (or visa versa) and no component may be replaced by 

any composite material or alloys that include any element of Titanium or Magnesium. 

vii) No alterations to suspension geometry are permitted, other than that available on the standard car and as 

per Championship Regulations [5.8.1.i], [5.8.1.ii], [5.8.1.iii] and [5.8.1.iv]. 

5.9 Transmissions 


i) Only gearbox/differential unit “020” as supplied with approved engines in the Mk 2 Golf GTI range is 

permitted. Gearbox Codes for 8V are 9A and ACD, the gearbox codes for the 16V are 2Y and AGB. 

ii) Gear ratios must be as supplied with the gearbox in production form. For reference, the standard forward 

ratios for the 16V are 3.455, 2.118, 1.444, 1.129, 0.912 (Final Drive 3.667) and for the 8V version they are 

3.455, 2.118, 1.444, 1.129, 0.894 (Final Drive 3.667). The 8V may also use Gearbox Code AUG which has



Page 14 of 16 


different 2nd Gear Ratio of 1.944. 

iii) Gearbox mounting and location points must be retained and used as intended by the manufacturer. 

iv) The standard differential must be retained. Limited Slip Differentials are prohibited. Crown wheel and Pinion 

rivets may be replaced with bolts. 

v) Gear Selecting Rods are Free 


5.10.1 MSA Regulations [J 5.14] applies and the following 

i) The standard heater/demisting mechanism shall be retained, not modified in any way and shall be in full 

working condition. 

ii) The battery size and type is free but must be capable of starting the car unassisted. The battery must remain 

in its original location. 

iii) The standard battery clamp is inadequate and an alternative or additional battery clamp should be used. 

iv) The alternator must remain in its standard configuration and be operational at all times while the engine is 

running. 

v) No devices may be added or modified to provide any form of traction control, launch control or full- throttle 

gearshifts. 

vi) Electrical switches can only operate the function for which they were originally fitted into the car for and for 

no other purpose, with the exception of the key-operated starter switch which may be replaced by a starter 

button. 

vii) Exterior lighting must remain standard with the exception of removal of the inner headlights. These must be 

replaced with wire mesh. 

viii) An LED rear rain / fog light to EU or FIA regulation must be fitted within 100mm of rear window centre line 

between the top and bottom of the glass. MSA Regulation [K 5] applies. Integral fog lights must be rendered 

inoperative. 

5.10.2 No modification to any electrical system, other than re-routing wiring, is permitted with the exception of in car 

entertainment systems, including speakers, amplifiers, aerials and “head” units, central locking and associated wiring 

and the rear wash wipe system which may be removed. As per Bodywork above, electric mechanisms may be 

substituted by mechanical. Sunroof mechanisms can be removed. Controls may be repositioned where allowable trim 

modifications require it (e.g. electric window switches, light switches). 

The following redundant electrical items and associated wiring may be removed: 

i) On-board computers 

ii) Interior courtesy lamps 

iii) Boot illumination 

iv) Glovebox illumination 

v) Electric mirror control switch, providing mirror adjustment is still available. If electric mirrors are retained, 

the control switch need not be permanently installed. 

vi) Front fog lamps and switchgear. 

5.11 Brakes 

The braking system shall be as standard as fitted to either 8V or 16V, as per MSA regulation Q19.5 and the following; 

i) Anti-lock braking systems (ABS) must be removed or disabled. 

ii) 

iii) 

Brake pad material is free but dimensions to remain as original equipment. 

Discs are free but must be one-piece construction, steel, of original model diameter and use standard 

callipers. For the avoidance of doubt, the 8V may only run the 239MM disc and the 16V can run either the 

239mm as fitted to earlier 16V models or the later 256mm version. 

iv) Any form of ducting even if it is standard is prohibited and removal of splash guards only are allowed to 

improve brake cooling. 

v) An adjustable Brake Bias valve may be fitted. However it can only be located in the boot area of the car to 

vi) 

prevent adjustments being made by the driver during qualifying or racing. 

The standard flexible brake lines may be replaced with braided items. 

5.12 Wheels/Steering 

As per MSA regulations [J 5.8] and the following; 

i) The steering system including rack, tie rods, steering arms, and column shall remain as standard 

ii) Steering wheel height may be adjusted by modifying the steering column providing that any materials used are 

of adequate strength. It is strongly recommended that fasteners are regularly checked for security and 

tightness.




iii) The steering wheel is free within MSA regulations. 

iv) Only steel or single piece aluminium alloy road wheels are permitted of 15” diameter, maximum width 7J, 

offset between ET 35 and ET 38. Tyres should not foul the body or chassis when the steering is turned under 

both static and dynamic suspension load. 

v) Wheel spacers are permitted provided that they achieve the same vehicle track as permitted by Championship 

Regulation [5.12.iv]. Competitors should ensure that wheel bolts are of sufficient length to adequately secure 

each wheel 

vi) Wheel hubs may be fitted with studs to accept wheel nuts. 

5.13 Tyres 

The control tyres for the championship are “Toyo Proxes R888” in 195/50R15 size only. Tyres must bear the 

compound mark GG, moulded into the sidewall. All other compounds are prohibited and tyres may be tested with a 

durometer. It is prohibited to alter the tread pattern of the tyres by cutting. 

Tyres can only be purchased from the Production GTI Authorised Supplier: 

Mike Stokes Motorsport 

1053WimborneRoad, 

Bournemouth, 

Dorset 

BH9 2BY 

http://www.mikestokes.net/ 

5.14 Weights 

Weights are defined as the whole car, including fluids and consumables and the driver in full racing kit. 

The following are the minimum weights required for each class to achieve at the end of each qualification session and 

each race. 

VW Golf GTI Mk 2 8V - 950KG 

VW Golf GTI Mk 2 16V - 1025KG 

Cars may carry ballast, as per J5.15, in order to achieve the minimum weights. 

5.15 Fuel Tank/Fuel 

As per MSA Regulation [Q 19.10] where appropriate. The design and location of the fuel tank shall be as 

manufacturer’s specification. 

i) Fuel Tank type - standard 

ii) Location - standard 

iii) Fuel - Only pump fuel as defined in MSA General Regulations Nomenclature and Definitions (see Pump Fuel)] 

may be used 

iv) The standard fuel pump must be used, with no additional pumps permitted. 

v) No swirl tanks or other means of fuel baffling is permitted. 


All vehicles shall conform to MSA Regulation [J 5.17]. 

5.17 Numbers/Decals 

5.17.1 To be eligible to compete in the Production GTI Championship, it is mandatory to display the following decals (subject 

to availability); 

i) Teekay Couplings Sunstrip across the top of the windscreen. 

ii) Polybush Front & Rear Number Plates 

iii) Jabba Sport Logo on Rear C Pillars both sides. 

iv) Toyo & Mikes Stokes Motorsport across the top of the rear screen. 

v) BRSCC Shield on the bottom of both front wings 

Page 15 of 16



5.17.2 Competition numbers must be displayed in accordance with MSA Regulation [Q 11]. 


The numbers for each rear side window, shall be: 

(1) a minimum of 200mm high 

(2) with a stroke width of at least 20mm 

(3) coloured reflective yellow 

In addition, the windscreen of all cars must display the competition number positioned on the upper side area of 

the passenger’s side of the windscreen, as follows 

(4) the numerals must be at least 150mm high 

(5) be in the same colour and font as those displayed on the rear side windows 

(6) be placed no closer than 50mm from the lower edge of the windscreen “sun strip” and 50mm from the side 

edge of the windscreen 

5.17.2 Competition numbers will be obtained at the competitor's expense. One full set of championship decals will be 

supplied by the Title sponsor, tyre supplier and/or any other sponsor and/or Production GTi. A charge may be made 

for replacement decals. 

All championship decals and series sponsors decals must be displayed in their entirety. 

Page 16 of 16

BookaTrack.com Caterham Superlight R300 Championship Regulations 



INDEX 


2013 Caterham Superlight 

R300 Championship 

Regulations 

Introduction 

Section 1 


Section 2 


Section 3 



Section 4 


Section 5 


Section 6 


Section 7 


INTRODUCTION 

Caterham Superlight Championship 

Sponsored by BookaTrack.com 

Championship Results 2012 

1 st Paul Wilson 

2 nd Mark Shaw 

3 rd Ian Payne 

Page 1 of 31






The 2013 Caterham Superlight R300 Championship is organised and administrated by the British Racing And Sports 

Car Club (BRSCC) in accordance with the General Regulations of the Motor Sports Association (incorporating the 

provisions of the International Sporting Code of the FIA) and these Championship Regulations. 




The BRSCC reserve the right to amend or vary the Sporting Regulations in accordance with MSA Regulation [D 11.1] 

at any time before or during the Championship and further issue additional statements concerning the Regulations 

from time to time, subject to MSA approval, and all such statements will be issued by Championship Bulletin to the 

MSA and to all registered competitors by email or by post to the address detailed on the Registration Form, or by 

delivery to the competitor by hand. It is a condition of entry into the championship that all competitors, teams, 

team members and persons associated with any of the above agree to be bound by the Regulations including any 

amendments, variations or statements relating thereto. 

The promoter and manufacturer, Caterham Cars Ltd is hereafter referred to as ‘Caterham’. Caterham operates 

from four sites; Dartford (Dartford, Kent; factory, engineering and Caterham Motorsport office), Midlands (nr 

Leicester; sales and race support), South (Caterham, Surrey; sales and marketing) and Westbury (Westbury, 

Wiltshire; chassis manufacture and repair). 

1.2 Officials 

1.2.1 Coordinator 

Jennifer Grace 


2 Kennet Road 

Dartford 

Kent 

DA1 4QN 

Tel: 07808 776366 

E Mail: jennyg@caterham.co.uk 

1.2.2 Clerk Of The Course 

Bernard Cottrell 

139 Island Wall 

Whitstable 

Kent 

CT5 1DY 

M:+44(0)7836 684100 

e-mail: Bernard@brscc.co.uk 

1.2.3 Eligibility Scrutineer Deputy Eligibility Scrutineer 

Ian Millar 

11 The Square 

Penicuik 

EH26 8LH 

Tel (Home): 01968 678752 

E mail address 

scrutineer@caterham.co.uk 

Mobile number 07703 765692 

Mike Hibbins 

4 Stacklands Close 

West Kingdown 

Sevenoaks 

Kent 

TN15 6DL 

mike@brscc.co.uk 

Tel: Home 01474 854121 Work 07785 247355 

Page 2 of 31












2013 Entrants Licence 

1.3.2 Drivers and Entrant Drivers must be fully paid up valid membership card holding racing members of the BRSCC, be 

registered for the Championship and be in possession of a valid MSA Competition (Racing) National B or above 

licences or be a professional driver in possession of a valid Licence (featuring an E.U. flag) a letter of authority to 

race from their ASN and medical, issued by the ASN of a member country of the European Union. 





1.3.3 All Drivers must be fully registered for the 2013 Caterham Superlight R300 Championship in order to be eligible to 

take part in any of the races forming this championship. Unregistered drivers will not be permitted to qualify or 

take part in any of these events. 



and racing. 

1.3.6 At each round, the car (identified by its unique chassis number) in which a driver races, must be the same car in 

which the driver qualified or, where a grid is determined by the outcome of a preceding race, must be the same car 

in which the driver competed in that race. 

Under some circumstances, the Clerk of the Course may grant permission for an alternative car to be used, should 

they feel this is appropriate. 


1.4.1 All drivers must register with the Coordinator not less than two weeks before practice of the first round being 

entered for the championship by completing the online registration system found on the Caterham website. If an 

entrant wishes to nominate more than one driver during the course of the season he/she must complete one 

registration form for each driver. 

1.4.2 A registration fee of £550 for the complete season or £150 per race weekend is payable for this championship in 

respect of each vehicle. For competitors paying the Registration Fee for the season before the 31 st December 2012, 

the fee will be reduced to £500. Cheques should be made payable to CATERHAM CARS LIMITED and be sent with 

the registration form to the Coordinator. Teams may register Hire Cars for the championship, the fee for which is 

£550 for the complete season (or if paid before the 31 st December as above) or £150 per race weekend payable to 

CATERHAM CARS LTD. Hire drivers taking part in these vehicles must still send completed registration forms and 

information to the coordinator at least one week before the round that they wish to enter. 

1.4.3 Registrations will be accepted from 1 October 2012 until one week before practice of the final round. The 

organisers and promoters of the championship reserve the right to refuse to accept registrations at their discretion. 

Page 3 of 31




1.4.4 Registration numbers will be permanent competition numbers for the championship. Numbers will be allocated on 

request using a first come first served basis until the end of February 2013. From 1st March 2013 competition 

numbers will be allocated by the coordinator. 

#1 is reserved for the 2012 champion. 

Drivers from the 2012 Superlight championship will have their 2012 number reserved until the 31 January 2013 

(unless they register earlier and choose a different number), at which point it will be made available to others. 

The number of the 2012 champion will also be held in reserve for the duration of the season, to allow them to 

revert to their preferred number in the event of a change of circumstances and to adopt the number again in 2014 

if they do not win the championship. 

1.5 Championship Rounds 

The Caterham Superlight Championship will be contested over 14 rounds, dates and venues as follows: 

1.6 Scoring 

Round Date Venue Licence Status Club 

1 & 2 20/21 April Snetterton 300 National B BRSCC 

3 & 4 11/12 May Anglesey International National B BRSCC 

5 & 6 8/9 June Zandvoort National A KNAF 

7 & 8 13/14 July Donington Park National National B BRSCC 

9 & 10 10/11 August Brands Hatch Grand Prix National B MSVR 

11 & 12 14 September Oulton Park National B BRSCC 

13 & 14 19/20 October Silverstone International National B BRSCC 

Each meeting will comprise of two 30 minute races 

1.6.1 Points will be awarded to all registered competitors listed as classified finishers who will score points as follows: 

1 st 25 points 

2 nd 23 

3 rd 22 

4 th 21 

5 th 20 

6 th 19 

7 th 18 

8 th 17 

9 th 16 

10 th 15 

11 th 14 

12 th 13 

1 additional point will be awarded for fastest race lap 

13 th 12 

14 th 11 

15 th 10 

16 th 9 

17 th 8 

18 th 7 

19 th 6 

20 th 5 

21 st 4 

22 nd 3 

23 rd 2 

All other classified finishers 

1 point 

In the event of a Double Header, both races will be eligible to score full points and be eligible for trophies and 

prizes. 

1.6.2 The totals from all rounds held of the championship, less two, will determine the final Championship points and 

positions. 

1.6.3 Ties will be resolved according to [W 1.3.4] of the current MSA Yearbook. 

Page 4 of 31




1.6.4 Caterham reserve the right to enter a Celebrity / Development / Guest car at any event. This car and drivers(s) will 

not score points but may be awarded individual race trophies if the finish position merits it; the Competition 

Number 7 will be reserved for this entry. 

Drivers whose only races of the championship are the final double-header weekend races, will not score 

championship points for these rounds. 

1.7 AWARDS 

1.7.1 Trophies will be given for 1st, 2nd and 3rd place winners. 

1.7.2 Trophies will be awarded to the first three drivers in the championship. 

1.7.3 Bonuses 

Per Round: The organisers reserve the right to add bonus awards during the course of the season. 



round/event. 

Competitors shall be obliged to attend all prize giving ceremonies for which the race meeting and championship 

organisers give adequate notice of the dates, times and venues for the same in their final instructions or bulletins. 

Competitors are reminded that if required to take part in a podium celebration, they must present themselves in 

their race overalls, worn correctly, for the purposes of neat and professional presentation. 




using form FEU1, the quarterly return of payments made to non-resident entertainers and sportsmen/women. 

That is, those persons who do not have a normal permanent residence in the UK. The UK does not include the Isle 

of Man, Channel Isles or Eire. 

This means that the Organisers of every round are required to deduct tax at the relevant rate, from such 

payments they may make to non-UK residents. Under certain circumstances, it is possible for competitors to enter 

into an agreement with the Inland Revenue to limit tax withheld. Any application for such an arrangement must 

be made in writing and not later than 30 days before their payment is due. 




In the event of any Provisional Results being revised after any provisional presentations and such revisions affect 

the distribution of any awards the competitors concerned must return such awards to the BRSCC in good condition 

within 7 days. 

Page 5 of 31





2.1 Rounds 




Page 6 of 31




3. SPORTING REGULATIONS – CHAMPIONSHIP RACE MEETINGS AND 

RACE PROCEDURES 

3.1 Entries 



3.1.2 Incorrect or incomplete entries (including driver to be nominated entries) are to be held in abeyance until they 

are complete and correct. The date of receipt for acceptance of entry purposes shall be the date on which the 






3.1.4 The Maximum entry fee for every round shall be as stipulated in the Supplementary Regulations plus any late 

entry surcharge imposed by the club. 

3.1.5 In the event of any rounds being oversubscribed the Organising Clubs in liaison with the coordinator / organiser 


3.1.6 Reserves are to be nominated on the final list of entries published with Final Instructions or Amendment Sheet 



shall determine their grid positions. If Reserves are given places after publication of the grid sheet and prior to 

cars being collected in the Official “Assembly Areas” they will be placed at the rear of the Grid and be started 

without any time delay. Otherwise, they will be held in the Pitlane and be released to start the race after the last 

car to start the GREEN FLAG LAP or last car to take the start has passed the startline or pitlane exit, whichever is 

the later. Such approval to start MUST be obtained from the Clerk of the Course. 

3.2 Briefings 



3.3 Practice 




3.3.3. Should the need arise to stop any practice, RED LIGHTS will be switched on at the Start Line and RED FLAGS will be 

displayed at the start line and at all other Marshal Signalling Points around the circuit. 




Each driver should complete a minimum of 3 laps practice in the car to be raced and in the correct session in 

Page 7 of 31




3.5 Races 

order to qualify for selection and order of precedence as set out in the MSA regulations [Q 4.5]. The Clerk of the 

Course and or Stewards of the meeting shall have the right to exclude any driver whose practice times or racing 

are considered unsatisfactory as per MSA Regulation [Q 4.5.3]. 

The standard minimum scheduled distance for the qualifying session shall be 20 minutes duration this will 

establish the grid for race one. The grid for race two, shall be determined by the finishing positions of race one 

MSA Regulation [Q 4.5.1] applies 

3.5.1 The standard minimum scheduled distance of race one shall be 30 minutes The standard minimum scheduled 

distance of race two shall be 30 minutes. 

3.6 Starts 

If any race distance is reduced at the discretion of the Clerk of the Course or Stewards of the Meeting, 

championship points will be awarded on the following scale: 

between 60-100% of originally intended race distance, full points 

25-59%, half points 

less than 25%, no points 

Where a race has been stopped and restarted, the total number of laps run by the race leader during each section 

of the race shall be taken into account for the purposes of determining the percentages above. 

3.6.1 All race start countdowns are to have a minimum elapsed period of 3 minutes from the time all cars are released 

to form up the grid to the start of the Green Flag lap(s) in the formation as specified on the Track Licence for the 

Circuit. 

3.6.2 The Countdown procedures shall be: 






pit lane. They may start the race after the last car to take the start from the grid has passed the start line or pit 

lane exit, whichever is the later. 

3.6.5 Any drivers unable to start the Green Flag lap or start are required to indicate their situation as per MSA 

Regulation [Q 12.13.2]. Any drivers unable to maintain grid positions on the Green Flag to the extent that all other 

cars are ahead of them may complete the Green Flag Lap. They MUST remain at the rear of the last row of the 

grid but ahead of any cars to be started with a time delay. 

3.6.6 Excessive weaving to warm-up tyres using more than 50% of the track width and falling back in order to 

accelerate and practice starts, is prohibited. 


seconds after the board is withdrawn. In the event that the starting lights fail the Starter will revert to using the 

National Flag. 


3.7.1 Should the need arise to stop any race or practice, RED LIGHTS will be switched on at the Start Line and RED 

FLAGS will be displayed at the startline and at all Marshals Signalling Points around the circuit. 

Page 8 of 31




This is the signal for all drivers to cease circulating at racing speeds, to slow to a safe and reasonable pace and to 

return to the starting grid area, which will automatically become a Parc Fermé area. 

Cars may not enter the pits unless directed to do so. Work on cars already in the pits must cease when a race is 

stopped. 






The race will restart from a grid set out by the finishing order of part one (as per MSA Regulation [Q 5.4.2]) The 

result of the race will be the finishing order of part two. The length of the restarted race will be determined by the 

Clerk of the Course. 


If the leader has completed more than 75% of the race distance or duration it shall not be restarted and the 

Results will be declared in accordance with MSA General Regulations [Q 5.4.3], unless the Clerk of the Course, in 

Consultation with the Stewards, deem it appropriate to restart the race. 


All vehicles reported involved in contact incidents during races or practice must be re-presented to the 

Scrutineers before continuing in the races or practice. 


3.9.1 Pits 

Entrants must ensure that the MSA, Circuit Management and Organising Club Safety Regulations are complied 

with at all times. 





Refuelling may only be carried out in accordance with the MSA Regulation Q13 Regulations, Circuit Management 

Regulations and SR’s or Final Instructions issued for every meeting. 


3.11 Results 

The drivers will be notified of the progress of the race in the following way: 

When there is 5 minutes remaining, drivers will be shown a 5 minute board. The leader and the whole field will 

then be shown a last lap board. On completion of the last lap, the chequered flag will be shown. 




All practice time sheets, grids and race results are deemed to be provisional until all vehicles are released by 

scrutineers after post practice/post race scrutineering and/or after completion of any judicial or technical 

procedures. 

Page 9 of 31














removed. 


In the event of the need for any qualification races, the procedures will be as published in the Final Instructions 

for the events concerned. 


3.14.1 The Safety Car will be brought into operation and run in accordance with Section Q, Appendix 2 of the MSA 

General Regulations. 

Page 10 of 31






4.1.1 Arising from post practice scrutineering or judicial action 

Minimum penalty: As laid down in MSA Regulation [C 3.3] 

4.1.2 Arising from post race scrutineering or judicial action 

Minimum penalty: The provisions of MSA Regulation [C 3.5.1 (a) & (b)]. 

For infringements deemed to be of a more serious nature or a deliberate attempt to gain an advantage the Clerk 

of the Course and/or Stewards of the Meeting are to invoke the provisions of Regulation [C 3.5.1 (c)]. 


The Stewards of the Championship reserve the right to impose further penalties on competitors found to have 

transgressed any technical regulations. 

Penalties imposed by the Stewards of the Championship may include points penalties, race bans or exclusion from 

the championship. 

4.2 Infringements of Non Technical MSA Regulations and the Sporting Regulations Issued for the 


4.2.1 For offences under MSA regulations [C1.1.5], [C1.1.6], [Q14.4.2] and [Q14.5], the Clerk of the Course, at his 




(iii) For an offence in a race where the offending driver is not classified; a grid position penalty in the 

next race/event. 

For a driver who has already received a penalty during the course of a season, any subsequent penalty WILL have 

a championship penalty applied. Where a championship penalty has previously been applied, the severity will be 

increased 

Otherwise as per MSA Judicial Procedure Regulations and the provisions of these championship regulations. 

4.2.2 If a competitor receives a penalty that includes licence points, a ‘3x points multiplier’ championship penalty will 

also be incurred, whereby the number of points will be multiplied by three and that number of championship 

points be deducted from their championship total. 



At any meeting, event, official qualifying or race, where any competitor shall be found guilty of any of the 

following offences, they shall forfeit all points in the championship gained solely at that event to that point during 

the event and shall be ineligible to score any points for the remainder of that event. 


In the case of double header races or multi-races , where an offence below is committed during any qualifying 

session(s) or the first race, then points gained for the qualifying session(s) and the first race will be forfeited. 

Where an offence occurs during any subsequent race then the points solely gained for that race shall be forfeit. 




individually. 

Page 11 of 31





a Reckless or dangerous driving in the course of a meeting - see MSA Regulation [C 1.1.5]. 

4.2.4 Any driver subject to disciplinary measures by the Clerk of the Course or the Stewards of the Meeting in relation 

to his or her driving of a car or his or her behaviour in the paddock at a meeting within this Championship may 

also be subject to additional penalties imposed by the Stewards of the Championship including points penalties, 




season he or she will receive written warning from the Championship Coordinator that his or her 

driving/behaviour is to be specifically observed at future race meetings. Any adverse reports during this period of 

observation could result in official MSA action and will result in a Championship Stewards' enquiry, with possible 

loss of Championship points and refusal of further race entries. 

4.2.6 Any driver deemed by the Stewards of the Championship to have brought the promoter Caterham the 

championship or the sport into disrepute through his or her behaviour or actions, wherever this may be, may be 

subject to disciplinary measures imposed by the Stewards of the Championship including points, penalties, 


4.2.7 Video recording equipment is mandated by the technical regulations for the championship. A competitor must 

ensure that this equipment is recording during races and make the recorded footage available on request by the 

Clerk of the Course or his representatives. Failure to do so may lead to disciplinary measures by the Clerk of the 

Course and may prejudice their defence in the case of an incident. This request is not restricted to the single 

forward facing camera mandated, but any additional video recording equipment utilised on the car. 

Page 12 of 31






The following Technical regulations are set out in accordance with MSA specified format and it should be clearly 

understood that if the following texts do not clearly specify that you can do it, you should work on the principle 

that you cannot. All references to the MSA Yearbook (blue book) relate to the current edition. 

Caterham reserve the right to update parts or part numbers (as part of the ongoing production/development 

process) specified within these regulations, at any time during the life of these regulations, any change/s will be 

communicated to all competitors 10 days before implementation via official Championship Bulletin. In accordance 

with D11.1. 

5.1.1 Scrutineering 

The official MSA Eligibility Scrutineer or his appointed deputy will be attending rounds of the championship and 

he is available to provide advice as well as ensuring that the regulations are strictly enforced to ensure fair play. 

All Caterham Superlight R300 Championship cars must comply with the requirements as laid down in the 

Technical regulations at all times, whether during official practice or racing and it is the Entrant's responsibility to 

ensure all such requirements are met. Any infringement of the Technical Regulations will render the competitor 

liable to penalties as set out in Section 4 of these regulations. 

Technical checks may be carried out before, during and after qualifying and again at the end of the race. The 

Eligibility Scrutineer or his appointed deputy is empowered to undertake any form of technical verification 

procedure that he deems necessary and may order the removal of parts from the car, substitution of standard 

parts, or for the car to be otherwise dismantled in order to carry out inspection. This specifically includes the 

substitution of parts at random and the Scrutineer has the right to swap components from car to car. All costs 

will be borne by the competitor 

Cars may be taken back to Caterham after any race meeting for full technical examination. 

The Eligibility Scrutineer or his appointed deputy reserves the right to check any suspect part directly with a 

standard part as supplied by Caterham. Suspect parts that might need to be removed for checking elsewhere will 

be marked by official MSA approved seals and a certificate of sealing will be handed to the competitor or his 

agent. This certificate will detail the seals and the precautions that need to be taken to keep the seals intact. 

Should the competitor or his agent not be present whilst his car is being dismantled for checking, no dispute over 

his vehicle or its components will be entertained. All costs will be borne by the competitor. 

It is a condition of the championship that any vehicle may be selected for an engine power test by the Eligibility 

Scrutineer or his appointed deputy at any time and its brake horsepower measured over a representative range of 

engine speeds. The organisers cannot be held responsible for mechanical damage to engines and transmissions 

when under test. However such tests will not put the cars through any stresses beyond normal design limitations. 

Although the Coordinator and technical personnel from Caterham are happy to advise competitors on rules and 

regulations, they are not empowered to give any kind of judgement regarding the eligibility of cars. 

Finally, don't forget that although your Scrutineer is happy to speak to you about these regulations, it is extremely 

discourteous to contact him after 10.00pm. 

5.1.2 Parc Fermé 

At all events the showing of the Chequered Flag (for both Qualifying and Racing) will indicate the commencement 

of Parc Fermé Regulations. Any vehicle that is in the pit lane at this time will be under Parc Fermé rules. 

It is prohibited to work on any vehicle after the chequered flag has been shown. This includes tyre pressure 

checking, wheel changes or changes of driver. 

Page 13 of 31




Any vehicle in the pit lane must be immediately taken to the designated Parc Fermé area. No team personnel 

may enter Parc Fermé unless authorised by the Eligibility Scrutineer or their Deputy. 

No tools of any type may be passed by team members or mechanics to drivers whilst in Parc Fermé. 

Competitors are reminded that the area designated as Parc Fermé area is a secure area and it is not permitted for 

any supporters to be in Parc Fermé unless at the behest of the eligibility scrutineer or their deputy. 


The Caterham Superlight R300 Championship is a one make racing Championship for competitors using the 

Caterham Superlight R300 race car. 

It is not permissible to update an existing road car to these unique specifications. 

These regulations include certain optional enhancements and cars may run without these optional modifications 

providing that they conform to the weight limit - if necessary by adding ballast. 


The organisers (in addition to any other powers they may have under these Regulations) reserve the right before 

or after any race in the championship/series to designate any one or more of the competing cars for special 

eligibility scrutineering. Upon such election being made the competitor shall immediately place the car under the 

control of the organisers and be deemed to have permitted all such scrutineering, examination and testing as the 

organisers may responsibly require to undertake. The organisers have the right to: 

a 

b 

C 


Retain the car for detailed examination at premises chosen by the organisers. If the organisers elect to retain the 

car they shall make it available for collection by the competitor at least seven days prior to the qualification 

session for the next race in the championship/series unless the car is found to be in breach of these regulations 

and/or 



specified period and/or remove the car by transporter at no expense to the competitor to an appointed location. 

The competitor will be advised in writing of the time, date and location of the subsequent testing or eligibility 

examination. 



The organisers reserve the right to re-inspect vehicles at any time during the course of the season, should there 

have been a regulation infringement or circuit incident. 


details and with these regulations for each event at which they are entered. Failure to comply in either respect 

will be a breach of these regulations and will be deemed ineligible. Queries concerning eligibility should be 

referred in writing to the series Eligibility Scrutineer at least seven days prior to an event entered, to permit a 

ruling in advance of any meeting at which it is intended to compete. 

Tests to establish the power output of any car’s engine may be carried out by the organisers or their 

representatives. Such power testing will be carried out using Caterham’s nominated facility. 


All cars must conform to the general and competition regulations of the MSA Ltd, which define minimum safety 

Page 14 of 31




requirements for racing purposes. All cars must conform to these regulations before they can be accepted for 

either racing or official practice. You should refer to the current MSA Ltd Yearbook sections Section J5, Section Q 

and Section K. 

5.3.1 A Caterham supplied FIA approved full rollover cage (Caterham part number 30P023A) must be fitted to all cars 

without further modification and must be bolted, not welded in place. 

The cage incorporates a head restraint to MSA Regulation Section [K 13], which must be covered with some form 

of padding. In the event that the head restraint provided by Caterham is incorrectly positioned for the driver, the 

design of the head restraint is free providing that it conforms to MSA Ltd requirements as laid down in MSA 

Regulation Section [K 13]. 

Fitment of Caterham roll cage padding (part number 79136) to the rollcage main rear hoop, roof diagonal or 

curved roof tube and drivers side cant rail is mandatory 

5.3.2 Aluminium tonneau covers must have the rolled edge protected by FIA specification padding Caterham part 

number 79136. It is permissible to fit this by drilling the tonneau cover and attaching padding using tie wraps. 

Padding must extend along the tonneau cover past the drivers shoulder point. This is to comply with MSA 

regulation [Q 19.2.3]. The padding must pass the drivers shoulder level. 

5.3.3 The bolt-in cockpit stiffening wishbone may not be removed or its fastenings loosened. 

5.3.4 A six point full harness safety belt must be fitted complying with MSA regulations. Belts designed to pick up on the 

correct points on the chassis are available from Caterham. The use of arm restraints is mandatory and these are 

also available from Caterham. Competitors are recommended to replace complete belt sets involved in accidents. 

5.3.5 The car must be fitted with 2.25 Litre capacity plumbed in fire extinguisher to MSA Specification [K 3.1.2(b)], [K 

3.1.2(a)]. This system must be capable of being operated from both inside and outside the car, and must include 

nozzles directed into both the engine compartment and the interior. This extinguisher may be relocated from its 

standard position in the passenger foot well to the boot, provided that it is securely bolted in place. The fire 

extinguisher pull of a plumbed in system must be marked by a black 'E' on a red circle. 

Under MSA and FIA regulations, fire extinguishers need to be recertified every two years. If your car is two years 

old this year, it is likely that your extinguisher will require this. 

Caterham recommend sending it to Lifeline Systems in Coventry for servicing and approval. To arrange return, 

please contact Lifeline directly on 02476 712999; address: Burnstall Road, Coventry, CV5 6BU. 

5.3.6 An electrical master switch to MSA Regulation [K 8] capable of isolating the battery and ignition systems must be 

fitted in such a position that it can be operated from both inside and outside the car. The switch and wiring 

provided allows it to be located on the centre of the scuttle. It is not mandatory to use a Caterham supplied 

switch. 

5.3.7 The electrical cut out must be marked by a red 'spark' on a blue triangle. 

5.3.8 The ignition switch 'OFF' position must be marked. 

5.3.9 The battery must be located within the engine bay and its terminals must be protected by non conductive covers. 

The earth lead must be clearly marked in yellow. MSA regulations require that only the battery master switch and 

an electrically operated fire extinguisher may be connected to the battery. 

5.3.10 The rear bulkhead behind the driver and over the petrol tank must be made flameproof to MSA Regulation [Q 

19.1.1]. 

5.3.11 All race cars are provided with a safety fuel cell, the use of which is mandatory. This must be mounted in the 

specified position and the fuel filler vent and screw type cap must comply with MSA Regulation [K 6]. Competitors 

are reminded that safety cells first used in the 2006 Superlight Championship may require re-validation prior to 

Page 15 of 31




use. 

5.3.12 A high intensity rear light to MSA Yearbook [K 5] must be fitted. The Caterham supplied FIA approved LED type 

high intensity rain light (part number 37L048A), supplied as part of the Superlight R300 race car, is mandatory. It 

is not permitted to drill or weld to the roll cage in order to mount the light. 

5.3.13 You should also refer to MSA Regulations [Q 10.1] concerning personal safety equipment, overalls boots and 

crash helmet. The wearing of balaclavas and flameproof gloves are mandatory in BRSCC championships. The 

wearing of open faced helmets in this championship is prohibited. 

Use of an FIA approved HANS Device is only permitted if the device, competitor’s helmet, 6 point harness and car 

have all been presented simultaneously to Arch Motor & Manufacturing Ltd, Caterham’s approved HANS device 

fitters, to allow any necessary chassis modifications to the upper seat belt anchorages to be made. Competitors 

should note that chassis modification will be refused unless supporting paperwork is supplied to specify the 

correct locations of the upper seat belt anchorages. Furthermore modifications will be refused unless the helmet 

presented is specifically manufactured to be used in conjunction with a HANS device. A charge will be made to 

modify the chassis and proof of modification will be issued by Arch Motor & Manufacturing Ltd. Competitors may 

be asked to prove FIA compliance of their HANS device and to present their proof of modification paperwork at 

scrutineering. 

5.3.14 All chassis are manufactured with towing eyes front and rear and these should be clearly marked with an arrow in 

a contrasting colour. 

5.3.15 All chassis are manufactured with aluminium honeycomb side impact protection which must not be removed. 

5.3.16 Race cars supplied with a 30L FIA fuel cell are also fitted with a honeycomb ‘boot floor’ panel above the tank. This 

panel may be removed, although its use is recommended. It is not possible to fit the panel in a car fitted with a 

55L FIA fuel cell. 

5.3.17 The dry sump oil tank breather must vent into a transparent catch tank which complies with MSA Regulations [Q 

19.9.2] and [Q 19.9.3]. 


5.4.1 This is a one make formula and all cars are to be in identical specification with the exception of the adjustments 

permitted by these regulations. 

5.4.2 No standard components can be modified, substituted, relocated or changed in any way except those specified 

herein. 

In recent years Caterham’s part numbering system has been revised. New part numbers now consist of seven 

digits. The last digit of this seven digit number is a suffix which will be ‘A’ for any new part. If there is a minor 

change to the part such that it is completely interchangeable with the outgoing part and supercedes it completely 

(for example, a change of supplier or material), the part number suffix will be changed to ‘B’ and so on. As a 

change may occur during the racing season, such a part may be used to replace a part identified with an earlier 

suffix (only) within these regulations. 

5.4.3 If in the light of experience, when safety related changes to these regulations are necessary, competitors will be 

given at least 10 days notice to effect modifications. 

5.4.4 All vehicles must comply with MSA General Technical Regulations contained within Sections Section J & Section Q 

of the current MSA Yearbook. 

5.4.5 It is mandatory that any space between the drivers seat back and the seat back bulkhead is filled with twin pack 

seat foam 

5.5 Chassis (See Chassis And Bodywork) 

Page 16 of 31




5.6 Chassis/Bodywork 

5.6.1 All R300 cars eligible for this Championship must use the specifically designed and manufactured bespoke chassis 

part numbers 3AP130x – where x indicates a chassis suffix of A, B, C, D, or E and so on, or its left hand drive 

equivalent. Cars must race with a wind deflector, simplified dashboard, cycle wings and a high intensity rear light. 

All vehicles must have a section of aluminium sideskin removed from the lower section to expose the chassis 

member on both sides to allow for ride height to be measured. This must be at the front most section, where the 

chassis rails meet the chassis crossmember. This must measure 30mm x 30mm. 

5.6.2 All cars must use Perspex wind deflector (part number 53330L or 53330R) 


General 

5.6.4 All chassis repairs must be carried out by Arch Motor & Manufacturing Ltd or Caterham (Westbury, Dartford or 

Midlands), except temporary repairs undertaken at an event, where it is permissible to add or remove material 

from the chassis if the car has been involved in a practise, qualifying, or race accident, to allow the competitor to 

continue to the end of the meeting. Any such repairs must be sanctioned by the series scrutineer or his appointed 

deputy. All such repairs must then be checked by Arch Motor & Manufacturing Ltd or Caterham before the car 

competes at another weekend. Any bolt-on part repaired at a meeting must be replaced by an undamaged part 

before the car competes in the next event. 

The replacement or reinstallation of rivets/rivnuts into existing panels or the pushing/beating out of panels are 

exempted from this clause. For clarity, any repairs that require welding must be conducted by Caterham or Arch 

Motor and Manufacturing Ltd. If in doubt, contact the Series Scrutineer. 

5.6.5 Fitment of Caterham lowered drivers floor pan (part numbers 30P044B or 30P228A, or for left hand drive 

30P229A) is permitted using steel rivets vertically and aluminium rivets horizontally but cockpit floor bracing 

tubes must be retained. Painting or powder coating of the lowered floor is permitted, but rivets must not be 

painted so they can be inspected. 

It may be necessary to trim or cut away small sections of material from the pedal box to allow full clearance for 

pedals when adjusted to a driver’s preference. This is acceptable, though adding any additional or replacement 

material is not. 

Interior 

5.6.6 The driving seat is free but it is important to note that the driver's helmeted head must be at least 5cm below the 

top of the rollover bar when normally seated. 

Any apertures in the seat through which the harness shoulder straps, lap straps or crotch straps pass should be 

protected with rubber piping to prevent chaffing of the belt (this is standard fitment on the Caterham race seat 

supplied with the car and must not be removed. Competitors are reminded to periodically check the piping is in 

place and secure, as regular wear and tear can cause it to become detached.) 

It is permissible to modify the seatbelt/harness apertures to ensure that there is no contact between the straps 

and the seat when the driver is seated and secured in the car. 

5.6.7 It is permitted to cut slots into the seat back aluminium panel to allow the shoulder straps of the seat belts to be 

fitted underneath the harness tube rather than above. 

5.6.8 It is permitted to fit reflective heat insulation in the engine bay to the driver’s foot box and tunnel, and a 

Caterham supplied air duct between the bonnet vent and an appropriate hole cut into the footbox. 

Exterior 

5.6.9 The positioning and size of the exterior mirrors is free provided they conform to MSA requirements fitted. 

Page 17 of 31




5.6.10 Use of rear wing piping is not mandatory. 

5.6.11 Plastic screws (part number BM5x25) may be used in place of the standard steel screws supplied to retain the 

rear wings. 

5.6.12 Caterham stainless steel and carbon fibre wing protectors may not be fitted to the rear wings. 

5.6.13 All cars are equipped with aluminium boot and cockpit covers. Use of these covers is mandatory. 

5.6.14 The short undertray is not permitted, even though this part (part number 70113) is available from Caterham. 

No other undertrays are permitted. 


General 

5.6.15 The standard Caterham supplied chassis must be used unmodified in any way and strengthening or stiffening by 

whatever means is expressly forbidden, other than those specified in 5.6.1 to 5.6.14. Only the honeycomb panels 

permitted in these regulations may be fitted. These should not be bonded into place, but can be riveted to the 

aluminium floor, not the chassis rails. 

Tape may be used as a temporary measure to secure damaged wings and nose cones at events, but competitors 

are expected to present their cars at scrutineering at the next event properly repaired. 

Interior 

5.6.16 Do not attempt to add any extra stiffness to the chassis frame. The Eligibility Scrutineer or his deputy reserves the 

right to select cars to be returned to the Caterham Dartford to have torsional stiffness measured. Should there be 

any deviation from accepted production tolerances the assumption will be made that modifications have been 

made and that chassis will not be permitted to race again, notwithstanding the application of any penalties. 

5.6.17 It is permitted to fit the 76817 forward honeycomb panel over the top of the lowered floor to raise the driver’s 

feet. 

5.6.18 Fitment of passenger side aluminium honeycomb floor panels is prohibited. 

5.6.19 Fitment of a carbon fibre dashboard is prohibited. 

Exterior 

5.6.20 It is not permitted to drill any holes into or to modify the outer skin or inner panelling of the car except where 

specified in these regulations (specifically section 5.6) and the general assembly guide. 

5.6.21 The rear wings and nosecone must remain in GRP as standard and be original Caterham supplied parts. Cycle 

wings may either remain in GRP as standard and be original Caterham supplied parts, or the Caterham part 

number 30P317A ABS plastic wings. The substitution of aluminium or carbon fibre items even though available 

from Caterham is not permitted. 

5.6.22 It is mandatory to fit locking bonnet catches part number 30Z1079A in place of the standard over-centre items on 

the rear bonnet fixing. This ensures the integrity of the seal between the airbox and the bonnet intake hole. 

5.6.22 Fitment of carbon fibre rear wings protectors is prohibited. 

Silhouette 

5.6.23 No modifications are permitted. In particular the front wing location must be bonded or bolted as designed by 

Caterham. The leading edge of the wing to the forward-most edge of the wingstay must be no more than 80mm. 

The wingstay must not be modified in any way, such as bending the legs or mounting in a non-standard way that 

would lead to the wing being out of its factory standard position. A wingstay that has been lightly damaged in an 

accident may require replacement (at the Scrutineer’s discretion) if it affects the position in which the wing sits in 

relation to the wheel. 

Page 18 of 31




Ground Clearance 

5.6.24 Ride height may be adjusted subject to a minimum ground clearance measured from the lowest point on the 

chassis excluding bolts, screws, nuts and rivet heads with the driver normally seated in the car. 

5.7 Engines 

The minimum ground clearance for both classes at all times is 120mm 

Ground clearance will be measured between the ground and the exposed section of chassis tube as identified in 

5.6.1. (ignoring any weld etc). 

All vehicles that arrive in Parc Fermé after either qualifying or race with flat tyre/s may be excluded for 

contravention of the above regulation. 

In the event of a puncture on arrival at Parc Fermé, it will be permissible for an alternative wheel and tyre to be 

fitted, inflated to 24psi, to ensure a valid ride height check; excepting when the puncture has been signalled to 

the driver by way of the ‘Mechanical failure’ flag (black with an orange disc) during the session. 

5.7.1 Only 175bhp 2.0 litre Caterham Motorsport R300 specification engines, built by Caterham are eligible. 

For 2011, a plastic plenum chamber (part number 30E283A) and cold air intake system was introduced to replace 

the original aluminium plenum chamber and under bonnet air filter. Use of this 2011 update is mandatory. 

It is permitted to fit a diamond washer to the camshaft pulley bolts to prevent pulley slippage. Fitting must be 

carried out by Caterham. Please note that It is not suitable for this operation to be conducted at a circuit. 

It is mandatory for the ECU to be programmed with the latest race tune as advised by and provided by Caterham. 

It is permitted to fit valve spring 30E365A as replacement for 38E051A or 38E051B. Fitting must be carried out by 

Caterham. Please note that it is not suitable for this operation to be conducted at a circuit. 

5.7.2 In the event of an engine failure or wear, the engine must be returned to Caterham to be replaced or rebuilt and 

resealed; It is the competitor’s responsibility to return his engine, fully kitted, to Caterham and to pay the cost of 

the replacement or rebuild. Spare race engines will be available for purchase from Caterham. 


5.7.4 It is permitted to fit the external oil pipes with dry break connections to ease the removal and replacement of the 

engine and oil system components. Care should be taken to specify connections which do not restrict the oil flow 

within the system whatsoever. 

No other modifications are permitted. 

Prohibited Modifications 

5.7.4 No modification to the Caterham Motorsport R300 engine other than those specified in these regulations are 

permitted. All engines must conform to the specification held by the championship Scrutineer and Caterham. 

5.7.5 It is strictly forbidden for a competitor to modify, remove or substitute any component or part of the engine or 

any of its ancillaries, nor should the MSA seals be removed or tampered with. Should these seals be damaged or 

removed for whatever reason except under the direction of the MSA scrutineer or Caterham the car should not 

be raced or practised until the MSA scrutineer or Caterham has inspected the engine and refitted the correct 

seals. 

The scrutineer or his appointed deputy may require that the engine be removed and taken to Caterham to be 

power tested at the appointed test facility, the costs of which will be borne by the competitor. If considered 

necessary, the engine will be dismantled for inspection and the cost of this, and subsequent rebuild, will be borne 

Page 19 of 31




by the competitor. All instances of broken seals are logged and reported to the championship organiser. Suspect 

engines are most likely to be subjected to strip and inspection at the competitor’s costs. 

5.7.6 The throttle potentiometer and its fixings must remain standard and in the original position. It is prohibited for 

competitors to make any modifications to the oil pressure relief mechanism. 

5.7.7 Fitment of updated components that require seals to be broken must be carried out by Caterham or in the 

presence of the series Scrutineer or an appropriate Caterham representative appointed by him, who will refit the 

appropriate seals before engines are returned to competitors. 

5.7.8 Location 

5.7.9 On no account must the engine be relocated within the chassis and only the standard Caterham engine mounting 

brackets and rubbers are permitted. 


Use of combined radiator / oil cooler part numbers 30C064A or 30C064B or separable combined radiator / oil 

cooler part number 30C064C is mandatory. 

It is permissible to modify the 30C064A and 30C064B combined radiator / oil coolers to separate the two 

components. 

5.7.11 It is mandatory to use the standard ‘82 deg’ thermostat 

5.7.12 Fitment of the oil cooler air intake deflector strip (or ‘gurney’) part number 30P244A is mandatory. 

5.7.13 The fitment of Caterham stone guard part number 77778 between the radiator and the grille is mandatory. 

5.7.14 When the oil temperature is undesirably low it is permitted to reduce airflow to the oil cooler portion of the 

radiator, by means of tape on the nosecone oil cooler aperture. It should be noted that the temperature reading 

for oil on the R300 is taken at its coolest point. Use of the Caterham supplied silicon cooling hoses is permitted. 

It is permitted to use braided hose to connect the oil cooler 

Induction System 

5.7.15 A throttle pedal stop must be used and whilst the design of this is free, Caterham part numbers 74128, 30P048A 

and 30P253A are available but not mandatory. 

It is permitted to use alternative fixings for the two sections of the airbox, provided that the airboxes themselves 

are not altered in any way. 

5.7.16 No other modifications are permitted. 

Exhaust System 

5.7.17 Use of the catalyst/collector part number CSP899B or 30X069A is mandatory. Competitors should consider the 

catalyst as a “lifed” part which should be regularly inspected and replaced as required. 

The lambda sensor must not be fitted. The hole for the lambda sensor should be fitted with a blanking plug, part 

number CSP741. 

Use of the silencer part number CSP907 is mandatory. 

5.7.18 The cat/collector guard part number 70262 or 70262B must be fitted. 

5.7.19 Wrapping of any part of the exhaust system, or any form of spray or paint-on coating that adheres to the pipes is 

prohibited. Any other external or internal modifications by means of application of additional material or by a 

manufacturing / coating process are prohibited. 

Page 20 of 31




Ignition System 

5.7.20 The Caterham developed management system is mandatory 

5.7.21 Only Ford TR6AP13 (5M5G-12405-AA) spark plugs are permitted. 

5.7.22 The ECUs are security protected and must not be removed, tampered with / or substituted except by the 

eligibility scrutineer or designated persons. No other modifications are permitted. 

The ECUs may be sealed at the first event a vehicle competes at. A history can be downloaded by the eligibility 

scrutineer or the engine builder either at the circuit or at the engine builder’s premises, where the seal will be 

broken and replaced at the time of the download 


5.7.24 The Caterham developed management system is mandatory 

5.7.25 The fuel pump may be moved from its standard location. The standard item as supplied by Caterham must be 

used. Competitors should note that the performance of the fuel pump will be impaired if it is allow to run without 

fuel available to pump. To ensure reliable operation it is recommended that the pump be replaced at least once 

per season. 

5.7.26 Use of the standard non-adjustable fuel pressure regulator is mandatory. With the engine at the correct 

operating temperature, and the engine idling, the fuel pressure in the fuel rail shall be 4.3 +/- 0.15 bar. Cars 

found to have fuel pressure outside these limits will be considered illegal. 

5.7.27 The fuel tank vent must be installed so that fuel cannot spill from it. 

5.7.28 It is permitted to fit FIA approved dry break connections to the fuel lines to ease removal/replacement of the 

engine. 

5.7.29 No other modifications are permitted. 


5.8.1 The front "widetrack" suspension is comprised of double unequal length wishbones; lower wishbone part 

numbers 34F013A (left) and 34F014A (right), upper wishbone numbers 34F011A (left) and 34F012A (right); an 

anti-roll bar and features Bilstein competition dampers and coil springs. The De Dion rear suspension is located by 

a lower A-frame and outboard longitudinal Watts linkages. 

5.8.2 All cars must use front dampers (part number 74504), rear dampers (part number 74505) and rear tender springs 

(part number 74541). 

5.8.3 Front dampers must be fitted with the main body fixed to the chassis (upside down). Rear dampers must be fitted 

with the main body fixed to the De Dion tube (right way up). 

5.8.4 No modifications to the suspension supplied will be allowed and all pick up points must remain unchanged from 

standard. 

5.8.5 De Dion tubes should be changed as a matter of course following an accident. Furthermore it is recommended 

that tubes are regularly inspected for damage. Failure to tighten damper securing bolts to the threaded bushes 

may result in the bush being torn out of the tube. 

Modifications Permitted 

5.8.6 Ride height may be adjusted using the damper spring seats subject to the minimum ride height requirements 

detailed in section 5.6.24 

5.8.7 It is permissible to adjust front camber to a maximum of 3º (negative) and castor angles by means of the 

adjustable length top wishbone provided and by shimming the lower wishbone with washers. 

Page 21 of 31




It is permitted to substitute the standard lower wishbone front mounting bolt with a longer bolt of a similar 

specification. 

5.8.8 No modification can be made to the De Dion tube except that shims may be inserted to adjust camber to a 

maximum of 3º (negative) and toe angles as required. 

5.8.9 Only the 250lb front spring part number 77843 and 250lb rear spring part number 74551, along with the rear 

tender spring part number 74541, are permitted, mounted in the same position as standard. 

Only one spring may be fitted to each front damper. Rear dampers must be fitted with both the mandatory 

tender spring and a linear rate primary spring. 

It is permitted to substitute cap head bolts to secure the front spring / damper assembly to the chassis. 

5.8.10 Packing washers between the bumpstop and the damper body or cap, are not permitted. 

5.8.11 The following Caterham supplied front anti roll bars are permitted: 

Diameter Colour Code Part Number 

18 mm Green 75556 

⅝" Red 75561 or 30F034A 

9 / 16 " Blue 75559 or 30F033A 

½ " Orange 75552 or 30F032A 

5.8.12 The front anti roll bar may be removed but if fitted must be properly connected. 

5.8.13 Only a ½" diameter Caterham supplied rear anti roll bar is permitted. 

5.8.14 It is permitted to remove or disconnect the rear anti-roll bar. 

5.8.15 It is permitted to fit the plastic packing shim part number ZZ021463 between the A frame bushes and the chassis 

mounting points. It is not permissible to fit metal washers with the exception of those supplied with the original 

kit. 


5.8.16 No other modifications whatsoever are permitted to the car's suspension and suspension components must not 

be modified in any way nor may suspension pick up points be changed. 

5.8.17 It is specifically prohibited to cut down the damper bump stops. 

The rear tender spring (part number 74541) must be fitted at all times on all cars 

5.8.18 It is permissible to use the plastic packing shim part number ZZ021463 between all suspension bushes and 

mounting points, it is not permitted to fit metal washers 

It is permissible to replace the rear-most mounting bolt of the Watt’s link for a longer bolt of similar specification, 

enabling a nyloc nut to be fitted to the end of the bolt protruding from the chassis bush, preventing the bolt from 

loosening in use. 

Wheelbase and Track 

5.8.19 Wheelbase: 2225 mm 

Front Track: 

1336 mm 

Rear Track: 

1346 mm 

Overall Length: 

3100 mm 

Overall Width: 

1575 mm 

A tolerance of plus or minus 5mm is permitted to account for dimension changes caused by permitted suspension 

adjustment. 

Page 22 of 31





5.9.1 Use of the Caterham race six-speed H-pattern manual gearbox, part number 0300F0003A is mandatory. 

It is permitted to substitute the race specification bias (or ‘gate’) spring with a road specification spring or 

shimmed road specification spring, to reduce the effort required to move the lever across the gate. 

Gearboxes may be sealed by scrutineer or his deputy and the seal number recorded. Sealed gearboxes may only 

be returned to an authorised gearbox builder for rebuild. Gearboxes should remain unmarked as supplied from 

the factory. It is not permitted to add any identifying marks or features, so as to potentially identify the gearbox 

to the rebuilder. 

Clutch centre plate part numbers 58136 (AP Racing identification number 5352-5) and 35Q007A (AP Racing 

identification number 5352-14) are permissible, though 35Q007A is recommended and is fitted as standard to all 

cars from 2011 onwards. 

Clutch cover/pressure plate part numbers 58135 (AP Racing identification number 5905-1) and the uprated part, 

58136COVER (AP Racing identification number 5905-500) are permissible. The 58136COVER is fitted as standard 

to all cars from 2011 onwards. 

Use of the Caterham specification 3.62:1 ratio Titan limited slip differential is mandatory. Ramp angles must 

remain in the standard 30/90 configuration, as supplied by Caterham/Titan. The maximum permissible pre-load is 

50lbft. Only the factory standard specification Caterham friction discs and clutch discs may be used. 

Differentials may be sealed by scrutineer or his deputy and the seal number recorded. Sealed differentials may 

only be returned to Caterham for rebuild. Differentials should remain unmarked as supplied from the factory. It 

is not permitted to add any identifying marks or features, so as to potentially identify the differential to the 

rebuilder. 

Modifications Permitted 

5.9.2 A dry-break connection may be fitted to the clutch system to assist with the ease of removal of the engine. 

5.9.3 Use of either the standard ratio clutch pedal or the high ratio clutch pedal is permitted. 

5.9.4 A clutch stop may be fitted and the design is free. Caterham supply a suitable part under part number 74129. 

5.9.5 The standard gearlever supplied with the six-speed transmission must be used. 

5.9.6 The design and make of the gear knob is free. 

5.9.7 It will be permitted to fit any further upgraded parts during the season if introduced by Caterham. 


5.9.8 Mis-assembly of standard parts is prohibited. 

5.9.9 It is prohibited to modify the propshaft. No other modifications are permitted. 

5.9.10 Transmission And Drive Ratios 

First 2.69 

Second 2.01 

Third 1.59 

Fourth 1.32 

Fifth 1.13 

Sixth 1.00 : 1 


5.10.1 Only looms with the following part numbers (and for the listed car) are permitted: 

Page 23 of 31




5.10.2 Chassis loom 

Engine loom 

Injector sub loom 

Coil sub loom 

TPS sub loom 

Subloom for standard instrumentation 

Subloom for Stack instrumentation 

Part number: 37L049A 


Part number: 3AL074A 

Part number: 3AL080A 




5.10.3 Competitors are advised to change the engine loom at least once per season to ensure electrical reliability. It is 

permissible to use spiral wrap to protect the wiring loom 

5.10.4 The standard instrumentation may be replaced by a Stack triangular integrated display unit. 

A Stack supplied loom may be used to connect the triangular integrated display unit to the vehicle. 

For vehicles fitted with a Stack display unit, the use of a CAN ECU interface is permitted. The functionality for this 

is contained within the dash and is accessed via a PIN code provided with the ST8996 adapter lead required to 

make the connection. The CAN ECU interface enables recording in the data-logger of real-time data from the 

ECU, showing the actual output to the engine’s systems. 

Only Stack data logging and for integrated video logging, only Stack systems are permitted. 

It is recognised that there are many ‘standalone’ sport video systems that are capable of logging speed, g-forces 

and other data. These are permitted providing that they are completely independent from the car (with the 

exception of a power feed) and do not record any information directly from it. 

All Competitors running Stack data/video logging systems must supply the Championship Scrutineer with the 

authorisation code and PIN number to allow the logging system to be read. 

It is permitted to fit a simple countdown timer or stopwatch to the dash or steering wheel centre to provide an 

indication of session duration. This must be manually operated and not capable of any form of data logging 

A shift-light or sequential shift-light system may be used and choice of system and manufacturer is free. 

Caterham recommend the use of the ACES programmable sequential shift lights, available under part number 

ACES01. 

An ATL fuel gauge and associated wiring may be fitted to provide an indication of fuel level only. 

It is mandatory to have video recording equipment fitted and operating during qualifying and racing. This must 

consist of at least one forward facing camera providing a reasonable view of circuit ahead such as would be 

expected to provide a representative ‘driver’s eye’ view. Location of the camera to provide this is free. The 

choice of system is free, provided that playback is possible at the circuit by regular means, such as via a laptop PC, 

or by using equipment designed for the purpose provided by the competitor. 

5.10.5 All power feeds to the vehicle and engine looms must be connected via the battery master switch with the 

exception of an electrically operated fire extinguisher system. 

5.10.6 Rear High Intensity Light 

Fitment of a rear high intensity light is mandatory. It is permitted to fit an LED light to the roll cage provided it 

conforms to MSA regulations. The Caterham supplied FIA approved LED type high intensity rain light (part 

number 37L048A), supplied as part of the Superlight R300 race car, is mandatory. It is not permitted to drill or 

weld to the roll cage in order to mount the light. 

5.10.7 Brake Lights 

In accordance with MSA Regulation [Q 19.11.3] all race vehicles must now be fitted with brake lights. A Superlight 

race brake light kit, part number 30L170AK or 30L170AP, is the only acceptable brake light system and its fitment 

Page 24 of 31




and use is mandatory. 

5.10.8 Battery 

The battery position and battery itself are free provided it is securely located within the engine compartment and 

is sufficiently powerful to start the engine unassisted. 

It is permitted to fit an Anderson type connector and associated cabling for ease of charging the battery. 

5.10.9 Alternator 

The standard alternator must remain fixed, unmodified standard and working. 

5.10.10 Starter Motor 

The standard starter motor (part number PR6783) must be used. 

5.11 Brakes 

The braking system consists of discs at all four wheels and incorporates split hydraulic circuits for safety. The car 

as supplied includes an adjustable brake pressure limiting valve so that balance can be adjusted to the driver's 

preference. A race type reservoir cap must be fitted to the master cylinder. 


Brake friction materials are free. 

5.11.2 Fitment of race specification brake master cylinder (part number 77176) is mandatory. 

5.11.3 Use of either the standard brake pedal or the high ratio brake pedal is permitted. 

5.11.4 The R300 car comes as standard with the uprated front brake system, consisting of 10” vented discs, with 

Caterham AP Racing 4 pot callipers. The rear brake system is of the standard road type, with 9” solid discs and a 

single piston floating calliper. This complete system must remain as standard and not be modified in any way, 

unless specifically stated in these regulations. 

5.11.5 It is permitted to replace the standard rear brakes with the Caterham uprated rear race brake package MB09K. 

5.11.6 A single brake limiting valve can be fitted to the rear circuit. The make and design of the valve is free. It is 

permitted to fit the brake limiting valve using braided hose 


5.11.7 Fitment of more than one brake limiting valve is prohibited. 

5.11.8 Fitment of the limiting valve in the front brake system is prohibited 

5.12 Wheels and Steering 

5.12.1 Front 77296 (6" x 13") 

Rear 77298 (8” x 13") 

The wheels are supplied with a plastic centre cap and badge as standard. These must be removed for races. 

5.12.2 Permitted Options 

The following steering rack assembles are permitted: 

Standard width standard speed rack 

Part Number75615A* 

Widetrack standard speed race 

Part Number 75608A 

Standard width quick (22%) rack Part Number 75605A* 

Widetrack quick (22%) rack 

Part Number 75604A 

*Must be used in conjunction with rack extensions Part Number 74081 

Page 25 of 31




The steering wheel is free, however the steering wheel must comply with J5.7 

It is permitted to fit a spacer between the wheel and the boss. 

It is permitted to fit Caterham quick release upper steering column (part number 75030A) 

It is permitted to raise the height of the steering rack by using one or more spacer shims, part number 75607. 

It is permitted to fit the reversible 30S018A steering rack clamp, introduced into Caterham standard production at 

the end of 2009 (replacing the existing clamp). This rack clamp provides either standard height, or 9mm of lift 

under the rack, depending on which way up it is fitted. 


The standard steering mechanism must be used without modification other than those detailed in 5.12.2 

5.12.4 Construction And Materials 

No changes are permitted except as specified in these regulations. 

5.12.5 Dimensions 

All dimensions must remain within manufacturer's specification, except where permitted within these 

regulations. See section 5.8.18 

5.13 TYRES 

5.13.1 Specification 

Cars must run on uniquely serial numbered Avon CR500 treaded tyres of the following sizes and specification: 



5.13.2 Competitors are limited to twelve tyres for the year, excepting those declared as the nominated ‘wet’ sets 

defined below. 

Once the twelve tyre limit has been reached, a competitor can request permission from the Clerk of the Course to 

use additional tyres. Every time a new tyre(s) in excess of the allowed twelve is/are nominated, the competitor 

will be subject to at least a ten place grid penalty in every race in which the newly nominated tyre(s) is/are used. 

Competitors, or a representative on their behalf, must nominate tyres to be used at least 60 minutes before they 

are used on an official track session, by means of a self-declaration form (provided) to the eligibility scrutineer or 

his deputy. It is the competitor’s responsibility to ensure that the eligibility scrutineer or his deputy receives this 

information. Tyres need only be nominated once and this information will be held by the scrutineer, which 

means that some or all twelve tyres may be nominated at the very start of the season. 

Wet tyres do not need to be nominated. However, if the ‘wet’ set is used in a session defined by the timekeepers 

as “Dry” on the official results (unless over-ruled by the Clerk of the Course either before or after the session), the 

set will be counted as part of the annual allocation of twelve. Should this result in a competitor exceeding the 

twelve tyre limit, a time penalty will be added to the competitor’s race time. 

At the eligibility scrutineer’s discretion, a damaged tyre may be replaced with an alternative tyre, both physically 

and on the tyre allocation record, if the damaged tyre has more than 3mm of tread remaining across the face of 

the tyre (defined as the area inside notional circumferential lines at the inner edge of the outer wear indicators) 

around ~80% of its circumference. Note: The device used to measure tread depth for compliance purposed will 

be a Sealey VS0563 calibrated tread depth gauge. 

Where a single tyre is replaced in any one pit stop during the course of a session due to a puncture or other 

malady, permission may be sought retrospectively in Parc Ferme for this to be changed on the tyre allocation 

Page 26 of 31




record if it meets the tread depth criteria. 

The eligibility scrutineer may, in exceptional circumstances (eg, clear non-fault accident damage in his opinion) 

allow leeway on this tread depth. 

Any tyre changed during the course of a qualifying or race session, for whatever reason, must be provided directly 

to the series scrutineer or his deputy for inspection and identification, immediately after it has been changed. 

5.13.3 Use of tyre pressure limiting valves is prohibited. 

5.13 4 Use of tyre heating and heat retention devices is prohibited. 

5.13 5 Use of tyre treatment compounds is prohibited. 

5.13.6 Tyre buffing, shaving or any other method of removal of tread depth equally (ie, not cambered) across the face of 

the tyre, is permitted. 

It is permitted to use a hot air gun and/or scraper to remove tyre pick up and feathering. 

5.13.7 Use of any gas other than air to inflate tyres is prohibited. 

The eligibility scrutineer reserves the right to request a tyre or tyres to be deflated and then inflated with a foot 

pump in the assembly area prior to qualifying or a race. Where a car is considered to have team support, it will be 

the team’s responsibility to carry this out under supervision. For independent drivers, a member of Caterham 

personnel will undertake this task. 

5.13 8 Nominated Manufacturer 

Cooper Tire & Rubber Company Europe Limited 


5.14.1 Competitors are recommended to weigh their cars and add sufficient ballast to allow for loss of bodywork during 

racing and / or variations in readings given by the weighbridges at individual circuits. Remember that it is the 

reading recorded by the circuit weighbridge on race day which counts. 

5.14.2 The minimum weight limit including driver (including helmet, suit, gloves & overall) is: 630kg. 

Drivers lighter than 90 kgs may need to add ballast. 

5.14.3 Ballast must be securely bolted to the cockpit floor of the left hand side of the car in accordance with the 

instructions laid out in the MSA Yearbook (blue book) section J5.15. Caterham can supply a suitable fixing kit 

under part number LEAD2. Additional holes may be drilled to achieve this. 

5.14.4 Substitution of alternative, non standard, lightweight fasteners is specially prohibited. 

5.15 Fuel Tank and Fuel 

5.15.1 Type of Fuel Tank 

The standard safety fuel cell (part number 73014) fitted in box (part number 73015) must be retained unless it is 

replaced by 55 litre tank (part number 73014/55) fitted in box (part number 73015/55) and must be fitted with a 

screw type cap. Please note that the fuel cell has a life expectancy of 5 years and must be replaced or returned to 

the manufacturer (ATL) for revalidation after this period if it is to be used in overseas events. 


The tank must be located in its standard position at the rear of the car. 

5.15.3 Fuel 

All cars must run on pump fuel as defined by the MSA. 

Page 27 of 31




5.15.4 A dry-break connection to comply with MSA yearbook regulation [J 5.13] is mandatory. It is the competitor’s 

responsibility to ensure that a suitable sampling take-off hose, as defined in the regulation, is available. Suitable 

parts are available from Caterham. 

To facilitate sampling and draining of the fuel tank of cars fitted with a dry-break connection, it is permitted to 

add wiring and a switch to enable the fuel pump to be operated without the ignition system switched on. When 

using the fuel pump to drain the tank, fuel must only be drained via the dry-break connection. 

If the car is not equipped with a dry-break connection complying with MSA yearbook regulation [J 5.13], no 

additional wiring or switches are allowed to facilitate the removal of fuel from the fuel tank, All competitors must 

use a proprietary external fuel pump for this purpose. The only exception to this is where a fuel sample is 

required by the eligibility scrutineer or their deputy it is permissible to disconnect the fuel line from the fuel rail 

and supply the sample by means of the vehicles own fuel pump. 


Use of a Caterham Silencer, as specified in 5.7.17, is mandatory. Performance of this silencer will degrade with 

use and accident damage. It is the competitor’s responsibility to ensure that their car always complies with the 

noise limits which are strictly enforced at many circuits. 


5.17.1 Positioning of Decals 

Competition numbers must be positioned so as to be clearly visible from above and from the side, as per MSA 

regulations [J 4.1]. 

Decals must be positioned in accordance with the Championship decal plan as detailed in the appendices. 

5.17.2 Supply of Decals 

Championship decals are available from Caterham though competitors must provide their own racing numbers. 

BRSCC shields are obtainable directly from the BRSCC, one of which must be displayed on each side of the car at 

all times. 

Page 28 of 31




6. APPENDICES 


BRSCC H.Q. 




Borough Green 

Kent 

TN15 8JL 

Tel: 01732 780100 

Fax: 01732 885783 

www.brscc.co.uk 



(Factory) 


(Midlands) 


(Westbury – chassis repair 

centre) 

Motor Sports Association Ltd 

James Gibson 

Brett Glover 

Linda Humphries 


Kennet Road 

Dartford, Kent DA1 4QN 

Tel: 01322 625800 

Email: jamesg@caterham.co.uk 


The Knoll, Leicester Road, Earl Shilton, 

Leicester, LE9 7TJ 

Phone; 01455 841616 

Mobile: 07966 221817 

Email: brettg@caterham.co.uk 

web; www.caterham.co.uk 


Unit 1A, Brook Lane Ind Est, 

Westbury, Wilts, BA13 4EP 

Tel: 01373 858585 

Email : lindah@caterham.co.uk 

Motor Sports House 

Riverside Park, Colnbrook 

Slough SL3 9HG 

Tel: 01753 765000 

Scrutineer Ian Millar 11 The Square, Penicuik 

EH26 8LH 

Tel: 01968 678752 Mobile: 07525 417184 

Email: scrutineer@caterham.co.uk 

Cooper Avon Tyres James Weekly Bath Road 

Melksham 

Wilts SN12 8AA 

Tel: 01225 357874 

Fax 01225 707443 

Page 29 of 31




BookaTrack.com Jonny Leroux 50 Deykin Road 

Lichfield 

Staffs WS13 6PS 

Tel: 0843 208 4635 

Email : info@bookatrack.com 

Demon Tweeks Dave Kimberley 75 Ash Road South 

Wrexham Industrial Estate 

North Wales 

LL13 9UG 

01978 663027 

6.2 COMMERCIAL UNDERTAKINGS 




The presentation of the car is fundamental to the profile of the championship/series its sponsors and its 

audience. Therefore in considering whether to permit any car to race, at any point during the season, the 

organisers will regard as paramount the presentation of the car. In taking into account its appearance inherent 

in which is the standard of its presentation (including interior) they may exclude any car which they consider 

may prejudice the reputation of the championship/series or is otherwise unacceptable. 

This will include where the car is presented at a race event bearing accident damage sustained at a previous 

event and which has not been subject to the completion of a full and proper repair. Note: A double header can 

be regarded as one event for the purposes of this regulation. 

In addition to presentation of the car, the way that competitors and teams present themselves in the paddock is 

a reflection upon Caterham Motorsport. Therefore, competitors and teams are reminded to abide by the 

paddock plan issued within the final instructions, wherever possible. Private cars, trailers and working vehicles 

should be parked out of view allowing for the presentation of only Caterham race cars at the leading edge of the 

paddock area. Race cars should preferably be parked ‘nose-out’ and at ninety degrees to the paddock edge. 

Where conditions allow, teams should arrange their awnings so that they are grouped together in a ‘team 

village’. Failure to cooperate in this fundamental piece of housekeeping may result in a competitor or team 

being advised to move their awning or vehicles during a race weekend and until done so to the satisfaction of 

Caterham and the organisers, may not be able to take any further part in the meeting. 

Competitors wearing non-Caterham overalls may be supplied with championship sponsor badges and will be 

required to display these on their race overalls. 

On-circuit promotional activities: Competitors will be issued with championship sponsor decals and number 

squares. These must be displayed correctly positioned in order for the competitor to be eligible for points. 

Television coverage: Competitors accept that in car television cameras may be fitted to their cars at any race or 

official practice session for a race as part of the promotion for the championship without charge. On no account 

should advertising be carried on cars in the cockpit area. 

6.2.2 Advertising/Glass 

A All glass areas must remain clear and unobstructed by decals/advertising or any other obstruction unless these 

regulations specify different or approved by the BRSCC/Championship Coordinator. 

B 

All surfaces, which have not been claimed for stickers by the Championship, its sponsors or used for the 

application of starting numbers, are free for use. The Championship Coordinator must approve conflicting 

sponsor’s stickers in advance and the position, size and colours (if approved) will be at the discretion of the 

Championship Coordinator. 

Page 30 of 31

2013 Caterham Superlight R300 Championship 

Championship Registration Form 

Name 

Address 

Telephone 

Email 

Date of Birth 

Nationality 

Post Code 

Daytime Evening Mobile 

If not British 

Licence & Club 

Entrant Name 

& address 

MSA Licence Grade MSA Licence No. BRSCC Membership No. BRSCC Membership Expiry 

If not driver 

Car Details 

Transponder No. Body Colour Wing/Nose Colour 

(Please help us supply you with the right decals by completing the above colour questions accurately). 

I agree to abide by all rules and regulations laid down in the 2013 Caterham Superlight Championship Sporting and Technical 

Regulations, including any amendments or clarifications that may be made by the organisers during the course of the season and to 

observe all rules and regulations of the MSA Ltd. I agree to rounds of the championship being substituted in the event of a 

Terms and 

cancellation. I enclose payment to Caterham Cars Limited for £550 or £150 per race weekend and I undertake to inform the 

Conditions coordinator if the car is sold or if I cease participation in the Caterham Superlight Championship. I understand that this registration 

cannot be assigned and that I will notify the coordinator of any changes to the foregoing information. The registration fee is nonrefundable 

after the start of the season 

Signature Driver Entrant (if not driver) 

Please state preferred competition number from 2 - 99 

NB: Numbers will be allocated in accordance with the details laid down below.. 

REGISTRATION FEES: R300 - £550 EARLY REGISTRATION DISCOUNT less £50 

(The early registration discount is available for registration fees received before 31 December 2012) 

Please complete card payment details below OR send a cheque made payable to Caterham Cars Ltd to the below address. 

Type of Card Please debit my (tick) □ VISA □ MASTERCARD □ MAESTRO 

Details 

Card Number 

Name on Card 

Start date Expiry date Security No. Issue No. (Maestro only) 

Administration Date Received: 

Forwarded: 

use only 

Caterham Cars Ltd, Motorsport Department, Kennet Road, Dartford, Kent. DA1 4QN 

Tel: 01322 625800 Mobile: +44 (0)7808 776366 Email: jennyg@caterham.co.uk 

COMPETITION NUMBERS: No. 1 is reserved for the 2012 champion. If the 2012 champion does not compete, #1 will 

not be allocated to any other driver. Drivers from the 2012 championship will have their 2012 number reserved until the 31 

January 2013 (unless they register earlier and choose a different number), at which point it will be made available to others. 

The number of the 2012 champion will also be held in reserve for the duration of the season, to allow them their preferred 

number in 2014 if they do not win the championship.

Issued by SRCC: 21 February 2013 

BIGprofile SPORTS 2000 DURATEC CHAMPIONSHIP REGULATIONS 

Issue: Published Copy 

SPORTS 2000 DURATEC CHAMPIONSHIP 

SPORTING & TECHNICAL REGULATIONS 2013 

COVER PAGE & DOCUMENT CONTROL 

Issue Version: 

Linked Draft Version: 


Draft V5 

Originator: SRCC Technical Panel Date: 21/2/13 

Signed: Name: S Morris 

Approval: 

SRCC Championship 

Co-Ordinator 

Date: 21/2/13 

Signed: Name: H Williams 

This document is the property of Sports Racing Car Club (SRCC). It contains confidential 

information and may not be copied, or the information therein divulged to a third party, without 

the prior written consent of the Club. 

Page 1 of 12 The BIGprofile Sports 2000 Duratec Championship 2013 Issue: Published Copy



1. SPORTING REGULATIONS - GENERAL. 

1.1 TITLE & JURISDICTION: 


1.1.1 The Xennia BIGprofile Sports 2000 Duratec Championship is organised and administered by the Sports 2000 Racing Car Club (SRCC) in 

accordance with the General Regulations the Royal Automobile Club Motor Sports Association (incorporating the provisions of the International 

Sporting Code of the FIA) and these Championship Regulations. 

1.1.2 The Organisers reserve the right to issue additional statements clarifying items in the rules and regulations, and all such statements will be 

issued to all registered drivers by posting to the address detailed on the registration form (subject to MSA Regulation [D11.1.3]). 


Race Status: National B. 


1.2 OFFICIALS: 

1.2.1 Co-ordinator: Heidi Williams. 10 Reeves Close, Wheatstone, Leicestershire, LE8 6YG 

1.2.2 Eligibility Scrutineers: Jack McVicker Tel: 07957627776 e-mail: jack.m@virgin.net 

1.2.3 Championship Stewards: Bob Armstrong, Rick Smith, & Drew Furlong 

In the event of any of the Championship Stewards listed above being unavailable or being unable to consider 

any particular matter due to a perceived conflict of interest, the organisers reserve the right to appoint an 

alternative Championship Steward or, if deemed to be necessary, more than one alternative Championship 

Steward. 

1.2.4 Championship Clerk of 

Course: 

1.3 COMPETITOR ELIGIBILITY: 

1.3.1 

Barry Ashman. 28 Houting, Dosthill, Tamworth, Staffs, B77 1PA. Phone No (01827) 260408 

e-mail midland@brscc.co.uk 

Entrants must be fully paid up valid membership card holding members of the SRCC and in possession of valid 2012 2013 MSA Entrants 

Licences. 

1.3.2 Drivers and Entrant Drivers must be fully paid up valid membership card holding members of the SRCC, be registered for the Championship and 

be in possession of a valid MSA Competition (Racing) National (B) or above licences, or equivalent (MSA Regulation H.26.1.5) 

A competitor shall not take time off school to participate in motor sport without the prior written approval of their school. If participation in the 

Championship requires absence from school, Drivers in full time school education are required to have the approval of their h ead teacher and a 

letter stating such approval from his/her school in order to fulfil registration for the Championship. 

1.3.3 To maintain the ‘spirit’ of this championship, entries from manufacturers teams will not be accepted and any driver that is d eemed as 

professional, either by way of the MSA definition in relation to competition licensing or in the considered opinion of the SRCC Committee, will not 

be granted participation to the championship. The SRCC Committee reserves the right to rule on the championship eligibility of drivers, entrants 

and teams prior to the first event at which they wish to participate, with any ruling on eligibility remaining in place for the duration of the season. 

1.3.4 SRCC reserve the right to allow entry of a Celebrity / Development / Guest car at any event. Such drivers will be identified on the published 

SRCC entry list by the letter ‘G’ after the class identifier and the following articles of these regulations will not apply: 1.4; 1.6 & 1.7 (with the 

exception of 1.7.2) 

1.3.5 The intention of this regulation is to prevent ‘professional’, semi-professional’ and other such drivers being brought in to ‘showcase’ 

manufacturers cars as part of a marketing or development exercise, within the championship 


1.4 REGISTRATION: 

1.4.1 All drivers must register as competitors for the championship by returning the Registration Form with the Registration Fee to the General 

Secretary (SRCC) prior to the Final Closing date for the first round being entered. 

1.4.2 The Registration Fee is £190 made payable to The SRCC. 

1.4.3 Registrations will be accepted from Publication of these Regulations until the closing date for the last round of the Championship. 

1.4.4 Registration numbers will be the permanent Competition numbers for the Championship. 

1.5 CHAMPIONSHIP ROUNDS: 

The Xennia BIGprofile Sports 2000 Duratec Championship will be contested over 7 6 rounds at the following venues: 

ROUND DATE CIRCUIT INFORMATION 

1 April 27 th /28 th Silverstone GP Single race for combined Duratec, Pinto & Historic Championship 

classes. 

2 & 3 May 25 th Oulton Park International Double Header. Two races for combined Duratec, Pinto & Historic 

Championship classes. 

4 July 13 th /14 th Donington Park Single ‘standalone’ race for Duratec Championship class only. 

5 September 14th Donington Park Single ‘standalone’ race for Duratec Championship class only. 

6 October 26 th /27 th Brands Hatch Indy (FF Festival) Single ‘standalone’ race for Duratec Championship class only. 

1.6 SCORING: 

1.6.1 Points will be only be awarded to Championship Registered Competitors listed as classified finishers, in the Final Results as follows: For the 

Overall Duratec Championship - 1st-15; 2nd-14; 3rd-13; 4th-12; 5th-11; 6th-10; 7th-9; 8th-8; 9th-7; 10th-6; 11th-5; 12th-4; 13th-3; 14th-2; 15thand 

all other qualifiers-1 point. For Each Class (A & B) - 1st-15; 2nd-14; 3rd-13; 4th-12; 5th-11; 6th-10; 7th-9; 8th-8; 9th-7; 10th-6; 11th-5; 12th- 

4; 13th-3; 14th-2; 15th- and all other qualifiers-1 point. Note: Overall and Class Championships are scored separately. 

1.6.2 The totals from all qualifying rounds run(less 1) will determine the final championship points and positions. 

1.6.3 Ties shall be resolved using the formula in MSA Regulation [W1.3.4] of the 2013 MSA Yearbook 

1.6.4 Should Where a combined race for the BIGprofile Sports 2000 Duratec, Pinto & Historic Championships be run is listed as a Championship 

Round in the regulations, the following shall apply: 

For Championship Rounds listed as a ‘Single Race’ there will be a single qualifying session, with the single combined grid based 

on the fastest qualifying times irrespective of championship. A single results sheet will be published but points will be awarded 



 



separately, in accordance with the individual championship regulations to cars competing in the BIGprofile Sports 2000 Duratec, 

Pinto & Historic Championships. Thus the first Duratec car to finish is awarded 15 points, the first Pinto car to finish is 

awarded 15 points and the first Historic car is awarded 15 points etc. 1.6.1 applies. car in each class will receive 15 points, the 

second car in each class 14 points, the third car in each class 13 points and so on down to 14 th receiving 2 points with all other 

qualifiers, 1 point. 

For Championship Rounds listed as a ‘Double Header’ there will be a single qualifying session, with the single combined 

grid based on the fastest qualifying times irrespective of championship, for race 1. Race 2 grid positions will be determined 

by the overall finishing order of race 1. Non finishers in race 1 will be allocated grid positions at the back of the grid and in 

order of non-finishing i.e. the first car to non-finish will be furthest back on the grid. A single results sheet will be published 

for each race and points will be awarded separately, in accordance with the individual championship regulations to cars 

competing in the BIGprofile Sports 2000 Duratec, Pinto & Historic Championships. Thus, in each race, the first Duratec car 

to finish is awarded 15 points, the first Pinto car to finish is awarded 15 points and the first Historic car is awarded 15 points 

etc. 1.6.1 applies. 

1.6.5 If, after the publication of the Championship Regulations, for reasons of force majeure, it is necessary to combine races for Duratec, 

Pinto & Historic Championships that are listed on the calendar as ‘standalone races’, then 2 combined races will take place with a 

single qualifying session for race 1 and race 2 grid positions as per 1.6.4 ‘Double Header’. Each race will count as 50% of a 

championship round. Classified finishers will be awarded points separately, in accordance with the individual championship 

regulations (at half value) to cars competing in the BIGprofile Sports 2000 Pinto, Historic and Duratec Championships. Thus the first 

Duratec car to finish in each race, is awarded 7.5 points, the first Pinto car to finish in each race is awarded 7.5 points and the first 

Historic car to finish in each race is awarded 7.5 points, while the second Duratec car to finish is awarded 7 points and the second 

Pinto car to finish is awarded 7 points etc. Notification of necessary race combining will be made to all entered competitors by way of 

an ‘Event Bulletin’ 

1.7 AWARDS: 

1.7.1 All awards are to be provided by the Organising Club unless agreed otherwise. 

1.7.2 Per Round: Garlands to 1 st in each class. Trophies to 1 st , 2 nd and 3 rd overall and also in each Class. 

1.7.3 Championship: Trophies to 1 st , 2 nd , 3 rd , 4 th and 5 th in each Class. 

1.7.4 Bonuses: Per Round: Not applicable. Championship: Not applicable. 

1.7.5 Presentations: Garlands and Trophies are to be provided for presentation at the end of each race or at an end of the meeting presentation 

ceremony. Competitors shall be obliged to attend all prize giving ceremonies for which the race meeting and championship organisers advising 

notice of the dates, times and venues for the same in their final instructions or bulletins. Non attendance may result in a forfeit of Awards 

1.7.6 Entertainment Tax Liability: Not applicable. 

1.7.7 Title to all Trophies: In the event of any Provisional Results or Championship Tables being revised after any provisional presentations and such 

revisions affect the distribution of any awards the Competitors concerned must return such awards to the SRCC in good condition within 7days. 

2 SPORTING REGULATIONS – JUDICIAL PROCEDURES 

2.1 ROUNDS: In accordance with Section [C] of the 2012 current MSA Yearbook. 

2.2 CHAMPIONSHIP: In accordance with Section [C] of the 2012 current MSA Yearbook. 

3 SPORTING REGULATIONS - CHAMPIONSHIP RACE MEETINGS & RACE PROCEDURES 

3.1 ENTRIES: 

3.1.1 Competitors are responsible for sending in correct and complete entries with the correct entry fees prior to the entry closing dates as per the 

entry forms for each round. 

3.1.2 Incorrect or incomplete entries (including driver to be nominated entries) are to be held in abeyance until they are complete and correct and the 

date of receipt for acceptance of entry purposes shall be the date on which the Secretary of the Meeting receives the missing or corrected 

information or fee. 

3.1.3 Any withdrawal of Entry or Driver/Car changes made after acceptance of any entry must be notified to the Secretary of the Meeting in writing. If 

Driver/Vehicle changes are made after the publication of Entry Lists with Final Instructions, the Competitor concerned must apply for approval of 

acceptance by the Stewards of the Meeting BEFORE Signing-On. 

3.1.4 The maximum entry fee for each round shall be as per the Supplementary Regulations for each round. 

3.1.5 The SRCC General Secretary maintains a selection order list. Entries up to the maximum number permitted to practice will be s elected 

according to the list current on the closing day, the selection for the race will be made from these entries in order of receiving them. Any entries 

in excess of this will be treated as Reserves in order of their standing on the aforementioned list. If on the closing date, entries accepted in 

accordance with the above have reached or exceeded the maximum number permitted to practice, any further entries will be held in abeyance. 

3.1.6 Reserves are to be nominated on the Final List of Entries published with the Final Instructions or Amendment Sheet Bulletins. All Reserves will 

practice and replace withdrawn or retired entries in Reserve Number order irrespective of class subject to the provisions of 3.4. If Reserves are 

given Grid Places prior to issue of the first Grid Sheets for any round, the times set in Practice shall determine their grid positions. If Reserves 

are given places after the publication of the grid sheet and prior to cars being collected in the official 'Assembly Area' they will be placed at the 

rear of the grid and be started without any time delay. Otherwise, they will be held in the Pit lane and be released to start the race after the last 

car to start the GREEN FLAG LAP or last car to take the start has passed the startline or pit lane exit, whichever is the later. Such approval to 

start MUST be obtained from the Clerk of the Course. 

3.2 BRIEFINGS: Organisers should notify Competitors of the times and locations for all briefings in the Final Instructions for the meetings. 

Competitors must attend all briefings, which are mandatory. 

3.2.1 The Clerk of the Course may impose a fine as detailed in MSA [Appendix 1 13.6] (ii) on any competitor who fails to attend, or who reports late at, 

a scheduled driver’s briefing. 

3.3 PRACTICE: 

3.3.1 The minimum period of practice (timed) to be 30 minutes subject to the provisions of Q4.5. Should any practice session be disrupted, the Clerk 

of the Course shall not be obliged to resume the session or re-run sessions to achieve the championship criteria and the decision of the Clerk of 

the Course shall be final. 

3.3.2 In addition to the requirement of 3.3.1 a mandatory 15 minute untimed practice session will be held. 





3.3.3 Should the need arise to stop any practice, RED LIGHTS will be switched on at the Start Line and RED FLAGS will be displayed at the Start 

Line and at all other Marshal signalling points around the circuit. This is the signal for all drivers to cease circulating at racing speeds, to slow to 

a safe and reasonable pace and return to the pit lane unless directed by officials, not to do so. 

3.4 QUALIFICATION: Each driver should complete a minimum of 3 laps practice in the car to be raced and in the correct session in order to qu alify 

for selection and order of precedence as set out in the MSA regulations [Q4.5]. The Clerk of the Course and/or Stewards of the Meeting shall 

have the right to exclude any driver whose practice times or driving are considered to be unsatisfactory - as per MSA Regulation [Q4.5.3]. 

3.5 RACES: 

3.5.1 The standard minimum scheduled race distance shall be 30 minutes. Should any race distance be reduced at the discretion of the Clerk of the 

Course or Stewards of the Meeting, it shall still count as a full points-scoring round. 

3.6 STARTS: 

3.6.1 All race start countdowns are to have a minimum elapsed period of 3 minutes from the time all cars are released to form up on the grid to the 

start of the Green Flag Lap(s) in the formation as specified on the Track Licence for each circuit. 

3.6.2 The minimum countdown procedures/audible warnings sequence shall be - 1 minute to start of Green Flag/Pace Lap - Start Engines/Clear Grid. 

30 seconds-Visible and audible warning for start of Green Flag/Pace Lap. 


3.6.4 Any cars removed from the grid after the 1 minute stage or driven into the pits on the Green Flag Lap shall be held in the pit lane an d may start 

the race after the last car to take the start from the grid has passed the startline or pit exit lane whichever is the later. 

3.6.5 Any drivers unable to start the Green Flag/Pace lap or start are required to indicate their situation as per MSA regulation [Q12.13.2] and any 

drivers unable to maintain grid positions on the Green Flag Lap to the extent that ALL other cars are ahead of them, may complete the Green 

Flag Lap but MUST remain at the rear of the last row of the grid but ahead of any cars to be started with a time delay. 

3.6.6 Excessive weaving to warm-up tyres - using more than 50% of the track width, and falling back in order to accelerate and practice starts, is 

prohibited. 

3.6.7 A five second board will be used to indicate that the grid is complete The red lights will be switched on five seconds after the board is withdrawn. 

All cars will start racing when the red start light(s) are extinguished. In the event of any starting lights failure the Starter will revert to the use of 

the National flag. 

3.7 RACE STOPS: 

3.7.1 Should the need arise to stop any race, RED LIGHTS will be switched on at the Startline and RED FLAGS will be displayed at th e Startline and 

at all Marshals Signalling Points around the circuit. This is a signal for all drivers to cease circulating at racing speeds, to slow to a safe and 

reasonable pace and to return to the starting grid area, which will automatically become a Parc Ferme area. Cars may not enter the Pits unless 

directed to do so. Work on cars already in the Pits must cease when a race is stopped. 

3.7.2 Case A – Less than two laps completed by Race leader. 

The Race will be null and void. The race will restart from the original grid positions. Competitors unable to take the restart may be replaced by 

reserves who will start from the back of the grid in reserve order. Gaps on the grid should not be closed up. The length of the restarted race will 

be determined by the Clerk of the Course. 

3.7.3 Case B – More than two laps completed by Race Leader but less than 75% 

The Race will restart from a grid set out by the finishing order of part one (as per MSA Regulation [Q5.4.2]). The result of the race will be the 

finishing order at the end of part two. The length of the restarted race will be determined by the Clerk of the Course. 

3.7.4 If the leader has completed more than 75% of the race distance or duration it shall not be re-started and the results will be declared in 

accordance with MSA Regulation [Q5.4.3] unless the Clerk of the Course, in consultation with the Stewards deem it appropriate to restart the 

race. 

3.8 RE-SCRUTINY: All vehicles reported involved in contact incidents during races or practice must be re-presented to the Scrutineers before 

continuing in the races or practice. 

3.9 PITS AND PITLANE SAFETY: 

3.9.1 Pits: Entrants must ensure that the MSA, Circuit Management and Organising Club Safety Regulations are complied with at all times. 

3.9.2 Pitlane: The outer lane or lanes are to be kept unobstructed to allow safe passage of cars at all times. The onus shall be on all Drivers to take 

all due care and drive at minimum speeds in pit lanes. 

3.9.3 Refuelling: May only be carried out in accordance with the MSA [Q13] Regulations, Circuit Management Regulations and the SRs or Final 

Instructions issued for each Circuit/Meeting. 

3.9.4 There will be a speed limit of 60 kph within the marked pit lane that will be checked by radar. You may be penalised for exc eeding that speed. 

3.10 RACE FINISHES: After taking the chequered flag drivers are required to: - Progressively and safely slow down, remain behind any competitors 

ahead of them, return to the Pit lane Entrance/Paddock Entrance as instructed, comply with any directions given by Marshals or Officials and to 

keep their helmets on and harnesses done up while on the circuit or in the pit lane. NB. After taking the finish all drivers are to take their cars 

directly to the Scrutineering Bay. The only exception is when they are directed to the award presentation area, by a race official. These cars will 

be taken directly to the Scrutineering Bay after the presentations without interference from any person. Competitors who fail to comply will be 

reported to the Clerk of Course. 

3.11 RESULTS: All Practice Timesheets, Grid Sheets and Race Results are to be deemed PROVISIONAL until all vehicles are released by 

Scrutineers after Post Practice/Race Scrutineering and/or after completion of any Judicial or Technical procedures. 

3.12 TIMING MODULES 

3.12.1 All competitors are required to purchase and fit an approved Electronic Self Identification Module (transponder) to their cars for the purposes of 

accurate timing. It is the responsibility of the competitor to fit these to car in the position and manner specified by the supplier/timing Company. 

The Modules must be in place and functioning correctly for all Championship qualifying practice sessions and races. The setting and servicing of 

these items must only be carried out by properly authorised MSA licensed Timekeepers. Competitors are liable for any replacement of the 

Modules, due to misuse or loss. 

3.12.2 Competitors may not place electronic timing equipment within 5 metres of the official start, finish or any other official timing lines at any event or 

test session/day. Any such equipment placed within these zones will be removed. 

3.13 QUALIFICATION RACES: Not Applicable 



3.14 OPERATION OF SAFETY CAR: 



3.14.1 The Safety Car will be brought into operation and run in accordance with Section Q Appendix 2 of the MSA General Regulations 

4. CHAMPIONSHIP RACE PENALTIES: 

4.1 INFRINGEMENT OF TECHNICAL REGULATIONS: 

4.1.1 Arising from post practice Scrutineering or Judicial Action: Minimum Penalty: The provisions of MSA Regulations: [C3.3]. 

4.1.2 Arising from post race Scrutineering or Judicial Action: Minimum Penalty: The provisions of MSA Regulations: [C3.5.1 (a) & (b)]. 

4.1.3 For infringements deemed to be of a more serious nature the Clerk of the Course may invoke the provisions of Regulation C3.5.1 (c)]. 

4.2 INFRINGEMENTS OF NON-TECHNICAL MSA REGULATIONS AND THE SPORTING REGULATIONS ISSUED FOR THE CHAMPIONSHIP: 

1) As per 2012 current MSA Judicial Procedure Regulations. If excluded the driver shall count that event as one of the point scoring 

rounds counting to his total championship score. 

2) In order to maintain standards of conduct, the Championship Coordinator will monitor all Officials/Observers reports of adverse 

behaviour at race meetings. If any individual included on two such reports during one racing season he/she will receive written 

warning from the Championship Coordinator that his/her driving/behaviour is to be specifically observed at future race meetings. 

Any adverse reports during this period of observation could result in official MSA action and will result in a Championship Stewards’ 

enquiry, with possible loss of Championship points and refusal of further race entries. 

3) The Clerk of the Course and/or Stewards of the Meeting may apply other penalties, such as ‘Stop and Go or Drive Through’ during 

races as deemed applicable. 

5 TECHNICAL REGULATIONS 

5.1 INTRODUCTION: 

The following Technical regulations are set out in accordance with the MSA specified format. Vehicles must be in compliance with MSA General 

Technical & Safety Regulations as per [J, K & Q] as appropriate. It should be clearly understood that if the following texts do not clearly specify 

that you can do it you should work on the principle that you cannot. The Eligibility Scrutineer may seal components at any time during the racing 

season for later inspection. Only cars built from chassis made before July 2001 may deviate from the requirements for driver feet protection of 

5.5.7 and a front crash structure specified in 5.5.3. The maximum price for a ‘Turnkey’ car is £42,000. See 5.18.1 for definitions. The underlying 

concept of this production engine formula is the determination that the base engine is to be used as received from Ford without additional 

performance enhancing work. The club’s aim is to keep, the cost of engine preparation and engine performance differentials, t o the minimum 

and will maintain the regulations to this end. Therefore, extensive use of dynamometer time and component matching is not allowed for within 

the regulations. In this way racing versions of the Duratec DHE 420 engines are to be as similar as if they had come down th e Ford production 

line, where world-wide legislation already requires the power of every engine made, to be within severely defined limits of the homologated 

power curve. In the event that a performance disparity is noticed with an engine, then that engine may be s ealed and power checked at the 

competitor’s expense as per 5.7 m 

5.1.1 Scrutineering: The official MSA Eligibility Scrutineer or his appointed deputy will be attending rounds of the championship and he is available to 

provide advice as well as ensuring that the regulations are strictly enforced to ensure fair play. 

5.1.2 To allow for the use of scrutineer’s wire seals, certain components must have the heads of 2 adjacent securing bolts or the joint flange in 2 

opposite locations, cross-drilled. The cross drilling will leave a through hole of 1.6mm minimum diameter. The components that must be made 

ready for sealing are: Cam Cover. Sump. Differential Side Plates. Inlet Manifold (To Head) Carburettor Throttle Body (To Inlet Manifold). Failure 

to comply renders the engine ineligible. MSA Regulation J3.1.5 and J3.1.6 applies 

5.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION: 

The Xennia BIGprofile Sports 2000 Duratec Championship is for competitors participating in open cockpit 2 seater rear engine sports racing car 

using standard Ford 2000cc, 16 valve (Duratec DHE 420) engine in its 145PS form. Sports 2000 Duratec is a restricted class. Therefore any 

allowable modifications, changes or additions are as stated herein. There are no exceptions. IF IN DOUBT, DON'T. In the interest of clarity, the 

SRCC will implement an approved Vehicle Identification Paper/Logbook for Duratec Sports 2000 cars, during the 2013 championship season. 

Note that the onus of proof shall be with the competitor/entrant. 

5.2.1 The Championship will consist of 2 classes: 

Class A: For ‘Turnkey’ cars (See 5.18.1 for definitions) manufactured after 31 December 2006 and all cars converted from Pinto 

specification after 31 December 2012. 

Class B: For ‘Turnkey’ cars (See 5.18.1 for definitions) manufactured before 1 January 2007 and all cars converted from Pinto 

specification, and raced in an SRCC Duratec Championship race before 1 January 2013. 

5.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: 

The following Articles of MSA Regulations Section K will apply: - K1 to K1.2.5, K1.3.6 to K1.3.8, K1.4.1 to K1.5.2, K1.6.2, K1.6.4, K1.6.5, K 

1.6.6, K1.7, K1.8,K2.1, K2.1.3, K2.1.4, K2.1.6 TO K2.1.10, K2.3, K3, K3.1, K3.1.2(a) or K3.1.3, K3.1.6 to K3.5, K5.1, K5.2, K6, K7.1 TO K7.4, 

K8.1, K8.3, K8.5, K9.1 to K9.3, K10.1 TO K10.4, K11.1 to K11.3, K13, K14.1 to K14.3 

5.4 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS & EXCEPTIONS: 

5.5 CHASSIS: 

5.5.1 Unrestricted except that the use of carbon fibre composite structural materials is prohibited. No engine oil or water tubes are permitted within 

the cockpit. The engine will be mounted upright and aligned fore and aft in the chassis. 

5.5.2 It is the intent of these rules to minimise the use of ground effects to achieve aerodynamic down force on the vehicle. 

i) The chassis and body surfaces, which comprise the underside of the car, shall not deviate from a flat plane by more than 2.5cm or 1”. 

This deviation may not be used to create an aerodynamic device. 

ii) The underside of the car is defined as being within the reference area as per 5.18.3 d) 

iii) The underside of the car (Z0 plane) must incorporate a rectangular rigid surface of minimum 142.24cm measured across the vehicle by 

minimum 91.44cm measured along the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, which must extend to the full width of the body. 

iv) There must be no aerodynamic devices that are considered ‘downforce generating’ situated in the reference zone defined in 5.18.3 e) 

5.5.3 The chassis must include an impact-absorbing structure ahead of the front bulkhead of the main structure. This structure must be solidly fixed to 

the extremities of the bulkhead (i.e. with at least 6 bolts of high quality steel of 6mm minimum core diameter requiring tools for removal). Or it 





may form part of the chassis structure. It must constitute a box of 30cm minimum length, 15cm minimum rearward height and 400cm2 minimum 

total cross section. The construction material must be metallic and it must be designed to give protection to the driver by way of calculated 

deformation and controlled deceleration in the event of an impact. The manufacturer may be asked to supply information to the eligibility 

scrutineer (or his representative) to confirm the design calculation and/or any impact testing carried out by an approved test facility. Irrespective 

of the size of the impact absorbing structure (safety foot box), the maximum total area of access holes allowed in this structure shall be 300 cm2. 

The basic structure is defined as a unit with 5 closed sides, and 1 open side. The access holes dimension quoted apply to any modification t o 

the 5 closed sides. 

5.5.4 There must be no stressed part (centre spine/chassis divider/stiffening panel) in the longitudinal section of the chassis structure, between the 

steering wheel and the seat back and inside of the driver/passenger space that exceeds in height, 30cm (11.8") above the lowest point of the 

chassis, with the exception of the requirements of driver lateral head restraint (5.5.5). (The lowest point of the chassis is described as the 

underside of the chassis/ZO plane) 

5.5.5 It is permitted to fit, between the driver/passenger space, a central removable longitudinal support, maximum cross section 750mm 2 only for the 

purpose of supporting a lateral head restraint. This support must be removable without the use of tools so as not to hinder driver egress. 

5.5.6 Space for 2 seats shall be provided each of at least 40cm (15.75”) width and shall be positioned symmetrically about the vehicle’s longitudinal axis. 

There shall be at least 25cm (9.9”) wide foot space for the driver measured at the pedals. The passenger space should provid e as much seat 

space, elbowroom, foot and legroom in terms of length, width and height as that of the driver space. Battery boxes and fire extinguishers are 

permitted in the passenger seat area. 

5.5.7 The soles of the feet of the driver, seated in the normal driving position and with his feet on the pedals in the inoperative position, shall not be 

situated to the fore of a vertical plane passing through the centre line of the front wheels. 

5.6 BODYWORK INCLUDING AEROFOILS/SPOILERS. 

i) The body shall provide a cockpit for 2 seats and cover all mechanical components including wheels and suspension members except for the 

exhaust pipe, induction system and camshaft cover which may protrude through the engine cover. 

ii) Forward of the main rollbar the bodywork must not allow mechanical components to be seen when viewed from any orthogonal direction 

relative to the chassis major X, Y & Z axes. The exception to this would be any part visible through apertures in the road wheel. 

iii) The bodywork shall project over the complete wheels in such a way as to cover at least one third of their circumference and their entire 

width. Reference MSA Regulation [J5.2.6 ] 

iv) Between the front and rear axle lines the body shall: 

a) Maintain over a minimum of 70% of the length of the wheelbase a minimum vertical height (measured from the lowest point of the chassis), 

of 20cm (7.9”) when viewed from the side, and when viewed from above, a minimum body width exceeding the greatest overall wid th across 

the tyres less 15cm (5.9”). 

b) There shall be no gap between the main body and the wheel arches. 

c) The bodywork forward of the main rollbar must be symmetrical about the car's longitudinal centre-line. An exception is allowed whereby a 

cockpit air deflector/windscreen is permitted. Additionally, within the context of this sub-section, any cooling radiator is not considered as part 

of the bodywork. 

iii) The cockpit opening seen in plan view shall be symmetrical about the longitudinal axis of the car and shall be large enough for a horizontal 

rectangle of 80cm (31.5”) by 40cm (15.75”) to be passed through with its minor axis aligned with the vehicle’s longitudinal axis. Any driver 

head restraint fitted which is wholly removable without the use of tools, may be so removed before the application of the cockpit opening 

template. 

iv) All ducted air for heat exchangers (water/oil) and brakes shall pass through those heat exchangers or onto those brakes. 

v) Maximum vehicle length forward of the front axle centreline: 91.5cm (36”) (including spoilers), the maximum vehicle length rearward of the 

rear axle centreline: 115cm (45.5”) (including aerofoil/spoilers) 

vi) Spoilers mounted at the front of the vehicle are permitted. Those spoilers may only be adjusted in a horizontal plane. 

vii) Spoilers mounted at the rear of the vehicle are permitted. Those spoilers may only be adjusted in a plane that is vertical or ±20º of vertical. 

viii) A rear elevated aerofoil (wing) in the form of SRCC authorised Part number: SRCC-RA1, defined in 5.18.2. must be fitted to all cars. 

a. The elevated aerofoil (wing) including any end plates, must be mounted so as not to exceed a height of 110cm (43.3”) from the ground, 

measured with driver on board. No part of the wing, wing end plates or mountings shall exceed the maximum vehicle rearward length as 

stated in 5.6 v). 

b. The wing support shall be mounted to the gearbox and/or sprung chassis in such a manner as to avoid flexing at speed. 

c. Wings may be mounted to the bodywork providing there is a metal support structure directly below the mounting points sufficient to carry 

the loads to the gearbox/sprung chassis. A positive retention system is required on both wing-mounting struts to keep the wing attached to 

the metal mounting structure in the case of bodywork damage/failure. 

d. No more than 1° of deflection shall occur when a 10 foot-pound torque is imposed on the wing at 6.35cm (2.5") from the leading edge. 

e. A Gurney flap, not to exceed 1.9cm (.75") in height may be fitted to the top trailing edge of the wing and mounted at 85° to 95° relative to 

the local wing surface. 

f. End plates may be attached to the wing. These end plates, when viewed from above, must fit within a box, which is 2.54cm (1”) wide 

laterally, and 35.5cm (14") long front to back, and must not exceed the maximum bodywork width of the car. Where these end plates are 

mounted to the bodywork and wing together, any gap between the inner face of the end plate and the outer face (longitudinal) of the wing 

may be bridged either with round section spacers of not more than 15mm diameter or flat plates of maximum thickness 3mm. The plates 

must not exceed the end plate length (front to back) and must always be mounted to present the minimum profile when viewed fr om the 

front of the car. In other words the plates must be at 0 degrees to the ground plane. 

ix) Windscreens are optional. 

5.6.1 Modifications Permitted: 

1. General: None in contravention of 5.6.2 below. 

2. Interior: None in contravention of 5.6.2 below. 

3. Exterior: Spoilers mounted at the rear of the vehicle may include a gurney lip/stiffening fold not exceeding 10mm when viewed from above. 

4. Silhouette: None in contravention of 5.6.2 below. 

5. Ground Clearance: Cars must comply with MSA regulation [J5.20.11]. 

5.6.2 Modifications Prohibited: 

1. General: The body above the chassis level in the region of the cockpit shall not be reinforced in any way that would complic ate or hinder the 

rescue of the driver. 

2. Interior: No engine oil or water tubes are permitted within the cockpit. 

3. Exterior: Spoilers shall not contravene the maximum vehicle length as defined in 5.6.v) of these regulations, at any time. No 

bodywork/diffuser extension of the underside panel or support structure for the floor that may be considered to aid down force, is allowed 

between the inside faces of the rear wheels from a vertical plane connecting the rear wheel centre points (see 5.18.3.c), to the rear extremity 

of the car. 

4. Silhouette: Maximum height with driver on board excluding rear elevated aerofoil (wing), safety rollover bar and mirrors shall not exceed at 

any time 90cm (35.4”) measured from the ground. 



5.7 ENGINE 


5. Ground Clearance: See 5.6.1.5 above 


Ford 2000cc, 16 Valve (Duratec DHE 420) engine in its 145PS form 

a) The supply source of base engines is open, however, regardless of supplier, all elements of the regulations apply and it is the responsibility 

of the driver and/or entrant to ensure legality of the engine as used in qualifying and racing. 

b) Engines will be mounted upright, and aligned fore and aft in the chassis. 

c) The addition of any material, be it metal, plastic, or composite etc. by any means be it welding, bonding, encapsulation or encasement to any 

component is prohibited. However, specific repair of the mounting points of the cylinder block to the transmission or chassis is allowed, whilst 

other casting repairs may be allowed with prior written approval of the Eligibility Scrutineer responsible for the Formula. 

d) Water pump and generator drive pulleys and their retention bolts, washers and belts are free. 

e) Mechanical tachometer drives may be fitted. 

f) The use of non-standard replacement fasteners, nuts, bolts, screws, studs and washers which are not connected with, or which do not 

support, any moving parts of the engine or its compulsorily retained accessories is permitted. Freedom granted to any fasten er does not 

allow for freedom to move items relative to each other. For components that are granted the freedom for the fitment of a key or dowel, then 

material may be removed to allow the fitting of the key or dowel. Only one hole or keyway per component is allowed. 

g) The use of thread locking compounds is permitted. 

h) Gaskets are free except for the cylinder head, intake and exhaust system gaskets which must be standard Ford manufacture for the engine. 

i) Any process of cleaning may be used on any component providing the surface finish, which must remain standard, is not affected. 

j) Forced induction is prohibited. Ram air effects generated by the forward motion of the car is not considered as forced induction. 

k) The expression "Standard", "Standard production" or similar expression is deemed to imply that the part has been manufactured by Ford, or 

a Ford Motor Company Ltd. authorised sub-contractor, for specific use on a specific model of the vehicle or engine. Consequently for these 

rules only parts manufactured specifically for the Ford 2000cc, 16 Valve engine (Duratec DHE 420) in its 145PS form, may be used. Any 

machining marks on cast components resulting from manufacturing procedures will not cause disqualification. Only machining and 

component preparation carried out by Ford Motor Company Ltd., or by a Ford Motor Company Ltd. authorised sub-contractor is allowed 

unless otherwise specified. Any production deburring or imperfection removal during initial manufacture may not be modified or extended. 

The Scrutineers decision will be final (based on advice from Ford Manufacturing) if a dispute arises regarding the amount of tool, or other 

marks that are evident in any particular component. 

l) The exterior surfaces only (of the complete engine assembly) of ferrous parts and the exterior surface of the aluminium cam cover may be 

protected by paint or similar means. No internal component or surface may be coated by any protective finish. Other Ford prod uced 

aluminium components may be protected only on their external surfaces by a transparent clear varnish, or similar. No rework may be carried 

out on any component unless specifically authorised by the regulations. The engine and associated parts must remain exactly as produced 

by the Ford Motor Company unless expressly detailed in these regulations. If the regulation allows a change, then that author isation would 

allow the change to be carried out. However any statement defining minimum weight or dimensions does not grant permission for rework to 

obtain these minimum values, unless carried out in accordance with these regulations. Only Ford standard parts (parts manufactured by Ford 

or a Ford Motor Company authorised sub-contractor) specifically for the 2000cc, 145PS version of the Duratec DHE 420 engine can be used 

in this series. No treatment that alters in any way the surface finish, hardness, or other property of the original production component is 

allowed. The only exception to this is any deposit derived from the lubrication and combustion processes naturally occurring during the 

running of the engine. Ford reserve the right to prohibit the use of specific components introduced as Production changes, if in the opinion of 

the Ford Motor Company Limited, they are deemed to have a performance advantage. If in doubt contact Ford Motorsport or the series 

scrutineer. 

m) In the interest of equality, any car that is suspected to have a power advantage, will, at the discretion of the series scrutineer have its engine 

sealed and subsequently will be required to undertake performance testing on Hi-Tech Motorsports rolling road. If the noted power output of 

the engine, measured at the rear wheels, is in excess of 185 BHP (187.57PS) then the engine in question will be further inspected, by 

disassembly and/or electronic investigation. If, as a result of this action, the engine is deemed non-conforming, then the provisions of 4.1 

‘Infringement of Technical Regulations’ will apply. 


a) Engine. The only permitted engine is the Ford 2000cc, 16 Valve (Duratec DHE 420) engine in its 145PS form with nominal bore 87.5mm and 

stroke 83.1mm. Production tolerances are permitted providing the total swept volume does not exceed 2000cc 

b) Inlet Manifold. The Only permitted manifold is SRCC - IM1, defined in 5.18.2. It is not permissible to reshape the manifold internally. The 

manifold may be machined externally. 

c) Throttle Bodies: The throttle bodies SRCC-TB1 are defined in 5.18.2. The Throttle body housings shall not be modified internally in any way 

or by any means. The external throttle linkage is free. No other modifications are permitted. Any means of reducing intake air temperat ure is 

prohibited. Any form of water injection is prohibited. 

d) Fuel Injectors: The fuel injectors are defined in 5.18.2. No modifications are permitted. 

e) Fuel Injection and Engine management system: The main engine "Electronic Control Unit" (ECU) shall not be modified in any way. It is not 

permitted to change the strength or form of any of the sensor signals to, or the outputs from, the ECU or the ignition amplifier unit. The only 

ECU’s allowed are defined in 5.18.2. The ECU, and the electronics diagnostic connector, must be positioned in an accessible p osition, 

allowing scrutineers free access to it at all times. The engine high-pressure fuel pump(s), and any low-pressure pump(s) must be activated 

through a relay (Minimum 15 Amp capacity) triggered from the 'Fuel pump relay' pin on the main engine ECU. It is permissible to fit a 

crankshaft speed sensor if an engine speed signal is not taken from the engine management system for extra instrumentation. The engine 

ECU and/or ignition amplifier may be exchanged, or electronically interrogated at any time (including the time allocated for practice) upon the 

request of a designated official from the event organisers and/or the SRCC. The event scrutineers reserve the right to require a competitor to 

carry an SRCC supplied data logger on the car at any time during the event. The unit to be placed close to the existing diagnostic connector. 

5.7.2 Exhaust systems: Exhaust systems and manifold are unrestricted but must comply with MSA regulations J5.16.1 to J5.16.6. 

5.7.3 Cylinder Block 

a) It is permitted, as means of repair, to replace cylinder bores with cast iron cylinder liners, in standard material and to standard dimensions. 

The liners must remain dry liners. The centre line of the cylinder bores must remain within Ford production tolerance. No off setting of the 

cylinder bores is allowed. 'Nicasil' or any other types of bore plating / treatments are prohibited. 

b) Localised machining of the cylinder block is permitted to allow fitting of the dry sump system. 

c) The crankcase breather may be modified, including removal, as long as no air and/or oil escape from this area other than through pipework 

to a catch tank. 




d) The cylinder block may be machined to maintain deck height whilst respecting 5.7.5 a) iii) 


5.7.4 Cylinder Head Including Valves and Valve Gear: 

a) It is permitted, as means of repair, to replace damaged valve guides and valve seats by replacement valve guides and valve seat inserts all 

to standard dimensions. 

b) No work, which removes, adds, replaces, or transfers material is allowed on the cylinder head with the following exceptions. 

i) Simple cleaning which does not alter in any way the shape of the component. 

ii) Minimal material removal from the head face to correct combustion chamber volume and/or reclaim head flatness. No internal rework of 

any combustion chamber is permitted. 

iii) Fitting of replacement valve seat insert to a position that replicates the standard closed valve position. 

c) The cam cover assembly cannot be modified or replaced. 

d) All valve train components, other than the valve springs and simple shims under valve springs, may not be modified or replaced. The 

replacement tappets from Ford are permitted to accommodate valve train wear, but cannot be modified in any way unless to adjust lash 

length within the standard Ford range. Valve springs are free. 

e) Valves must remain standard, no re-profiling or polishing is permitted. The original 45 degrees (90 degrees included) seat angle must be 

maintained. 

Distance apart at centres (inlet) 37.25+ 0.5 mm. 

Distance apart at centres (exhaust) 36.00+ 0.5 mm. 

Maximum face diameter (inlet) 35.15 mm. 

Maximum face diameter (exhaust) 30.15 mm. 

Overall length (inlet) 103.85 + 0.5 mm. 

Overall length (exhaust) 105.05 + 0.5 mm. 

Standard valve stem seals must be retained. 

f) Valve seat dimensions shall remain standard. 

5.7.5 Compression Ratio 

5.7.6 Camshaft 

5.7.7 Pistons 

a) The maximum compression ratio will be controlled as follows: 

i) Minimum combustion volume in the cylinder head (with the race spark plug fitted) = 42cc. 

ii) Standard Ford cylinder head gasket with a minimum compressed thickness of 0.45 mm, and a minimum diameter of cylinder aperture of 

89.00 mm. 

iii) With the piston at Top Dead Centre, the piston top must remain below the top of the block (deck) by a minimum of 0.375mm (0.015”). The 

measurement shall be taken from the flat squish deck of the piston (not the concave bowl), to the deck height (top) of the block, without 

fitment of a head gasket. This measurement shall be taken in 2 positions at the extreme fore and aft of the piston in line with the piston pin. 

An average of the 2 measurements will be used to determine the actual dimension. 

iv) The combustion chamber cannot be cleaned of carbon prior to a compression ratio check being undertaken. However, if the measured 

compression ratio is outside of tolerance, the eligibility scrutineer, at his discretion may allow the combustion chamber and/or piston crown to 

be de-carbonized in a controlled manner, prior to re-test and calculation. In all cases, this second measurement will be taken and recorded 

as final. 

a) The only permitted camshaft is the standard production camshaft (Part No's:- Inlet 1S7G-6A271-BG; & Exhaust 1S7G-6A272-BG - or 

subsequent production camshafts conforming to the standard lift data. 

b) The camshaft must remain entirely unmodified. It must be fully manufactured and ground by the Ford Motor Company. It is prohibited to grind 

from blanks, regrind or re-profile. Only the production surface finish is permitted. Shot peening, shot blasting or polishing are prohibited. It is 

prohibited to modify the timing slots in the cam ends. 

c) The cam profile is defined by determination of lift against a flat-footed follower at various angles. The angular setting of the camshafts is to be 

set according to 5.18.3 

a) Pistons must be standard production pistons (Part No. 1S7G-6110-DE1), unmodified in any way. 

b) All three piston rings must be fitted and piston rings must be standard production items. The minimum weight of the connecting rod and 

piston assembly shall be 910 gms. (Complete piston with rings and pin, connecting rod and cap with bolts but excluding crankshaft bearings). 

c) The piston cooling oil squirt jets, and the oil feed galleries to them, must be retained and unmodified in any way. 

5.7.8 Connecting Rods 

Connecting rods must be standard (Ford Part No. 1S7G-6200-AG) unmodified in any way. Polishing is prohibited. The minimum weight of the 

connecting rod and piston assembly shall be 910 gms. (Complete piston with rings and pin, and connecting rod and cap wit h bolts but excluding 

crankshaft bearings). Connecting-rod bolts are free. 

5.7.9 Crankshaft 

a) A standard crankshaft must be used. Polishing is prohibited. Crankshaft minimum weight is 13.6kg (including gearbox spigot bearing). 

Crankshaft journals must remain within Ford positional tolerances if a repair regrind is carried out. 

b) Crankshaft pulley and damper must be retained. Additional drives to oil pump, alternator etc. may use this pulley, or extra pulleys mounted in 

front of the crankshaft damper. 

c) It is not permitted to alter the number of bearings or fit bearings of less than standard production width 

d) The crank journals may be reground for reclaim, as long as the minimum crank weight is respected. Standard oversize and under size 

bearings are permitted. 

e) The crankshaft timing chain sprocket and front pulley/damper may be fixed to the crankshaft by woodruff key or dowel. 

5.7.10 Flywheel and Clutch 

a) The flywheel assembly (steel flywheel and ring-gear) must conform to a minimum weight, accept the mandatory clutch assembly and 

maintain the same outside diameter of the original equipment (including ring-gear) fitted to the Ford 2000cc, 16 Valve (Duratec DHE 420) 

engine in its 145PS form. For rectification the clutch mating face may be resurfaced provided the minimum weight is respected. No other 

machining is allowed. It is mandatory to use AP clutch cover plate CP5905-1 with AP clutch driven plate CP5352, CP5351 or CP5354 (see 

5.18.2). It is permitted to alter the clutch spline to suit the gearbox. Racing clutches are prohibited 




b) Flywheel bolts are free and locating dowels are permitted. 

c) It is permitted to secure the starter ring to the flywheel. 


d) Flywheel minimum permitted weight = 4.6kg (excluding all flywheel and crankshaft mounting bolts). Flywheel, Clutch Cover plat e and driven 

plate minimum permitted weight = 10.1kg (excluding all flywheel mounting, crankshaft mounting and clutch cover bolts). 

5.7.11 Lubrication System 

a) The lubrication system, external to the engine, is free. Existing standard production oilways, linings or oil grooves may be enlarged, but no 

additional ones are permitted. Addition of material to facilitate an increase in oilway size is not permitted, with the exception that the oil lines 

to the standard oil pump may be modified by the addition of material to allow its use with the free concept dry sump system. Standard 

bearings (production or production reclaim sizes) must be retained and cannot be modified. Chamfering of the entry/exit holes of oilways is 

permitted. A dry sump system is mandatory, oil coolers are free. No part of the dry sump equipment may protrude inside the engine cylinder 

block. The standard engine pressure oil pump may be modified or removed. 

b) No line containing lubricating oil may pass through the cockpit. All lubricating oil lines, which carry oil at a nominal pressure of 1 bar or above, 

must have a minimum burst pressure of 70 bar (1000psi) and a minimum operating temperature limit of 135°C (250°F). When flexible, these 

lines must have threaded connectors and an outer braid resistant to abrasion and flame (will not sustain combustion). All other oil and oil 

vapour containing lines must be made from hose material and fittings that meet the minimum operating temperatures stated above, and have 

adequate burst strength. 


a) A liquid cooling system is mandatory. The standard production water pump must be retained, although through freedom on the drive to the 

pump, its rotational speed may be changed. The radiator and associated pipes are free. 

b) The water thermostat housing is free, unused car heater connections must be blanked off. It may however be repositioned by the fitment of 

an extension pipe from the original location to a revised location. The thermostat is free. If the thermostat is removed then the water 

recirculation pipe should also be blanked off. However if one is fitted it must conform to the following:- The standard production thermostat, or 

another twin seat thermostat unit working in the same manner as the standard part, but which controls the hot engine water coolant 

temperature above 70°C only are permitted. The car water circulation concept must be retained, and NO water bypass pipes or air bleed 

pipes are allowed which interfere with the design principle of the production thermostat. It is strongly recommended that the thermostat is 

retained when racing in cool conditions. 

c) The radiator, if housed in or incorporating a cool air scoop or deflector, must comply with bodywork regulations. 

5.7.13 Fuel System 

a) A high-pressure fuel pump and fuel filter assembly (maximum volume 0.5 litre) must be mounted within the area defined by the chassis rails 

and not directly in the cockpit area. 

b) The fuel pressure in the engine fuel injector rail is free. 

c) It is permitted to fit a low-pressure fuel pump and fuel collector (maximum volume 1 litre) prior to the high-pressure fuel pump. This must be 

mounted within the area defined by the chassis rails and not directly in the cockpit area. 

d) The fuel rail is free. 

e) All lines containing petroleum spirit must be fitted in such a way that any leakage cannot result in the accumulation of flui d in the cockpit. 

When flexible, all high-pressure lines must have threaded connectors and an outer braid, which is resistant to abrasion and flame. All highpressure 

fuel lines must have a minimum burst pressure of 41 bar at the minimum operating temperature limit of 135 degrees centigrade. To 

facilitate the repeated fitting of screwed connectors for the aluminium fuel rail it will be permitted to have short adaptor hoses (to the same 

specification) between the engine and chassis system.. Fuel cooling radiators are permitted, within safety regulations, but must be mounted 

within the main chassis frame. Fuel cooling may only employ air at ambient temperature as the cooling medium, and fan assistance is not 

allowed. 

5.7.14 Electrical System 

a) Sparking plugs are free, provided they fit the engine without any modification to the cylinder head or the sparking plug and that the sparking 

plugs place the spark gap in the same position as the production sparking plug within the combustion chamber. 

b) The coil unit may be repositioned, but the existing HT leads to the sparking plugs must be retained without modification. 

c) It is prohibited to use any other method or component to trigger, distribute or time the ignition or injection. 

d) The engine management wiring loom is free, however an approved loom, part number, SRCC-WL1 (see 5.18.2) is available. Any loom used 

must not alter the normal electrical characteristics of the inputs, outputs or sensors in any way. 

e) A 12 Volt (nominal) alternator must be fitted. The alternator may be driven from either the engine or transmission. The alternator shall at all 

times provide an output capable of maintaining a correct level of charge in the storage battery. The installation shall ensur e that this output is 

available at all times whilst the car is circulating on the racetrack. 

5.8 SUSPENSION 

5.8.1 All cars shall be fitted with sprung suspension between the wheels and the chassis. Suspension must be controlled to avoid fouling of wheels on 

chassis or bodywork. The springing medium must not consist solely of bolts located through flexible bushes or mountings. 

5.8.2 All parts shall be of steel or ferrous material with the exception of hubs, hub adapters, hub carriers, uprights, bearings and bushes, bell-cranks, 

pivot blocks and bushes, spring caps, abutment nuts and anti-roll bar links. Springs, steel only. It is not permitted to control body roll with additional 

shock absorbers. 

5.8.3 The shock absorber casing is free. They can be ferrous or light alloy units and separate reservoirs for fluid and/or gas are permitted. The shock 

absorber casing is defined as the item which contains the piston, fluid/gas, and moving parts which control the damping action. Any form of active 

damping is prohibited. Any method of altering the damper performance by the driver whilst seated in the car is prohibited. 

5.8.4 Anti-roll bars for front and/or rear suspension may be capable of manual, mechanical adjustment by the driver when seated in the c ar. 

5.8.5 Permitted Deviations: 

None 

5.8.6 Prohibited Modifications: 

a) Titanium is prohibited. 




b) Chromium plating of any steel suspension part is forbidden. 


c) Active suspensions are prohibited, as is any system that allows control of the main suspension spring rate, shock absorption and ride height 

when the car is moving. 

d) Multiple adjustable (more than 2 way) shock absorbers are not permitted. 

5.9 TRANSMISSIONS 

5.9.1 Permitted Modifications: 

a) Rear wheel drive only is permitted. 

b) The gearbox shall include an operable reverse gear capable of being engaged by the driver while normally seated and contain not more than 

5 forward gears. 

c) The gear ratios and final drive ratio are unrestricted. 


a) The differential cannot be modified in any way to limit its normal function. 

b) Torque biasing, limited slip and locked differentials are prohibited. 

c) Excessive shimming of the differential is prohibited. 

d) Non-ferrous differential components are prohibited. 

e) Electronic assisted gear change mechanisms, paddle change systems and electronically controlled differentials are prohibited. 

f) The use of automatic gearbox/gearbox operation is prohibited. 

g) Any method of providing traction and/or launch control, however derived (apart from direct driver input), is prohibited. 

5.10 ELECTRICS 

5.10.1 Exterior Lighting: At least one brake-light of minimum 21 watts rating (or equivalent) and one rear warning light shall be operable and visible from 

the rear of the car. The rear warning light shall meet the requirements of MSA regulation [K5.1 & K5.2]. There shall be a minimum gap of 5cm 

between the brake light and rear warning light, when viewed from the rear of the car. 

5.10.2 An onboard battery and driver operated onboard engine self-starter is mandatory. 

5.11 BRAKES 

a) Only one caliper per wheel is permitted. 

b) A maximum of 4 (four) pistons per caliper are permitted. 

c) Cooling of the calipers shall be by way of direct radiation of heat, from the caliper surface to the airstream. 

d) Ducting to provide airflow to the caliper, created by the forward motion of the car is permitted. All other methods of cooling are prohibited. 

e) The calipers used shall be available to all, and be as shown in the caliper manufacturers current catalogue. 

f) The main caliper body material may only be of a homogenous material, i.e. iron, steel or aluminium alloy. 


None 


No other material than iron or steel is permitted for brake discs. 

5.12 WHEELS/STEERING 

5.12.1 Permitted options: 

Unrestricted apart from 5.12.2 below. 

5.12.2 Prohibited options: 

Rear wheel steering is prohibited. 

5.12.3 Construction & materials: 

a) Steering: Material must be metal, with the exception of bushes, seals gaiters and dust covers 

b) Wheels: Material is unrestricted providing it is metal. 

5.12.4 Dimensions: 

5.13 TYRES 

a) Wheels: 13” diameter wheels with front rim width of 6” and rear rim width of 8” are the only wheel sizes permitted 

5.13.1 Specifications: Radial: Front: 160/520R13 Code N 2669 (Slick) N 2701 (Wet). Rear: 240/45VR13 Code N1803 (Slick) N 2045 (Wet). The use of uncut 

wets is prohibited. 

5.13.2 Nominated Manufacturers: The only permitted tyres are YOKOHAMA 

5.13.3 Proprietary Tyre Softening compounds and any other similar additive or treatment, designed to improve the performance of the tyre are prohibited. 

Any competitor found to be in breach of this regulation will be excluded from the championship. 

5.14 WEIGHTS 

5.14.1 Minimum weight must be the weight of the car in the condition at which it crosses the finishing line, or at any time during the competition and/or 

practice. 521Kg without the driver. No allowance given for topping-up of fluids 

5.15 FUEL TANK 

5.15.1 Fuel cells shall be isolated by means of bulkheads and be vented in case of spillage, leakage, or a failure of the cell such that fuel and fumes will 





not pass into the driver or engine compartment or around any part of the exhaust system. There shall be a liquid tight and fireproof bulkhead 

separating the fuel tanks from the cockpit. Metal tanks may be used if covered externally with a fireproof coating and are mounted within the main 

chassis structure. 

5.15.2 Locations: Free within MSA regulations. 

5.15.3 Fuel: Only pump fuel as defined in MSA Regulations Section B Nomenclature and Definitions [see Pump Fuel (a)] may be used. The use of power 

boosting or octane boosting additives by competitors in any fuel is prohibited. 

5.16 SILENCING 

5.16.1 Specification: As per MSA regulations [J5.17.1, J5.17.2, J5.17.7, J5.17.8 J5.18.1 to J5.18.5, J5.18.7 to J5.18.11 ]. 

5.17 NUMBERS AND CHAMPIONSHIP DECALS 

5.17.1 Competition numbers and backgrounds shall be displayed in accordance with the requirements of the Championship Organisers and MSA 

regulations. The numbers and backgrounds shall be of regulation size (see MSA Blue Book J.4.1) with number backgrounds conforming to the 

following colours: White background with black numbers. SRCC, Yokohama and sponsor decals must be affixed on both sides of the vehicle; 

failure to comply will render the car ineligible. 

5.17.2 Suppliers: Club and sponsor’s decals will be available at each round. 

5.18 TECHNICAL APPENDIX 

5.18.1 DEFINITIONS 

‘Turnkey Car’ Maximum Price £42000 (VAT Exclusive) 

‘Turnkey Car’: A pre-assembled, 2 seat sports racing car manufactured for first time use, to meet the technical regulations of the Xennia 

BIGprofile Sports 2000 Duratec Championship and all relevant sections of the MSA Blue Book, complete and ready to pass technical 

scrutineering and compete. 

The manufacturer is responsible for recording the basic specification of the ‘Turnkey Car’, by way of the ‘Duratec Submission Form’ and 

forwarding it for approval by the technical committee of the SRCC, who will record and hold this information for future reference and price cap 

compliance auditing. However, it is permissible to offer to the customer, at the time of order and at their own cost, upgrades and additions over 

and above this basic specification, in certain areas. It is mandatory that these upgrades and additions are not performance enhancing with the 

exception of instrumentation, where, data logging, although seen as having a primary role of performance improvement, is permissible within 

this ruling. In all cases, the decision as to whether an item is ‘performance enhancing’ will be made, following considerati on, by the Technical 

Committee of the SRCC and their decision will be final. 

The following areas are the only ones permissible to be considered with regard to upgrades and additions: 

i) Instrumentation 

ii) 

iii) 

iv) 

Bodywork 

Safety Equipment 

Wheels 

5.18.2 SRCC CONTROLLED PARTS 

PART 

PART NUMBER INFORMATION 

a) Inlet Manifold SRCC-IM1 Manufactured either by Scholar Race Engines (Part No.) or Jenvey Dynamics (Part no. MF09) 

b) Throttle Body (4) SRCC-TB1 Separate 45mm parallel bodies produced by Jenvey Dynamics (Part no. SF45/0/0) 

c) Air Horn (4) SRCC-AH1 40mm deep to suit 45mm Throttle Bodies. Produced by Jenvey Dynamics (part no. AH45x40) 

d) Fuel Injector (4) SRCC-FI1 Produced by Magneti Marelli (part no. 214300501011) Additionally marked "IW 058", 

d)i) Fuel Injector (4) inev6-412 Produced by Bosch 

e) ECU MBE967 Produced, calibrated and programmed by MBE Systems (or their designated agent), with 

calibration to SRCC-CAL1. 

e)i) ECU OMEX-SRCC Produced, calibrated and programmed by Omex Technology 

f) Clutch Cover Plate CP5905-1 Manufactured by AP Racing. No modifications permitted 

g) Clutch Driven Plate CP5352 Manufactured by AP Racing. No modifications permitted 

Alternate Driven Plate CP5351 Manufactured by AP Racing. No modifications permitted 

Alternate Driven Plate CP5354 Manufactured by AP Racing. No modifications permitted 

h) Wiring Loom SRCC-WL1 Approved engine management wiring harness manufactured by GRW Motorsport. 

i) h) Rear Aerofoil SRCC-RA1 Approved rear wing manufactured by Andream (01953 885775) Elite Carbon Fibre Ltd (07809 

390316). No modification permitted 





5.18.3 TECHNICAL INFORMATION AND DRAWINGS 

ITEM 

INFORMATION 

a) Crank Sensor Ford o.e. item positioned using Ford alignment gauge part no.1S7F 6D313 AA with engine at TDC no.1 

cylinder. set using Ford timing pin tool no.303-507 and crank pulley position checked by insertion of M6 

bolt through checking hole in pulley into threaded hole in timing cover. 

b) Camshaft Setting Camshaft angular position/timing is set in relation to crank position using Ford cam alignment tool 

no.303-376 and timing pin (TDC) tool no.303-507. 

c) Rear wheel centre points The centre of the axis, about which the rear wheels rotate, while the vehicle is travelling in a forward or 

rearwards direction. 

d) Reference Area The complete area situated between a vertical and transversal plane 25.8cm forward of the front axle 

centre-line and a vertical and transversal plane 27.5cm rearward of the rear axle centre-line and across 

the outside of the front and rear rims. 

27.5cm 

REAR AXLE CENTRE-LINE 

REFERENCE AREA 

FRONT AXLE CENTRE-LINE 

25.8cm 

e) Reference Zone An imaginary rectangular box situated between a vertical and transversal plane 25.8cm forward of the 

front axle centre-line and a vertical and transversal plane 115cm rearward of the rear axle centre-line, 

across the outside of the front and rear rims and to a height of 25.0cm above the ground plane, with 

the car at normal ride height. 

REAR 

FRONT 

115C 

M 

REFERENCE ZONE 

25.8C 

M 

6 APPENDICES 

6.1 Race Organising Clubs & Contacts: 

Sports 2000 Racing Car Club 

14 Stratford Road 

Sandy 

Beds 

SG19 2AB 

Tel: 01767689863 (eves) 

BRSCC HQ 



Borough Green 

Kent 

TN15 8JL 

Tel: 01732 780100 Fax: 01732 885783 

Tel: 01707 358666 (days) 

6.2 Commercial Undertakings: 

6.2.1 Vehicle Presentation: The presentation of the car is fundamental to the profile of the championship/series its sponsors and its audience. Therefore 

in considering whether to permit any car to race, and any point during the season, the organisers will regard as paramount the presentation of the 

car. In taking into account its appearance inherent in which is the standard of its presentation (including interior) they may exclude any car, which 

they consider may prejudice the reputation of the championship/series, or is otherwise unacceptable. This will include where the car is presented 

at a race event bearing accident damage sustained at a previous event and which has not been subject to the completion of an acceptable repair. 

Note: A Double Header can be regarded as one event for the purpose of this regulation. 

6.2.2 All competitors will park in a neat and tidy manner only in the areas allocated to them by the Race Organisers and will keep these areas clean and 

tidy at all times. Any competitor failing to obey the instructions of the Organisers or an Official of the Meeting in these matters, in regard to their 

location, amount of space utilised or manner, in which it is utilised, may be reported to the Clerk of Course who may impose any penalty 

considered appropriate. 


BIGprofile SPORTS 2000 PINTO CHAMPIONSHIP REGULATIONS 



SPORTS 2000 PINTO CHAMPIONSHIP 

SPORTING & TECHNICAL REGULATIONS 2013 

COVER PAGE & DOCUMENT CONTROL 

Issue Version: 

Linked Draft Version: 


Draft V6 

Originator: SRCC Technical Panel Date: 21/2/13 

Signed: Name: S Morris 

Approval: 

SRCC Championship 

Co-Ordinator 

Date: 21/2/13 

Signed: Name: H Williams 

This document is the property of Sports Racing Car Club (SRCC). It contains confidential 

information and may not be copied, or the information therein divulged to a third party, without 

the prior written consent of the Club. 

Page 1 of 10 The BIGprofile Sports 2000 Pinto Championship 2013 Issue: Published Copy




1. SPORTING REGULATIONS-GENERAL. 

1.1 TITLE & JURISDICTION: 

1.1.1 The BIGprofile Sports 2000 Championship is organised and administered by the Sports 2000 Racing Car Club (SRCC) in accordance with the 

General Regulations the Royal Automobile Club Motor Sports Association (incorporating the provisions of the International Sporting Code of the 

FIA) and these Championship Regulations. 

1.1.2 The Organisers reserve the right to issue additional statements clarifying items in the rules and regulations, and all such statements will be 

issued to all registered drivers by posting to the address detailed on the registration form (subject to MSA Regulation [D11.1.3]). 


Race Status: National B. 

MSA Championship Grade: D C 

1.2 OFFICIALS: 

1.2.1 Co-ordinator: Heidi Williams. 10 Reeves Close, Wheatstone, Leicestershire, LE8 6YG 

1.2.2 Eligibility Scrutineer: Jack McVicker Tel: 07957627776 e-mail: jack.m@virgin.net 

1.2.3 Championship Stewards: Bob Armstrong, Rick Smith, & Drew Furlong 

In the event of any of the Championship Stewards listed above being unavailable or being unable to consider 

any particular matter due to a perceived conflict of interest, the organisers reserve the right to appoint an 

alternative Championship Steward or, if deemed to be necessary, more than one alternative Championship 

Steward. 

1.2.4 Championship Clerk of 

Course: 

1.3 COMPETITOR ELIGIBILITY: 

1.3.1 

Barry Ashman. 28 Houting, Dosthill, Tamworth, Staffs, B77 1PA. Phone No (01827) 260408 

e-mail midland@brscc.co.uk 

Entrants must be fully paid up valid membership card holding members of the SRCC and in possession of valid 2012 2013 MSA Entrants 

Licences. 

1.3.2 Drivers and Entrant Drivers must be fully paid up valid membership card holding members of the SRCC, be registered for the Championship and 

be in possession of a valid MSA Competition (Racing) National (B) or above licences, or equivalent (MSA Regulation H.26.1.5) 

A competitor shall not take time off school to participate in motor sport without the prior written approval of their school. If participation in the 

Championship requires absence from school, Drivers in full time school education are required to have the approval of their h ead teacher and a 

letter stating such approval from his/her school in order to fulfil registration for the Championship. 

1.3.3 SRCC reserve the right to allow entry of a Celebrity / Development / Guest car at any event. Such drivers will be identified on the published 

SRCC entry list by the letter ‘G’ after the class identifier and the following articles of these regulations will not apply: 1.4; 1.6 & 1.7 (with the 

exception of 1.7.2) 

1.3. 4 All necessary documentation must be presented for checking at all rounds when signing-on. 

1.4 REGISTRATION: 

1.4.1 All drivers must register as competitors for the championship by returning the Registration Form with the Registration Fee to the General 

Secretary (SRCC) prior to the Final Closing date for the first round being entered. 

1.4.2 The Registration Fee is £190 made payable to The SRCC. 

1.4.3 Registrations will be accepted from Publication of these Regulations until the closing date for the last round of the Championship. 

1.4.4 Registration numbers will be the permanent Competition numbers for the Championship. 

1.5 CHAMPIONSHIP ROUNDS: 

The BIGprofile Sports 2000 Pinto Championship will be contested over 7 6 rounds at the following venues: 

ROUND DATE CIRCUIT INFORMATION 

1 April 27 th /28 th Silverstone GP Single race for combined Pinto, Historic & Duratec Championship 

classes. 

2 & 3 May 25 th Oulton Park International Double Header. Two races for combined Pinto, Historic and Duratec 


4 July 13 th /14 th Donington Park Single ‘standalone’ race for combined Pinto & Historic 


5 September 14th Donington Park Single ‘standalone’ race for combined Pinto & Historic 


6 October 26 th /27 th Brands Hatch Indy (FF Festival) Single ‘standalone’ race for combined Pinto & Historic 


1.6 SCORING: 

1.6.1 Points will be only be awarded to Championship Registered Competitors listed as classified finishers, in the Final Results as follows: For the 

Overall Pinto Championship - 1st-15; 2nd-14; 3rd-13; 4th-12; 5th-11; 6th-10; 7th-9; 8th-8; 9th-7; 10th-6; 11th-5; 12th-4; 13th-3; 14th-2; 15thand 

all other qualifiers-1 point. For Each Class (A, B & H) - 1st-15; 2nd-14; 3rd-13; 4th-12; 5th-11; 6th-10; 7th-9; 8th-8; 9th-7; 10th-6; 11th-5; 

12th-4; 13th-3; 14th-2; 15th- and all other qualifiers-1 point. Note: Overall and Class Championships are scored separately. 

1.6.2 The totals from all qualifying rounds run (less 1) will determine the final championship points and positions. 

1.6.3 Ties shall be resolved using the formula in MSA Regulation [W1.3.4] of the 2013 MSA Yearbook 

1.6.4 Should Where a combined race for the BIGprofile Sports 2000 Pinto, Historic and Duratec Championships be run is listed as a 

Championship Round in the regulations, the following shall apply: 

For Championship Rounds listed as a ‘Single Race’ there will be a single qualifying session, with the single combined grid based 

on the fastest qualifying times irrespective of championship. A single results sheet will be published but points will be awarded 

separately, in accordance with the individual championship regulations to cars competing in the BIGprofile Sports 2000 Pinto, 

Historic and Duratec Championships. Thus the first Duratec car to finish is awarded 15 points, the first Pinto car to finish is 

awarded 15 points and the first Historic car is awarded 15 points etc. 1.6.1 applies. car in each class will receive 15 points, the 

second car in each class 14 points, the third car in each class 13 points and so on down to 14 th receiving 2 points with all other 

qualifiers, 1 point. 



 



For Championship Rounds listed as a ‘Double Header’ there will be a single qualifying session, with the single combined 

grid based on the fastest qualifying times irrespective of championship, for race 1. Race 2 grid positions will be determined 

by the overall finishing order of race 1. Non finishers in race 1 will be allocated grid positions at the back of the grid and in 

order of non-finishing i.e. the first car to non-finish will be furthest back on the grid. A single results sheet will be published 

for each race and points will be awarded separately, in accordance with the individual championship regulations to cars 

competing in the BIGprofile Sports 2000 Pinto, Historic and Duratec Championships. Thus, in each race, the first Duratec 

car to finish is awarded 15 points, the first Pinto car to finish is awarded 15 points and the first Historic car is awarded 15 

points etc. 1.6.1 applies. 

1.6.5 If, after the publication of the Championship Regulations, for reasons of force majeure, it is necessary to combine races for Pinto, 

Historic & Duratec Championships that are listed on the calendar as ‘standalone races’, then 2 combined races will take place with a 

single qualifying session for race 1 and race 2 grid positions as per 1.6.4 ‘Double Header’. Each race will count as 50% of a 

championship round. Classified finishers will be awarded points separately, in accordance with the individual championship 

regulations (at half value) to cars competing in the BIGprofile Sports 2000 Pinto, Historic and Duratec Championships. Thus the first 

Duratec car to finish in each race, is awarded 7.5 points, the first Pinto car to finish in each race is awarded 7.5 points and the first 

Historic car to finish in each race is awarded 7.5 points, while the second Duratec car to finish is awarded 7 points and the second 

Pinto car to finish is awarded 7 points etc. Notification of necessary race combining will be made to all entered competitors by way of 

an ‘Event Bulletin’ 

1.7 AWARDS: 

1.7.1 All awards are to be provided by the Organising Club unless agreed otherwise. 

1.7.2 Per Round: Garlands to 1 st in each class. Trophies to 1 st , 2 nd ,and 3 rd overall and also in each Class. 

1.7.3 Championship: Trophies to 1 st , 2 nd , 3 rd , 4 th and 5 th in each Class. 

1.7.4 Bonuses: Per Round: Not applicable. Championship: Not applicable. 

1.7.5 Presentations: Garlands and Trophies are to be provided for presentation at the end of each race or at an end of the meeting presentation 

ceremony. Competitors shall be obliged to attend all prize giving ceremonies for which the race meeting and championship organisers advising 

notice of the dates, times and venues for the same in their final instructions or bulletins. Non attendance may result in a forfeit of Awards 

1.7.6 Entertainment Tax Liability: Not applicable. 

1.7.7 Title to all Trophies: In the event of any Provisional Results or Championship Tables being revised after any provisional presentations and such 

revisions affect the distribution of any awards the Competitors concerned must return such awards to the SRCC in good condition within 7days. 

2 SPORTING REGULATIONS – JUDICIAL PROCEDURES 

2.1 ROUNDS: In accordance with Section [C] of the 2012 current MSA Yearbook. 

2.2 CHAMPIONSHIP: In accordance with Section [C] of the 2012 current MSA Yearbook. 

3 SPORTING REGULATIONS - CHAMPIONSHIP RACE MEETINGS & RACE PROCEDURES 

3.1 ENTRIES: 

3.1.1 Competitors are responsible for sending in correct and complete entries with the correct entry fees prior to the entry closing dates as per the 

entry forms for each round. 

3.1.2 Incorrect or incomplete entries (including driver to be nominated entries) are to be held in abeyance until they are complete and correct and the 

date of receipt for acceptance of entry purposes shall be the date on which the Secretary of the Meeting receives the missing or corrected 

information or fee. 

3.1.3 Any withdrawal of Entry or Driver/Car changes made after acceptance of any entry must be notified to the Secretary of the Meeting in writing. If 

Driver/Vehicle changes are made after the publication of Entry Lists with Final Instructions, the Competitor concerned must apply for approval of 

acceptance by the Stewards of the Meeting BEFORE Signing-On. 

3.1.4 The maximum entry fee for each round shall be as per the Supplementary Regulations for each round. 

3.1.5 The SRCC General Secretary maintains a selection order list. Entries up to the maximum number permitted to practice will be s elected 

according to the list current on the closing day, the selection for the race will be made from these entries in order of receiving them. Any entries 

in excess of this will be treated as Reserves in order of their standing on the aforementioned list. If on the closing date, entries accepted in 

accordance with the above have reached or exceeded the maximum number permitted to practice, any further entries will be held in abeyance. 

3.1.6 Reserves are to be nominated on the Final List of Entries published with the Final Instructions or Amendment Sheet Bulletins. All Reserves will 

practice and replace withdrawn or retired entries in Reserve Number order irrespective of class subject to the provisions of 3.4. If Reserves are 

given Grid Places prior to issue of the first Grid Sheets for any round, the times set in Practice shall determine their grid positions. If Reserves 

are given places after the publication of the grid sheet and prior to cars being collected in the official 'Assembly Area' they will be placed at the 

rear of the grid and be started without any time delay. Otherwise, they will be held in the Pit lane and be released to start the race after the last 

car to start the GREEN FLAG LAP or last car to take the start has passed the startline or pit lane exit, whichever is the lat er. Such approval to 


3.2 BRIEFINGS: Organisers should notify Competitors of the times and locations for all briefings in the Final Instructions for the meetings. 

Competitors must attend all briefings, which are mandatory. 

3.2.1 The Clerk of the Course may impose a fine as detailed in MSA [Appendix 1 13.6] (ii) on any competitor who fails to attend, or who reports late at, 

a scheduled driver’s briefing. 

3.3 PRACTICE: 

3.3.1 The minimum period of practice to be 20 minutes subject to the provisions of MSA Regulation [Q4.5]. Should any practice session be disrupted, 

the Clerk of the Course shall not be obliged to resume the session or re-run sessions to achieve the championship criteria and the decision of 

the Clerk of the Course shall be final. 

3.3.2 Should the need arise to stop any practice, RED LIGHTS will be switched on at the Start Line and RED FLAGS will be displayed at the Start 

Line and at all other Marshal signalling points around the circuit. This is the signal for all drivers to cease circulating at racing speeds, to slow to 

a safe and reasonable pace and return to the pit lane unless directed by officials, not to do so. 

3.4 QUALIFICATION: Each driver should complete a minimum of 3 laps practice in the car to be raced and in the correct session in order to qualify 

for selection and order of precedence as set out in the MSA regulations [Q4.5]. The Clerk of the Course and/or Stewards of the Meeting shall 

have the right to exclude any driver whose practice times or driving are considered to be unsatisfactory - as per MSA Regulation [Q4.5.3]. 





3.5 RACES: 

3.5.1 The standard minimum scheduled race distance shall be 25 minutes. Should any race distance be reduced at the discretion of the Clerk of the 

Course or Stewards of the Meeting, it shall still count as a full points-scoring round. 

3.6 STARTS: 

3.6.1 All race start countdowns are to have a minimum elapsed period of 3 minutes from the time all cars are released to form up on the grid to the 

start of the Green Flag Lap(s) in the formation as specified on the Track Licence for each circuit. 

3.6.2 The minimum countdown procedures/audible warnings sequence shall be - 1 minute to start of Green Flag/Pace Lap - Start Engines/Clear Grid. 

30 seconds-Visible and audible warning for start of Green Flag/Pace Lap. 


3.6.4 Any cars removed from the grid after the 1 minute stage or driven into the pits on the Green Flag Lap shall be held in the pit lane and may start 

the race after the last car to take the start from the grid has passed the startline or pit exit lane whichever is the later. 

3.6.5 Any drivers unable to start the Green Flag/Pace lap or start are required to indicate their situation as per MSA regulation [Q12.13.2] and any 

drivers unable to maintain grid positions on the Green Flag Lap to the extent that ALL other cars are ahead of them, may comp lete the Green 

Flag Lap but MUST remain at the rear of the last row of the grid but ahead of any cars to be started with a time delay. 

3.6.6 Excessive weaving to warm-up tyres - using more than 50% of the track width, and falling back in order to accelerate and practice starts, is 

prohibited. 

3.6.7 A five second board will be used to indicate that the grid is complete The red lights will be switched on five seconds after the board is withdrawn. 

All cars will start racing when the red start light(s) are extinguished. In the event of any starting lights failure the Starter will revert to the use of 

the National flag. 

3.7 RACE STOPS: 

3.7.1 Should the need arise to stop any race, RED LIGHTS will be switched on at the Startline and RED FLAGS will be displayed at th e Startline and 

at all Marshals Signalling Points around the circuit. This is a signal for all drivers to cease circulating at racing speeds, to slow to a safe and 

reasonable pace and to return to the starting grid area, which will automatically become a Parc Ferme area. Cars may not enter the Pits unless 

directed to do so. Work on cars already in the Pits must cease when a race is stopped. 

3.7.2 Case A – Less than two laps completed by Race leader. 

The Race will be null and void. The race will restart from the original grid positions. Competitors unable to take the restart may be replaced by 

reserves who will start from the back of the grid in reserve order. Gaps on the grid should not be closed up. The length of the restarted race will 

be determined by the Clerk of the Course. 

3.7.3 Case B – More than two laps completed by Race Leader but less than 75% 

The Race will restart from a grid set out by the finishing order of part one (as per MSA Regulation [Q5.4.2]). The result of the race will be the 

finishing order at the end of part two. The length of the restarted race will be determined by the Clerk of the Course. 

3.7.4 If the leader has completed more than 75% of the race distance or duration it shall not be re-started and the results will be declared in 

accordance with MSA Regulation [Q5.4.3] unless the Clerk of the Course, in consultation with the Stewards deem it appropriate to restart the 

race. 

3.8 RE-SCRUTINY: All vehicles reported involved in contact incidents during races or practice must be re-presented to the Scrutineers before 

continuing in the races or practice. 

3.9 PITS AND PITLANE SAFETY: 

3.9.1 Pits: Entrants must ensure that the MSA, Circuit Management and Organising Club Safety Regulations are complied with at all times. 

3.9.2 Pitlane: The outer lane or lanes are to be kept unobstructed to allow safe passage of cars at all times. The onus shall be on all Dri vers to take 

all due care and drive at minimum speeds in pit lanes. 

3.9.3 Refuelling: May only be carried out in accordance with the MSA [Q13] Regulations, Circuit Management Regulations and the SRs or Final 

Instructions issued for each Circuit/Meeting. 

3.9.4 There will be a speed limit of 60 kph within the marked pit lane that will be checked by radar. You may be penalised for exceeding that speed. 

3.10 RACE FINISHES: After taking the chequered flag drivers are required to: - Progressively and safely slow down, remain behind any competitors 

ahead of them, return to the Pit lane Entrance/Paddock Entrance as instructed, comply with any directions given by Marshals or Officials and to 

keep their helmets on and harnesses done up while on the circuit or in the pit lane. NB. After taking the finish all drivers are to take their cars 

directly to the Scrutineering Bay. The only exception is when they are directed to the award presentation area, by a race official. These cars will 

be taken directly to the Scrutineering Bay after the presentations without interference from any person. Competitors who fail to comply will be 

reported to the Clerk of Course. 

3.11 RESULTS: All Practice Timesheets, Grid Sheets and Race Results are to be deemed PROVISIONAL until all vehicles are released by 

Scrutineers after Post Practice/Race Scrutineering and/or after completion of any Judicial or Technical procedures. 

3.12 TIMING MODULES 

3.12.1 All competitors are required to purchase and fit an approved Electronic Self Identification Module (transponder) to their cars for the purposes of 

accurate timing. It is the responsibility of the competitor to fit these to car in the position and manner specified by the supplier/timing Company. 

The Modules must be in place and functioning correctly for all Championship qualifying practice sessions and races. The setting and servicing of 

these items must only be carried out by properly authorised MSA licensed Timekeepers. Competitors are liable for any replacement of the 

Modules, due to misuse or loss. 

3.12.2 Competitors may not place electronic timing equipment within 5 metres of the official start, finish or any other official timing lines at any event or 

test session/day. Any such equipment placed within these zones will be removed. 

3.13 QUALIFICATION RACES: Not Applicable 

3.14 OPERATION OF SAFETY CAR: 

3.14.1 The Safety Car will be brought into operation and run in accordance with Section Q Appendix 2 of the MSA General Regulations. 

4. CHAMPIONSHIP RACE PENALTIES: 

4.1 INFRINGEMENT OF TECHNICAL REGULATIONS: 

4.1.1 Arising from post-practice Scrutineering or Judicial Action: Minimum Penalty: The provisions of MSA Regulations: [C3.3]. 





4.1.2 Arising from post-race Scrutineering or Judicial Action: Minimum Penalty: The provisions of MSA Regulations: [C3.5.1 (a) & (b)]. 

4.1.3 For infringements deemed to be of a more serious nature the Clerk of the Course may invoke the provisions of Regulation [C3.5.1 (c)]. 

4.2 INFRINGEMENTS OF NON-TECHNICAL MSA REGULATIONS AND THE SPORTING REGULATIONS ISSUED FOR THE CHAMPIONSHIP: 

1) As per 2012 current MSA Judicial Procedure Regulations. If excluded the driver shall count that event as one of the point scoring 

rounds counting to his total championship score. 

2) In order to maintain standards of conduct, the Championship Coordinator will monitor all Officials/Observers reports of adverse 

behaviour at race meetings. If any individual included on two such reports during one racing season he/she will receive written 

warning from the Championship Coordinator that his/her driving/behaviour is to be specifically observed at future race meetings. 

Any adverse reports during this period of observation could result in official MSA action and will result in a Championship Stewards’ 

enquiry, with possible loss of Championship points and refusal of further race entries. 

3) The Clerk of the Course and/or Stewards of the Meeting may apply other penalties, such as ‘Stop and Go or Drive Through’ during 

races as deemed applicable. 

5 TECHNICAL REGULATIONS 

5.1 INTRODUCTION: 

The following Technical regulations are set out in accordance with the MSA specified format. Vehicles must be in compliance with MSA General 

Technical & Safety Regulations as per [J, K & Q] as appropriate. It should be clearly understood that if the following texts do not clearly specify 

that you can do it you should work on the principle that you cannot. The Eligibility Scrutineer may seal engines and transmissions at any time 

during the racing season for later inspection. At the time of the inspection, a member of the SRCC Technical Committee may accompany the 

Eligibility Scrutineer. 

5.1.1 Scrutineering: The official MSA Eligibility Scrutineer or his appointed deputy will be attending rounds of the championship and he is available to 

provide advice as well as ensuring that the regulations are strictly enforced to ensure fair play. 

5.1.2 To allow for the use of scrutineer’s wire seals, certain components must have the heads of 2 adjacent securing bolts or the joint flange in 2 

opposite locations, cross-drilled. The cross drilling will leave a through hole of 1.6mm minimum diameter. The components that must be made 

ready for sealing are: Cam Cover. Sump. Differential Side Plates. Inlet Manifold (To Head) Carburettor (To Inlet Manifold). Failure to comply 

renders the engine ineligible. MSA Regulation J3.1.5 and J3.1.6 applies 

5.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION: 

5.2.1 The BIGprofile Sports 2000 Pinto Championship is for competitors participating in open Cockpit 2-seater rear engine sports racing car using 

standard Ford 2000 cc single overhead camshaft ‘Pinto’ engine with 2-venturi carburettor. Sports 2000 is a restricted class. Therefore any 

allowable modifications, changes or additions are as stated herein. There are no exceptions. IF IN DOUBT, DON’T. Cars will run in 3 classes: 

5.2.2 Class A is for all cars manufactured after 31/12/86. Class B is for cars manufactured after 31/12/82 but before 31/12/86. Class H is for cars 

built before 31/12/82 and complying with the current SRCC Sports 2000 Historic Championship regulations. Cars competing in classes B and H 

must be in the specification for such cars in their original year of manufacture. No updating beyond such specification or other modification is 

permitted except that classes B and H cars may be updated or modified to accord with the latest specification attained by identical models in 

their year of manufacture, provided that year is still within the relevant class dates. For example, a car manufactured in J anuary 1983 may be 

updated to the specification of the same model that was still being produced in December 1985. The onus of proof shall be with the 

competitor/entrant. The SRCC will implement an approved Vehicle Identification Paper/Logbook for Class H (Historic) Sports 2000 cars during 

the 2012 championship season and Pinto Classes A & B Sports 2000 cars, during the 2013 championship season. 

5.2.3 Where a hybrid car, utilising parts from different sources (e.g. chassis from one car. body from another) is entered, the year of manufacture of 

the later donor car will be used for the purpose of determining in which class the car shall run. Those major components (e.g. chassis, 

suspension, brakes, gearbox) used from the donor car must conform to 5.2.2 regarding original specification. Hybrid cars are not eligible for 

class H. 

5.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: 

The following Articles of MSA Regulations Section K will apply: - K1 to K1.5.2, K1.6.2, K1.6.4, K1.6.5, K 1.6.6, K1.7, K1.8,K2.1, K2.1.3, K2.1.4, 

K2.1.6 TO K2.1.10, K2.3, K3, K3.1, K3.1.2(a) or K3.1.3, K3.1.6 to K3.5, K5.1, K5.2, K6, K7.1 TO K7.4, K8.1, K8.3, K8.4, K8.5, K9.1 to K9.3, 

K10.1 TO K10.4, K11.1 to K11.3, K13, K14.1 to K14.3 

5.4 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS & EXCEPTIONS: 

5.5 CHASSIS: 

5.5.1 Unrestricted except that the use of carbon fibre composite structural materials is prohibited. No engine oil or water tubes are permitted within 

the cockpit. The engine will be mounted upright and aligned fore and aft in the chassis. 

5.5.2 It is the intent of these rules to minimise the use of ground effects to achieve aerodynamic down force on the vehicle. 

i) The chassis and body surfaces, which comprise the underside of the car, shall not deviate from a flat plane by more than 2.5c m or 1”. 

This deviation may not be used to create an aerodynamic device. 

ii) The underside of the car is defined as being within the reference area as per 5.18.1 a) 

iii) The underside of the car (Z0 plane) must incorporate a rectangular rigid surface of minimum 142.24cm measured across the vehicle by 

minimum 91.44cm measured along the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, which must extend to the full width of the body. 

iv) There must be no aerodynamic devices that are considered ‘downforce generating’ situated in the reference zone defined in 5.18.1 b) 

5.5.3 There must be no stressed part (centre spine/chassis divider/stiffening panel) in the longitudinal section of the chassis structure, between the 

steering wheel and the seat back and inside of the driver/passenger space, that exceeds in height, 30cm (11.8") above the lowest point of the 

chassis, with the exception of the requirements of driver lateral head restraint (5.5.5). (The lowest point of the chassis is described as the 

underside of the chassis/ZO plane) 

5.5.4 It is permitted to fit, between the driver/passenger space, a central removable longitudinal support, maximum cross section 750mm 2 only for the 

purpose of supporting a lateral head restraint. This support must be removable without the use of tools so as not to hinder driver egress. 

5.5.5 Space for 2 seats shall be provided each of at least 40cm (15.75”) width and shall be positioned symmetrically about the vehicle’s longitudinal 

axis. There shall be at least 25cm (9.9”) wide foot space for the driver measured at the pedals. The passenger space should provide as much 

seat space, elbowroom, foot and legroom in terms of length, width and height as that of the driver space. Battery boxes and fire extinguishers 

are permitted in the passenger seat area. 

5.6 BODYWORK INCLUDING SPOILERS. 

i) The body shall provide a cockpit for 2 seats and cover all mechanical components including wheels and suspension members (see 5.6ii) 

except for the exhaust pipe, induction system and camshaft cover which may protrude through the engine cover. 





ii) Forward of the main rollbar the bodywork must not allow mechanical components to be seen when viewed from any orthogonal direction 

relative to the chassis major X, Y & Z axes. The exception to this would be any part visible through apertures in the road wheel. 

iii) The bodywork shall project over the complete wheels in such a way as to cover at least one third of their circumference and their entire width. 

Reference MSA Regulation [J5.2.6 ] 

iv) Between the front and rear axle lines the body shall: 

a) Maintain over a minimum of 70% of the length of the wheelbase a minimum vertical height (measured from the lowest point of th e chassis), of 

20cm (7.9”) when viewed from the side, and when viewed from above, a minimum body width exceeding the greatest overall width across the 

tyres less 15cm (5.9”). 

b) Exceed in height the top of the tyres over a width of 50cm (19.7”) excepting only cockpit and engine openings. There shall be no gap 

between the main body and the wheel arches. 

c) The bodywork forward of the main rollbar must be symmetrical about the car's longitudinal centre-line. An exception is allowed whereby a 

cockpit air deflector/windscreen is permitted. Additionally, within the context of this sub-section, any cooling radiator is not considered as part 

of the bodywork. 

iii) The cockpit opening seen in plan view shall be symmetrical about the longitudinal axis of the car and shall be large enough f or a horizontal 

rectangle of 80cm (31.5”) by 40cm (15.75”) to be passed through with its minor axis aligned with the vehicle’s longitudinal axis. Any driver 

head restraint fitted which is wholly removable without the use of tools, may be so removed before the application of the cockpit opening 

template. 

iv) All ducted air for heat exchangers (water/oil) and brakes shall pass through those heat exchangers or onto those brakes. 

v) Maximum vehicle length forward of the front axle centreline: 91.5cm (36”) (including spoilers), the maximum vehicle length rearward of the 

rear axle centreline: 115cm (45.5”) (including spoilers) 

vi) Spoilers mounted at the front of the vehicle are permitted. Those spoilers may only be adjusted in a horizontal plane. 

vii) Spoilers mounted at the rear of the vehicle are permitted. Those spoilers may only be adjusted in a plane that is vertical or ±20º of vertical. 

viii) Windscreens are optional. 


1. General: None in contravention of 5.6.2 below. 

2. Interior: None in contravention of 5.6.2 below. 

3. Exterior: Spoilers mounted at the rear of the vehicle may include a gurney lip/stiffening fold not exceeding 10mm when viewed from above. 

4. Silhouette: None in contravention of 5.6.2 below. 

5. Ground Clearance: Cars must comply with MSA regulation [J5.20.11]. 

5.6.2 Modifications Prohibited: 

1. General: The body above the chassis level in the region of the cockpit shall not be reinforced in any way that would complic ate or hinder the 

rescue of the driver. 

2. Interior: No engine oil or water tubes are permitted within the cockpit. 

3. Exterior: Spoilers shall not contravene the maximum vehicle length as defined in 5.6.v) of these regulations, at any time. There must be no 

gap between their surfaces, or any other spoiler, and the main bodywork. No bodywork/diffuser extension of the underside panel, or support 

structure for the floor that may be considered to aid down force, is allowed between the inside faces of the rear wheels, from a vertical plane 

connecting the rear wheel centre points, to the rear extremity of the car. The rear wheel centre points are defined as ‘The centre of the axis, 

about which the rear wheels rotate, while the vehicle is travelling in a forward or rearwards direction’. 

4. Silhouette: Maximum height with driver on board excluding safety rollover bar and mirrors shall not exceed at any time 90cm (35.4”) 

measured from the ground. 

5. Ground Clearance: See 5.6.1.5 above 

5.7 ENGINE 

5.7.1 Modifications Permitted: Where Ford Motor Co are no longer able to supply replacement parts, it is acceptable, within these rules, to use parts 

from other sources so long as they are direct replacements, do not increase the engine performance and have been approved by the SRCC 

Technical Committee. A direct replacement, in these rules, means the part, and any sub components within the part, will be dimensionally within 

the original Ford drawing tolerances and otherwise would conform to the relevant Ford material and test specifications. The only permitted engine 

is the Ford 2 litre single overhead camshaft ‘Pinto’ engine. 

a) Cylinder bores may be increased in size by no more than a + 0.5mm rebore on the standard 90.84mm, with a bore size wear allowance of 

0.1mm, giving a maximum bore size of 91.44mm. Max capacity not to exceed 2025 CCs. Stroke 77.050 max – 76.850 min mm. 

b) A standard crankshaft shall be used. Spot machining to achieve balance is permitted. Tuftriding, Parkerizing, shot peening, shot blasting and 

polishing are permitted. Minimum weight is 12.47Kgs (27.5lbs). Standard oversize and undersize bearings are permitted. This does not 

allow reducing the bearing surface area by reducing the width of standard bearings. 

c) The flywheel shall be a standard Ford production item for the 2000cc SOHC ‘Pinto’ engine. The clutch may be a standard unit or an AP 

Cover plate assembly CP2511-1 with driven plate CP5351-1. Machining to achieve minimum weight and balance is permitted. Flywheel bolts 

are free and locating dowels are permitted. A Ford ‘Kent’ 1600 GT starter ring may be fitted. Minimum weight of flywheel and clutch 

assembly with cover-plate to flywheel bolts but excluding flywheel to crankshaft bolts and dowels, 13Kgs. 

d) Maximum compression ratio will be controlled as follows: - 

i) Minimum cylinder head combustion chamber volume 50cc (not including head gasket). Polishing and/or grinding of the cylinder head to 

achieve only the required combustion chamber volume is permitted. 

ii) Standard Ford gasket minimum compressed thickness 0.9mm. Minimum diameter of cylinder aperture 92mm. 

iii) Pistons shall not protrude above the cylinder block surface at TDC. 

e) Pistons must be the standard Ford component for this engine or absolutely identical aftermarket production pistons, unmodified in any way 

except for balancing as follows: - To achieve balance material may be removed from the internal surfaces at any location below the lowest 

point of the gudgeon pin. All external surfaces, dimensions and profiles must remain standard for the nominal size of piston being used, with 

the exception of the top surface of the piston crown which may be subjected to simple machining to achieve balance and the objectives of the 

above clause regarding compression ratio. Minimum permitted weight of piston complete with rings, gudgeon pin and standard F ord 

connecting rod with bolts and without bearings = 1255 grams. All 3 piston rings shall be fitted. Compression rings and scraper second ring s 

shall be one-piece single homogeneous material type with conventional plain gaps. Chromium or molybdenum plating of the top ring is 

optional; oil control rings shall be either single piece twin land type or apex 3 piece (2 rails and an expander). 

f) Connecting rods shall be standard Ford parts. Alternate connecting rod and big end bolt assembly part no. M6200C200 are perm itted. ARP 

big end bolts part no. ARPBE03 are permitted. 

g) Machining is permitted to remove metal from the balancing bosses to achieve balance only. In addition the outside diameter of the small end 

forging may be machined around to the shank blends only. The rod shank may not be machined. Tuftriding, Parkerizing shot peening, shot 

blasting, polishing etc. are permitted. It is permitted to radius the area around the big end cap retaining bolts. 

h) Inlet and exhaust valves may be Ford OE or aftermarket items as long as the valve is dimensionally identical to the original Ford 

drawing, and is of similar mass to the OE part. Valves shall remain standard. No re-profiling or polishing is permitted. The original 45° 

seat angle shall be maintained. Maximum face diameter inlet is 42.2mm Maximum face diameter exhaust 36.2mm Maximum valve stem 

diameter 8.4mm. Overall length, inlet 111.15mm (±0.5mm). Overall length, exhaust 110.55mm (±0.5mm). 





i) It is permissible to reshape inlet and exhaust ports by removal of metal within limits. Addition of material in any form is prohibited. The 

maximum diameter of inlet port at manifold head face 39.5mm. Maximum dimension of exhaust port at manifold face 35.5mm x 27m m. The 

distance between the valve centres and the angles of all the valves shall not be altered. 

j) The only permitted camshafts and rockers are the standard Ford production items for the 2000cc SOHC ‘Pinto’ engine (which shall be fully 

manufactured and ground by the Ford Motor Co. and have the following Finis codes: Camshaft-1584660 Camshaft/follower kit-5004836) or 

the SRCC approved alternate camshaft kit (details to be confirmed by Championship Bulletin) The camshaft and rockers shall remain entirely 

unmodified. Offset keys are permitted. Vernier pulleys are permitted. It is prohibited to grind from blanks, regrind or re-profile. Tuftriding or 

Parkerizing is permitted. Maximum valve lift at determined points by camshaft rotation will be established by the use of low rate substitute 

valve spring (load characteristics 12lbs at 1.417” and 30lbs at 1.000”) with zero tappet clearance. Camshaft duration (profile) and Inlet to 

Exhaust lobe timing interval may be checked against Ford data, initially by the use of a profile gauge and secondly by an appointed specialist, 

if deemed necessary. 

k) Maximum valve lift against cam angle with zero tappet clearance (lift measured in mms) 

Inlet 

Exhaust 

0 

5 

10 

15 

20 

30 

40 

45 

50 

60 

70 

80 

90 

Angle Opening Closing Opening Closing 

10.442 10.442 10.442 10.442 

10.36 10.36 10.36 10.36 

10.11 10.11 10.11 10.11 

9.69 9.69 9.69 9.69 

9.11 9.11 9.11 9.11 

7.45 7.45 7.45 7.45 

5.17 5.17 5.17 5.17 

3.86 3.86 3.86 3.86 

2.58 2.59 2.58 2.59 

.81 .86 .81 .86 

.43 .54 .43 .54 

.19 .37 .19 .37 

.01 .20 .01 .20 

l) It is permitted as a means of repair to replace damaged valve seats and cylinder bores by replacement cast iron valve seat inserts and cast 

iron cylinder liners. Valve guides may be replaced with cast iron or bronze all to standard dimensions. Holes left by the removal of nonstandard 

external oilways shall be mechanically plugged. 

m) Balancing of reciprocating and rotating parts is permitted only by removal of metal from locations so provided by the manufacturer. 

n) Non-standard rocker covers are permitted provided they in no way improve the performance of the engine. 

o) Standard valve spring retainers shall be used and single valve springs only are permitted. Shims are permitted and valve spr ings are 

otherwise free. 

p) Gaskets and seals are unrestricted except for cylinder head gasket, carburettor to inlet manifold gasket and inlet manifold to head gasket 

which must be dimensionally identical and of a similar type to original Ford gaskets for this engine. 

q) Pump, fan and generator drive pulleys are unrestricted. The crank case breather may be altered or removed but all breathers shall discharge 

into a catch tank. Mechanical tachometer drives may be fitted. 

r) Localised machining of the cylinder block is permitted to allow fitting of a dry sump system. 

5.7.2 Modifications Prohibited: Any not specifically permitted in 5.7.1. The addition of material by any means to any component is prohibited. Only 

modifications or additions specifically covered by these regulations are permitted. All engine components not covered by these regulations shall 

remain completely standard and unmodified. 

5.7.3 Location: Engine must be mounted upright and aligned fore and aft in the chassis. 

5.7.4 Oil/Water cooling: The lubrication system, external to the engine, is free. Existing standard production oilways, linings or oil grooves may be 

enlarged or reduced, but no additional ones are permitted. Standard friction surfaces must remain unchanged. Dry sump is permitted, oil coolers 

are free. A liquid cooling system is mandatory but the radiator is unrestricted. The radiator if housed in or incorporating a cowl air scoop deflector 

shall comply with body regulations. The water pump must stay in the standard Ford position and be belt driven from the engine crankshaft. 

5.7.5 Induction System: A single carburettor only will be used on a standard inlet manifold. The carburettor will be a Weber 32/36 DGV 26/27mm 

venturi. Its origin, being from a 1600 GT Kent or 2000 SOHC ‘Pinto’ engine. The air cleaner may be removed and a trumpet fitted, and the jets 

may be changed, both throttles may open together. Cold start devices and diffuser bar may be removed. Internal and external anti-surge pipes 

may be fitted and seals on emission control carburettors may be removed. No other modifications are permitted. Chokes (Venturi) shall remain 

standard and no polishing or profiling is permitted. For clarification of permitted carburettor modifications see SRCC Technical Bulletin 

TB003-11 which is summarised at art. 5.18.1d) Only the standard inlet manifold shall be used. The ports may be reshaped by the removal of 

metal as long as the following dimensions are maintained: maximum size at head face = 1.437” (36.5mm), maximum size at carburettor flange = 

3.405” (86.5mm) x 1.595” (40.5mm). The carburettor seat face may be machined to horizontal in the fore to aft plane. The di ameter of the ports 

may exceed the above listed dimensions if the casting bore is untouched and in its original state. The water passages in the inlet manifold may be 

plugged. Holes in the inlet manifold resulting from the removal of emission/vacuum lines shall be plugged. 

5.7.6 Exhaust systems: Exhaust systems and manifold are unrestricted but must comply with MSA regulations J5.16.1 to J5.16.6. 

5.7.7 Ignition System: Distributors are unrestricted providing they retain the original drive and location. The distributor is defined as the component 

which triggers the LT current and distributes the HT current. The ignition timing may only be varied by vacuum and/or mechan ical means. A rev 

limiter is permitted. No engine management system is permitted. Only ignition systems that use only one trigger, inside the distributor or external, 

to initiate the low-tension current will be permitted. Any system that requires more than one sensor or input to provide another signal/voltage for 

any electronic/microprocessor control system will not be permitted. 

5.7.8 Fuel delivery system: Only the standard mechanical fuel pump for the engine is permitted. 


5.8.1 All cars shall be fitted with sprung suspension between the wheels and the chassis. Suspension must be controlled to avoid fouling of wheels on 

chassis or bodywork. The springing medium must not consist solely of bolts located through flexible bushes or mountings. 

5.8.2 All parts shall be of steel or ferrous material with the exception of hubs, hub adapters, hub carriers, uprights, bearings and bushes, bell-cranks, 

pivot blocks and bushes, spring caps and platforms, abutment nuts and anti-roll bar links. Springs, steel only. It is not permitted to control body roll 

with additional shock absorbers. 

5.8.3 SHOCK ABSORBERS: Class A - The shock absorber casing is free. They can be ferrous or light alloy units and separate reservoirs for fluid and/or 

gas are permitted. Class B - The shock absorber casing shall be steel or other ferrous material (See 5.18.1c). Separate reservoirs for fluid and/or 

gas are permitted. Class H - The shock absorber casing shall be steel or other ferrous material (See 5.18.1c). Separate reservoirs for fluid and/or 

gas are not permitted. All Classes - The shock absorber casing is defined as the item which contains the piston, fluid/gas, and moving parts which 

control the damping action as well as the cylinder closing cap, and the upper and lower mounting eyes/rods. Any form of active damping is 




prohibited. Any method of altering the damper performance by the driver whilst seated in the car is prohibited 


5.8.4 Anti-roll bars for front and/or rear suspension may be capable of manual, mechanical adjustment by the driver when seated in the c ar. 

5.8.5 Permitted Deviations: 

None 


a) Titanium is prohibited. 

b) Chromium plating of any steel suspension part is forbidden. 

c) Active suspensions are prohibited, as is any system that allows control of the main suspension spring rate, shock absorption and ride height 

when the car is moving. 

d) Multiple adjustable (more than 2 way) shock absorbers are not permitted. 

5.9 TRANSMISSIONS 

5.9.1 Permitted Modifications: The gearbox shall include an operable reverse gear capable of being engaged by the driver while normally seated and 

contain not more than 4 forward gears. The ratios are unrestricted. 

5.9.2 Prohibited Modifications: The differential cannot be modified in any way to limit its normal function. Torque biasing, limited slip an d lock 

differentials are prohibited. Excessive shimming of the differential is prohibited. Non-ferrous differential components are prohibited. Electronic 

assisted gear change mechanisms and electronically controlled differentials are prohibited. The use of automatic and/or sequ ential gearbox is 

prohibited. 

5.9.3 Transmission & drive ratios: Rear wheel drive only is permitted. Final drive ratio is unrestricted. 


5.10.1 Exterior Lighting: At least one brake-light of minimum 21 watts rating (or equivalent) and one rear warning light shall be operable and visible from 

the rear of the car. The rear warning light shall meet the requirements of MSA regulation [K5.1 & K5.2]. There shall be a minimum gap of 5cm 

between the brake light and rear warning light, when viewed from the rear of the car. 

5.10.2 An onboard battery and driver operated onboard engine self-starter is mandatory. 

5.10.3 Generators: Generators are optional. 

5.11 BRAKES 

a) Only one caliper per wheel is permitted. 

b) A maximum of 4 (four) pistons per caliper are permitted. 

c) Cooling of the calipers shall be by way of direct radiation of heat, from the caliper surface to the airstream. 

d) Ducting to provide airflow to the caliper, created by the forward motion of the car is permitted. All other methods of cooling are prohibited. 

e) The calipers used shall be available to all, and be as shown in the caliper manufacturers’ current catalogue. 

f) No other material than iron or steel is permitted for brake discs. 


a) Class A: The main caliper body material may only be of a homogenous material, i.e. iron, steel or aluminium alloy. 

b) Class A, B and H: Calipers fitted as original equipment to the cars, but no longer listed as a current product and complying to 5.2 of these 

regulations, are permitted. The onus of proof shall be with the competitor/entrant. 


a) Class B and H - Light alloy brake calipers are prohibited. 

5.12 WHEELS/STEERING 

5.12.1 Permitted options: Unrestricted apart from 5.12.2 below. 

5.12.2 Prohibited options: Rear wheel steering is prohibited. 

5.12.3 Construction & materials: 

a) Steering: Material must be metal, with the exception of bushes, seals gaiters and dust covers 

b) Wheels: Material is unrestricted providing it is metal. 

5.12.4 Dimensions: 

a) Wheels: 13” diameter wheels with front rim width of 6” and rear rim width of 8” are the only wheel sizes permitted 

5.13 TYRES 

5.13.1 Specifications: Radial: Front: 160/520R13 Code N 2669 (Slick) N 2701 (Wet). Rear: 240/45VR13 Code N1803 (Slick) N 2045 (Wet). The use of 

un-cut wets is prohibited. 

5.13.2 Nominated Manufacturers: The only permitted tyres are YOKOHAMA 

5.13.3 Proprietary tyre softening compounds and any other similar additive or treatment, designed to improve the performance of the tyre are prohibited. 

Any competitor found to be in breach of this regulation will be excluded from the championship. 

5.14 WEIGHTS 

5.14.1 Minimum weight must be the weight of the car in the condition at which it crosses the finishing line, or at any time during the competition and/or 

practice. 506Kg without the driver. No allowance given, for topping-up of fluids. 

5.15 FUEL TANK 

5.15.1 Fuel cells shall be isolated by means of bulkheads and be vented in case of spillage, leakage, or a failure of the cell such that fuel and fumes will 

not pass into the driver or engine compartment or around any part of the exhaust system. There shall be a liquid tight and fireproof bulkhead 

separating the fuel tanks from the cockpit. Metal tanks may be used if covered externally with a fireproof coating and are mounted within the main 

chassis structure. 

5.15.2 Locations: Free within MSA regulations. 

5.15.3 Fuel: Only pump fuel as defined in MSA Regulations Section B Nomenclature and Definitions [see Pump Fuel (a)] may be used. The use of power 

boosting or octane boosting additives by competitors in any fuel is prohibited. 





5.16 SILENCING 

5.16.1 Specification: As per MSA regulations [J5.17.1, J5.17.2, J5.17.7, J5.17.8 J5.18.1 to J5.18.5, J5.18.7 to J5.18.11 ]. 

5.17 NUMBERS AND CHAMPIONSHIP DECALS 

5.17.1 Competition numbers and backgrounds shall be displayed in accordance with the requirements of the Championship Organisers and MSA 

regulations. The numbers and backgrounds shall be of regulation size (see MSA Blue Book J.4.1) with number backgrounds conforming to the 

following colours: 

Class A: White with black numbers. Class B: Black with white numbers. Class H: Yellow with black numbers. 

SRCC, Yokohama and sponsor decals must be affixed on both sides of the vehicle; failure to comply will render the car ineligible. 

5.17.2 Suppliers: Club and sponsor’s decals will be available at each round. 

5.18 TECHNICAL APPENDIX 

5.18.1 TECHNICAL INFORMATION AND DRAWINGS 

ITEM 

INFORMATION 

a) Reference Area The complete area situated between a vertical and transversal plane 25.8cm forward of the front axle 

centre-line and a vertical and transversal plane 27.5cm rearward of the rear axle centre-line and 

across the outside of the front and rear rims. 

27.5cm 

REAR AXLE CENTRE-LINE 

REFERENCE AREA 

FRONT AXLE CENTRE-LINE 

25.8cm 

b) Reference Zone An imaginary rectangular box situated between a vertical and transversal plane 25.8cm forward of 

the front axle centre-line and a vertical and transversal plane 115cm rearward of the rear axle centreline, 

across the outside of the front and rear rims and to a height of 25.0cm above the ground plane, 

with the car at normal ride height. 

REAR 

FRONT 

115C 

M 

REFERENCE ZONE 

25.8C 

M 

c) Shock Absorbers – Location of Steel or 

Ferrous Material (Class B & H) 

Steel or Ferrous Material Only 

d) Permitted Carburettor 

Modifications 

1. It is permissible to modify the external throttle linkage to get a synchronised (both opening 

together) throttle system but NOT the spindle or throttle butterfly screws themselves. 

Examples of permitted modifications are found in Actions 2 & 5. 

2. It is permissible to use the geared type synchronised secondary throttle spindle from a DGAS 

carburetor as part of this system but it must NOT be modified from its standard ROUND 

section. This is allowed because the gear and the spindle are integral but modifying it would 

be classed as profiling. 

3. Since the throttle plates are thicker on the DGAS unit than the DGV it is allowable to shim the 

gap but only over the clamping area so as not to provide any streamlining of the round 

throttle spindle. Again standard butterfly screws MUST be used. 

4. It is permissible to change the accelerator pump jet to the twin outlet DGAS type since it is 

permitted to change any jets as stated in Art. No. 5.7.5. 

5. It is permissible to use the proprietary kit from Webcon, part number MT009HL which 

includes the sequential linkage and accelerator pump jet. This fits the standard DGV flat 

spindles and is easier to fit than the DGAS geared system. 





6 APPENDICES 

6.1 Race Organising Clubs & Contacts: 

Sports 2000 Racing Car Club 

14 Stratford Road 

Sandy 

Beds 

SG19 2AB 

Tel: 01767689863 (eves) 

Tel: 01707 358666 (days) 

6.2 Commercial Undertakings: 

BRSCC HQ 



Borough Green 

Kent 

TN15 8JL 

Tel: 01732 780100 

Fax: 01732 885783 

6.2.1 Vehicle Presentation: The presentation of the car is fundamental to the profile of the championship/series its sponsors and its audience. Therefore 

in considering whether to permit any car to race, and any point during the season, the organisers will regard as paramount the presentation of the 

car. In taking into account its appearance inherent in which is the standard of its presentation (including interior) they may exclude any car, which 

they consider may prejudice the reputation of the championship/series, or is otherwise unacceptable. This will include where the car is presented 

at a race event bearing accident damage sustained at a previous event and which has not been subject to the completion of an acceptable repair. 

Note: A Double Header can be regarded as one event for the purpose of this regulation. 

6.2.2 All competitors will park in a neat and tidy manner only in the areas allocated to them by the Race Organisers and will keep these areas clean and 

tidy at all times. Any competitor failing to obey the instructions of the Organisers or an Official of the Meeting in these matters, in regard to their 

location, amount of space utilised or manner, in which it is utilised, may be reported to the Clerk of Course who may impose any penalty 

considered appropriate. 


Sporting Regulations 2013 

The championship shall be run in accordance with the 2013 General 

Competition Rules of MI and any Appendices issued by MI to those GCR’s and 

these regulations. Where these regulations set out below are found to conflict 

with the Supplementary Regulations of any race meeting these regulations 

shall apply and take precedence. 

1) Championship Points 

At each championship round points will be allocated in accordance with 

Rule 6 of Appendix ‘A’ of this yearbook 

In the event of a tie for any championship position the competitors best 

result ie most wins, most seconds etc as per Appendix ‘A’ will decide the 

outcome. 

2) Championship Registration 

All drivers must register and pay the appropriate fee for the Reeltech 

Global GT Lights Championship in order to take part in either the 

championship or any race of Global GT Lights. Registration and Payment 

must be made 1 month before the first Championship round. 

Drivers who fail to register and pay will not be allocated points or 

allowed to race their car on the track in a Global Race. 

Registration fee is payable to Global GT Lights and must be sent to the 

class co-ordinator 1 month before the first round. 

3) Counting Rounds 

All rounds count towards the championship. You are allowed dropped 

round as per Appendix ‘A’ 

4) Sponsors Decals 

Competitors must place race or Championship sponsors decals on their 

vehicles if required and in the approved position. The championship 

organiser reserves the right to prevent a competitor from starting a race if 

that competitor refuses to accept such decals

Sporting Regulations 2013 

5) Starting procedure 

All grids shall be in 2 by 2 formation for all Reeltech Global GT Races 

All starts will be rolling, if a competitor fails to take his position on the grid 

the next car must take his place and all subsequent cars then move up. 

No spaces can be left for a rolling start. 

A minimum of 1 warm up lap will be run this will also be the formation lap 

to the rolling start. 

All cars to be in tight formation before last corner approaching the start 

line. 

Should the weather change when the cars are on slick tyres the race must 

be stopped, cars allowed to change to wets and the race then re-run in 

full. 

6) Eligibility 

The eligibility of cars in the Reeltech Global GT Lights championship will be 

strictly policed and competitors must co-operate fully at all times with such 

scrutineering procedures as may be deemed necessary. 

7) Spare Car 

A driver may race a different car to the one in which he qualified but he 

must then start from the last place on the grid.

Championship Regulations 2013 

Issued January 2013 

1.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS AND EXCEPTIONS 

1.1 Only cars fully in compliance with these technical regulations shall be permitted to take 

part in the Championship. 

1.2. The design rights and drawings of all components manufactured specifically and 

solely for Global GT Light car are owned by Graham Hathaway Engineering Ltd. The 

approved supplier for Ireland is ABR Racing Co Kildare 

1.3 Global GT Light cars and components, including spares manufactured and supplied, 

may only be supplied by ABR Racing Co Kildare. 

1.4 It is the entrant’s responsibility to use only eligible components. The Eligibility / 

Safety Scrutineer on duty has the responsibility for checking that cars comply with the 

Technical Regulations and may invite a representative of ABR Racing Co Kildare to assist 

in verifying the source of components. Thereafter the Scrutineers decision shall be final 

and binding. Cars found to be in breach of the Technical Regulations will be the subject of 

a written report by the Eligibility/Safety Scrutineer to the Clerk of the Course for the 

appropriate action to be taken. 

1.5 From time to time it may be necessary to approve an alternative equivalent to a part. 

These will be notified by ABR Racing Co Kildare, in an official bulletin to these regulations 

as eligible for the Global GT Lights cars and all championships. 

2.0 CHASSIS 

2.1 Only chassis bearing a Global Chassis Plate are eligible. 

The chassis and engine frame must remain unaltered from the 2000 specification supplied 

by Graham Hathaway Engineering Ltd. Rollover bar height extensions can only be 

supplied & fitted by ABR Racing Co Kildare. No additional riveting or bonding of the side / 

floor panels is permitted. 

Should the chassis become damaged replacements must be purchased through ABR 

Racing Co Kildare. The Eligibility Scrutineer, reserves the right to disallow a repaired car 

which does not appear to be have been properly repaired. 

1


3.0 BODYWORK 

3.1 The bodywork including the rear wing assembly, size, position, aerodynamic shape 

and dimensions must remain unaltered. Replacement body panels and rear wing 

assembly must be purchased from ABR Racing Co Kildare, and may be labeled / marked. 

3.2 Drivers seat is free within scope of MSA/MSI yearbook Regulations. 

3.3 Mirrors. Manufacture is free provided there are two, one each side of the cockpit and 

each complies with MSA J.20.15.1 

4.0 ENGINE 

4.1 The engine is a standard, un-tuned Yamaha 600cc Thundercat or FZR. 

Any registered Global Gt Lights class competitor can purchase the engine of a fellow 

Global Gt lights competitor who has competed in the same race. The engine may be 

purchased for €750. The competitor must make the purchase and pay 50% of the amount 

within 30 minutes following a race in which the competitor and the competitor with the 

engine to be purchased competed. The engine may then be sealed by a scrutineer of the 

meeting and must be made available within four weeks to the purchasing competitor. 

4.2 The maximum power output permitted is 98 B.H.P. in 6th gear, measured at the 

gearbox output sprocket. 

5.0 ENGINE COOLING 

The cooling system, under tray, electrical water pump and mountings, to remain standard 

and supplied by ABR Racing Co Kildare. 

Type and manufacture of coolant is free. 

Oil cooling is permitted and supplied by Graham Hathaway Engineering Ltd. 

2

6.0 INDUCTION SYSTEMS 


Standard carburetors must be fitted and may not be modified. Standard air boxes from 

either engine must be used. Air filter element is free but must be fitted in the air box. If a 

Thundercat air box is used it may be fitted with air intake pipes, supplied by ABR Racing 

Co Kildare 

Carburetor jetting is free. 

Inlet manifolds must remain as standard. 

7.0 EXHAUST SYSTEM 

The exhaust system must remain standard and supplied by ABR Racing Co Kildare. 

Sound must not exceed 105db 

8.0 IGNITION SYSTEMS 

The ignition system & ECU system must remain standard as supplied by Yamaha with no 

modifications. The eligibility scrutineer may supply a replacement ECU that the competitor 

must change to on request. 

9.0 FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM: 

The fuel delivery system must remain as supplied. 


10.1 The suspension system must remain standard as manufactured and supplied by 

ABR Racing Co Kildare. Parts may be labeled / marked for identification. 

10.2 Toe in, camber, caster and ride height may be altered within the standard adjustment 

parameters provided. The minimum ride height/ground clearance under any part of the car 

is 4cm with the driver aboard. 

10.3 Springs rates are fixed 

10.4 Dampers. Tech 2000, Dynamic Suspension and Ohlins supplied by ABR Racing Co 

Kildare may be used. 

10.5 A 16mm or 19mm front roll bar must be fitted and supplied by ABR Racing Co 

Kildare 

10.6 An Optional 16mm rear roll bar and mountings may be fitted and supplied ABR 

Racing Co Kildare. 

3


11.0 TRANSMISSION 

11.1 Only the standard Yamaha 6 speed sequential gearbox is permitted. Final drive 

ratios supplied by Graham Hathaway Engineering Ltd. Engine sprocket to be 14 teeth. 

Axle sprocket to be 46 teeth. Gearbox ratios may not be changed and will be checked 

when engines are submitted for power testing. A reverse gear is not mandatory.a 

11.2 Clutch assembly must remain as standard with the exception of drive plates and 

pressure plate springs. 


12.1 All electrical equipment must remain as standard and supplied by Graham Hathaway 

Engineering Ltd. 

12.2 An effective rear red warning light must be fitted. 

12.3 Modification to the charging system is not permitted. The alternator must be fully 

operational and deliver a suitable charge when the engine is running. 

12.4 Lap timer and data logging may be fitted complying with MSA/MSI regulations. 

13.0 BRAKES 

13.1 The braking system must remain as standard. Upgrade kit is available only from 

ABR Racing Co Kildare for pre 2000 cars. This must be fitted in accordance with the 

supplied instructions without modification. 

13.2 Brake pad make and material is free but must fit, in unmodified calipers supplied by 

ABR Racing Co Kildare. 

13.3 The brake discs must be steel and may not be modified as supplied by ABR Racing 

Co Kildare. 

14.0 WHEELS/ STEERING 

14.1 Wheels (7” x 13”) and steering must remain standard. Supplied by ABR Racing Co 

Kildare. 

4


15.0 TYRES 

15.1 The Control Tyre from Avon must be used; these are numbered and purchased from 

the approved agent in Ireland ABR Racing Co Kildare. 

Position Tyre Size Pattern 

Front 7.0/20.0-13 Slick 

Rear 7.0/20.0-13 Slick 

Front 160/530R13 Wet 

Rear 160/530R13 Wet 

Quantities of tyres are not restricted for Ireland 

15.2 The use of tyre heating / tyre heat retention devices, tyre treatments and compounds 

is prohibited. 

16.0 VEHICLE WEIGHT 

16.1 Minimum weight is 450kg inclusive of driver and car, in the condition in which it 

crosses the finishing line or at any time during the competition and/or practice. 

16.2 Any car and driver combination that has achieved a time of sub 59 second lap on 

the Mondello national circuit in 2007 or subsequent years must have a vehicle and driver 

minimum weight of 470kg crossing the finish line or at any time during the competition 

and/or practice. 

16.3 Any car and driver combination that has achieved a time of sub 58 second lap on 

the Mondello national circuit in 2007 or subsequent years must have a vehicle and driver 

minimum weight of 480kg crossing the finish line or at any time during the competition 

and/or practice. 

16.4 If ballast is required to achieve the minimum weight, this must be in form of single 

lead sheet or bar attached to the front slope of the seat pan in a maximum mass of 10kg. 

The attachment must be with nuts and bolts which must be drilled to allow wire seals to be 

applied by the Formula Eligibility / Safety Scrutineer. 

16.5 All cars must be weighed at least once in any race meeting. 

16.6 Class coordinator will keep the Scrutineer informed of the times and weights for cars 

and driver combinations. 

5


17.0 FUEL TANK/FUEL 

17.1 FUEL TANK: The fuel delivery system & tank size is as supplied by Graham 

Hathaway Engineering Ltd. & must comply with MSA/MSI Safety Criteria requirements. 

17.2 LOCATION: The existing fuel tank mounting points must be used and the position of 

the fuel tank must remain in the approved location, as supplied by Graham Hathaway 

Engineering Ltd. 

17.3 FUEL: The only permitted fuel is unleaded / super unleaded pump fuel to BS 7800, in 

conformance with MSA Technical Regulations, Appendix P. Definition of super unleaded 

pump fuel. Additives are not permitted. 

17.4 Fuel testing may be carried out at any time before, during or after a competition on 

the instructions of the Clerk of the Course or Scrutineer. 

18.0 NUMBERS/DECALS 

18.1 All cars must be identified by numbers and backgrounds displayed in the approved 

position, the side numbers must be on the front section just behind the front wheel arch. 

The front number must be between the vent and the front screen. No other position is 

acceptable. All backgrounds and number sizes must be as defined by MSI 

18.2 Any supplied Sponsors decals must be displayed in the positions specified by the 

Championship coordinator on both sides, front and rear of the car to qualify for points. 

18.3 The sponsor’s decals will be provided by the Championship Organisers, whereas 

Entrants are responsible for supplying numbers. 

19. APPENDICES 

19.1 The approved agent in Ireland is ABR Racing Co Kildare, ABR Racing Co Kildare 

19.2 All parts must be purchased from ABR Racing Co Kildare. 

6


20.0 VEHICLE PRESENTATION: 

20.1 The presentation of the car is fundamental to the profile of the championship/series 

its sponsors and its audience. Therefore in considering whether to permit any car to race, 

ant any point during the season, the organisers will regard as paramount the presentation 

of the car. In taking into account its appearance inherent in which is the standard of its 

presentation (including interior), they can exclude any car which they consider may 

prejudice the reputation of the championship / series or is otherwise unacceptable 

This will include where the car is presented at a race event bearing accident damage 

sustained at a previous event and which has not been subject to the completion of a full 

and proper repair. Note: A double header can be regarded as one event for the purposes 

of this regulation. 

20.2. Vehicles, Decals and Overalls/Patches. - Competitors overalls be clean and 

maintained to a reasonable standard, patches should be affixed in instructed locations 

and cars deemed to be of an unacceptable standard of presentation may not be permitted 

to race. 

20.3. Promotional activities - Competitors may be asked and will be expected to 

participate in championship promotion activities at the circuits, as requested by the 

organisers 

The rules should be interpreted, that if it does not say you can do it then you cannot. 

After all championship rounds the competitor with the highest points score will be deemed 

to be the champion.

Issued by the BRSCC : 19th April 2013 

2013 Formula Ford North Sea Championship Regulations 

Version : Published Copy 


2013 Formula Ford 

North Sea 


Regulations 

Introduction 

Section 1 


INDEX 

Section 2 


Section 3 



Section 4 


Section 5 


Section 6 


Section 7 

Appendices – Registration Form 

Page 1 of 12






The Formula Ford North Sea Championship is organised and administrated by the British Racing and Sports Car Club 

(BRSCC) in accordance with the General Regulations of the Royal Automobile Club Motor Sports Association (incorporating 

the provisions of the International Sporting Code of the FIA) and these Championship Regulations. 




The BRSCC reserve the right to amend or vary the Sporting Regulations in accordance with MSA Regulation [D 11.1.3] at 

any time before or during the Championship and further issue additional statements concerning the Regulations from time 

to time, subject to MSA approval, and all such statements will be issued by Championship Bulletin to the MSA and to all 

registered competitors by email or by post to the address detailed on the Registration Form, or by delivery to the 

competitor by hand. It is a condition of entry into the championship that all competitors, teams, team members and 

persons associated with any of the above agree to be bound by the Regulations including any amendments, variations or 

statements relating thereto. 

1.2 Officials 

1.2.1 Championship Co-ordinator 

Ian Smith 

70 Cotton Lane 

Runcorn 

Cheshire 

WA7 5NE 

Tel: (01928) 580222 

Mob: (07939) 107888 

Email: ff1600@virginmedia.com 

1.2.2 Championship Eligibility Scrutineer 

Nigel Jones 

49 The Chase 

Eastcote 

Pinner 

Middlesex 

HA5 1SH 

Tel: (0208) 866 6942 

Mob: (07802) 276590 

Email: njones6942@aol.com 


D Furlong, D Wells, R Smith & D Walton. 

Any three Championship Stewards will constitute a quorum. In the event of any of the Championship Stewards listed above 

being unavailable or being unable to consider any particular matter due to a perceived conflict of interest, the organisers 

reserve the right to appoint an alternative Championship Steward or, if deemed to be necessary, more than one alternative 

Championship Steward. 


1.3.1 Entrants must be in possession of a valid current MSA Entrants Licence and be card holding racing members of the BRSCC, 

where applicable. 

1.3.2 Drivers and Entrant Drivers must be fully paid up valid membership card holding racing members of the BRSCC, be 

Page 2 of 12




registered for the Championship and be in possession of a valid MSA Competition (Racing) National (A) or above licences or 

equivalent (MSA Regulation [H 26.1.5]) or, be a professional driver in possession of a valid Licence (featuring an E.U. flag) 

and medical, issued by the ASN of a member country of the European Union. 

A competitor shall not take time off school to participate in motor sport without the prior written approval of their school. 

If participation in the Championship requires absence from school, drivers in full time school education are required to 

have the approval of their head teacher and a letter stating such approval from his/her school in order to fulfil registration 

for the Championship 


1.3.4 Competitors must ensure that their cars comply with the conditions of eligibility and safety throughout qualifying and 

racing. 


1.4.1 All drivers must register as competitors for the Championship by returning the Registration Form with the Registration Fee 

to the Championship Co-ordinator prior to the Final closing date for the first round being entered. 

1.4.2 The Registration Fee is GB£500 or €600 made payable to: BRSCC. 

1.4.3 Registration will be accepted from 1st January 2013 until the closing date for entries to the last round. 

1.4.4 Upon registration class specific competition numbers for the Championship will be issued. 



1.5.1 The 2013 Formula Ford North Sea Championship rounds will take place at the following venues on the dates as detailed: 

Rounds Dates DH/TH Venue 

1, 2, 3 April 20/21 TH Snetterton 300 

4, 5, 6 June 8/9 TH Zandvoort 

7, 8, 9 June 15/16 TH Spa Franchorchamps 

10, 11, 12 July 5/6/7 TH Zandvoort 

13, 14, 15 August 31/September 1 TH Brands Hatch 

DH = Double header TH – Triple Header 

1.6 Scoring 

1.6.1 Points will be awarded to competitors listed as classified finishers in the Final Results of each race. 

1 st 20 6 th 6 

2 nd 15 7 th 4 

3 rd 12 8 th 3 

4 th 10 9 th 2 

5 th 8 10 th 1 

Fastest Lap: 2 pts 

1.6.2 The Championship will be decided from the totals from all qualifying rounds less two, and will determine the final 

Championship points and positions unless subject to the application of any MSA Regulation [C 3.5] penalties. Drivers 

excluded from results for sporting infringements may not use that (those) event(s) as discarded rounds for the purpose of 

overall championship placing. 

1.6.4 Ties will be resolved according to MSA Regulation [W 1.3.4] of the current MSA Yearbook. 

1.7 Awards 

Page 3 of 12




1.7.1 All awards are to be provided by: BRSCC 


Trophies will be awarded as follows: 

Duratec 

Trophies to 1 st , 2 nd and 3 rd 

Zetec 



Duratec 

Zetec 



1.7.4 Bonuses 



Garlands and trophies will be presented for each meeting (as applicable) and shall be presented at the official 

championship award ceremony. Prize money if applicable will be posted to entrants within 10 days of the results of every 

round being declared final. 


In accordance with current Government Legislation, the Organisers of every round are legally obliged to withhold tax at 

the current basic rate on all payments to non-UK resident sportsmen/sportswomen and account to HMRC using form 

FEU1, the quarterly return of payments made to non-resident entertainers and sportsmen/women. That is, those persons 

who do not have a normal permanent residence in the UK. The UK does not include the Isle of Man, Channel Isles or Eire. 

This means that the Organisers of every round are required to deduct tax at the relevant rate, from such payments they 

may make to non-UK residents. Under certain circumstances, it is possible for competitors to enter into an agreement 

with the Inland Revenue to limit tax withheld. Any application for such an arrangement must be made in writing and not 

later than 30 days before their payment is due. 

For further information contact: - HMRC Personal Tax International, Foreign Entertainers Unit, St Johns House, Merton 

Road, Liverpool L75 1BB. Tel: (0151) 472 6488 Fax: (0151) 472 6483 

1.7.7 Title to All Trophies 


distribution of any awards the competitors concerned must return such awards to the BRSCC in good condition within 7 

days. 

Page 4 of 12





2.1 Rounds 




Page 5 of 12






3.1 Entries 

3.1.1 Competitors are responsible for sending in correct and complete entries with the correct entry fees prior to the entry 

closing date, which shall be 4 days before every round. 


complete and correct. The date of receipt for acceptance of entry purposes shall be the date on which the Secretary of 

the Meeting receives the missing or corrected information or fee. 

3.1.3 Any withdrawal of Entry or Driver/Car changes made after the acceptance of any entry must be notified to the Secretary 

of the Meeting in writing. If Driver/Vehicle changes are made after publication of Entry Lists with Final Instructions the 

competitor concerned must apply for approval of acceptance by the stewards of the meeting before signing on. 



3.1.5 In the event of any rounds being oversubscribed the Organising Clubs in liaison with the co-ordinator / organiser may at 

their discretion run Qualification Races. For Qualification Race procedures see 3.13 of these regulations. 

3.1.6 Reserves are to be nominated on the final list of entries published with Final Instructions or Amendment Sheet Bulletins. 

All Reserves will practice and replace withdrawn or retired entries Reserve Number order irrespective of class. If 

Reserves are given Grid Places prior to issue of the first Grid Sheets for any round the times set in Practice shall 

determine their grid positions. If Reserves are given places after publication of the grid sheet and prior to cars being 

collected in the Official “Assembly Areas” they will be placed at the rear of the Grid and be started without any time 

delay. Otherwise, they will be held in the Pitlane and be released to start the race after the last car to start the GREEN 

FLAG LAP or last car to take the start has passed the startline or pitlane exit, whichever is the later. Such approval to 


3.2 Briefings 

Organisers will notify competitors of the times and locations for all briefings in the Final Instructions for all meetings, 

competitors must attend all briefings. 

3.3 Practice 


3.3.2 Should any practice session be disrupted the Clerk of the Course shall not be obliged to resume the session or re-run 




This is the signal for all drivers to cease circulating at racing speeds, to slow to a safe and reasonable pace and return to 

the pit lane unless directed by officials not to do so. 


3.5. Races 

Each driver should complete a minimum of 3 laps practice in the car to be raced and in the correct session in order to 

qualify for selection and order of precedence as set out in the MSA regulations [Q 4.5]. The Clerk of the Course and or 

Stewards of the meeting shall have the right to exclude any driver whose practice times or racing are considered 

unsatisfactory as per MSA Regulation [Q 4.5]. 

Page 6 of 12




3.5.1 The standard minimum scheduled duration shall be 18 minutes but should any race distance be reduced at the 

discretion of the Clerk of the Course or Stewards of the meeting it shall still count as a full points scoring round. 

3.6 Starts 


form up the grid to the start of the Green Flag lap(s) in the formation as specified on the Track Licence for the Circuit. 


Standing Starts 

• 1 minute to start of Green Flag lap - Start Engines/Clear Grid. 

• 30 Seconds - Visible and audible warnings for the start of Green Flag lap. 

3.6.3 The use of tyre heating/heat retention devices, tyre treatments and compounds is prohibited. Tyre cooling is also 

prohibited other than by natural convection 

3.6.4 Any cars removed from the grid after the 1-minute stage or driven into the pits on Green Flag shall be held in the pit 

lane. They may start the race after the last car to take the start from the grid has passed the start line or pit lane exit, 

whichever is the later. 

3.6.5 Any drivers unable to start the Green Flag lap or start are required to indicate their situation as per MSA Regulation [Q 

12.13.2]. Any drivers unable to maintain grid positions on the Green Flag to the extent that all other cars are ahead of 

them may complete the Green Flag Lap. They MUST remain at the rear of the last row of the grid but ahead of any cars 

to be started with a time delay. 

3.6.6 Excessive weaving to warm-up tyres using more than 50% of the track width and falling back in order to accelerate and 

practice starts, is prohibited. 

3.6.7 A 5 Second Board will be shown to indicate that the Grid is complete. The red lights will be switched on five seconds 

after the board is withdrawn. 



3.7.1 Should the need arise to stop any race, RED LIGHTS will be switched on at the Start Line and RED FLAGS will be displayed 

at the startline and at all Marshals Signalling Points around the circuit. 

This is the signal for all drivers to cease circulating at racing speeds, to slow to a safe and reasonable pace and to return 

to the starting grid area, which will automatically become a Parc Fermé area. 

Cars may not enter the pits unless directed to do so. Work on cars already in the pits must cease when a race is stopped. 

3.7.2 Case A – Less than two laps completed by the Race leader 

The Race will be null and void. The race will restart from the original grid positions. Competitors unable to take the 

restart may be replaced by reserves who will start from the back of the grid in reserve order. Gaps on the grid should 

not be closed up. The length of the restarted race will be determined by the Clerk of the Course. 


The Race will restart from the grid set out by the finishing order of part one, (as per MSA Regulation [Q 5.4.2]. The 

result of the race will be the finishing order at the end of part 2. The length of the restarted race will be determined by 

the Clerk of the Course. 


If the leader has completed more than 75% of the race distance or duration it shall not be re-started and the results will 

be declared in accordance with MSA Regulation [Q 5.4.3], unless the Clerk of the Course, in consultation with the 

Stewards deem it appropriate to restart the race. 

Page 7 of 12


3.8 Rescrutiny 





3.9 Pits and Pit Lane Safety 

3.9.1 Pits 

Entrants must ensure that the MSA, Circuit Management and Organising Club Safety Regulations are complied with at 

all times. 


The outer lane or lanes are to be kept unobstructed to allow safe passage of cars at all times. The onus shall be on all 

Drivers to take due care and drive at minimum speeds in the Pit Lanes. 


May only be carried out in accordance with the MSA Regulations [Q 13], Circuit Management Regulations and SR’s or 

Final Instructions issued for every meeting. 



competitors ahead of them, return to the pit lane entrance as instructed, comply with any directions given by marshals 

or officials and to keep their helmets on and harnesses done up while on the circuit or pit lane. 

3.11 Results 

All Practice Timesheets, Grids, Race Results are deemed provisional until all vehicles are released by Scrutineers after 

Post Practice/Race Scrutineering and/or after completion of any Judicial or Technical Procedures. 


3.12.1 All competitors will be required to fit Electronic Self Identification Modules to their cars for the purposes of accurate 

timing. Holders for these and detailed fitting instructions will be issued with the transponders and it will be the 

responsibility of the competitor to fit these in the car in the position and manner specified. The Modules must be in 

place and functioning correctly for all Championship qualifying practice sessions and races. The setting and servicing of 

these items must only be carried out by properly authorised MSA licensed Timekeepers. Competitors will be charged by 

the timing company for replacement of the Modules due to misuse or loss at any time during the season. 


official timing lines at any event or test session/day. Any such equipment placed within these zones will be removed. 


In the event of the need for any qualification races, the procedures will be as published in the Final Instructions for the 

events concerned. 



Regulations. 

Page 8 of 12






4.1.1 Arising from post practice Scrutineering or Judicial Action 


4.1.2 Arising from post race Scrutineering or Judicial Action 


For infringement deemed to be of a more serious nature the Clerk of the Course and/or Stewards of the Meeting are to 

invoke the provisions of Regulation [C 3.5.1 (c)]. 

4.2 Infringements of Non-Technical MSA Regulations and the Sporting Regulations issued for the 


4.2(a) 

The Clerk of the Course reserves the right to impose a ‘Stop-Go Penalty/Drive Through Penalty’ in accordance with 


For offences under MSA regulations [C1.1.5], [C1.1.6], [Q14.4.2] and [Q14.5], the Clerk of the Course, at his discretion, 

may additionally impose a championship penalty in the form of the following: 




race/event. 



increased. 



Single Qualifying Session, Single Race 


offences, they shall forfeit all points in the championship gained solely at that event to that point during the event and 

shall be ineligible to score any points for the remainder of that event. 

Multiple Qualifying/Multiple Race 

In the case of double header races or multi-races, where an offence below is committed during any qualifying session(s) 

or the first race, then points gained for the qualifying session(s) and the first race will be forfeited. Where an offence 

occurs during any subsequent race then the points solely gained for that race shall be forfeit. 

Should two separate offences be committed, then all points shall be forfeited for that whole event, irrespective of the 

timing of the offence committed at that event. Where a “double header” event take place at the same venue over a 

weekend and is conducted as two separate race days then this regulation shall only apply to each day individually. 


a Reckless or dangerous driving in the course of a meeting. (see MSA Regulation [C 1.1.5]). 

4.2.3 In order to maintain standards of conduct, the Championship Coordinator will monitor all Officials/Observers reports of 

adverse behaviour at race meetings. If any individual is included on two such reports during one racing season he will 

receive written warning from the Championship Coordinator that his driving/behaviour is to be specifically observed at 

future race meetings. Any adverse reports during this period of observation could result in official MSA action and will 

result in a Championship Stewards' enquiry, with possible loss of Championship points and refusal of further race 

entries. 

Page 9 of 12







understood that if the following texts do not clearly specify that you can do it you should work on the principle that you 

cannot. 

Competitors are advised to read the following sections of the MSA Yearbook Regulations: MSA Regulations Sections [J 

4.1] – [J 5] to [J 5.20.13] - Section Q, MSA Regulations Section B, Nomenclature & Definitions -Section K - Section L and 

relevant Formula Ford Duratec Technical Regulations issued by the Ford Motor Company. 


5.2.1 The Formula Ford North Sea Championship is for 1600cc Duratec Formula Ford Cars which must comply with the 2013 

Technical Regulations for Formula Ford with 1600cc Duratec engine issued by the Ford Motor Company/British Racing & 

Sports Car Club (BRSCC). A separate class will be run for 1800cc Zetec Formula Ford cars which must comply with the 

2013 Technical Regulations for Formula Ford with 1800cc engine issued by Ford Motor Company/British Racing & Sports 

Car Club (BRSCC). 


The organisers (in addition to any other powers they may have under these Regulations reserve the right before or after 

any race in the championship/series to designate any one or more of the competing cars for special eligibility 




a 

b 

c 


Retain the car for detailed examination at premises chosen by the organisers. If the organisers elect to retain the car 

they shall make it available for collection by the competitor at least seven days prior to the qualification session for the 

next race in the championship/series unless the car is found to be in breach of these regulations and/or 

Seal the car and its components in such a manner as they may choose and require the competitor at their own expense 

to present the car at any other premises chosen by the organisers for detailed examination within a specified period 

and/or remove the car by transporter at no expense to the competitor to an appointed location. The competitor will be 

advised in writing of the time, date and location of the subsequent testing or eligibility examination. 





Competitors will be personally and solely responsible for ensuring that their cars comply with their registration details 

and with these regulations for each event at which they are entered. Failure to comply in either respect will be a breach 

of these regulations. Queries concerning eligibility should be referred in writing to the organisers/championship/series 

Eligibility Scrutineer at least seven days prior to an event entered, to permit a ruling in advance of any meeting at which 

it is intended to compete. 

No car may be removed from the circuit/venue prior to the conclusion of the race without the approval of the Clerk of 

the Course and Chief Scrutineer. 

The organisers may review the performance of vehicles within the championship with particular regard to newly 

introduced vehicles/models, after every three championship/series rounds. This may result in the minimum weight 

being altered for any registered model. 

Any weighbridge or pad scales used by the organisers at a circuit, which may include that held by the championship 

Page 10 of 12




organisers, will be considered definitive and the weight of a car established on such a weighbridge will be a finding of 

fact in accordance with the MSA regulations [E 4.1.4] race meetings paragraph 3 and 4. 


The following Articles of MSA Regulations Section K Safety Criteria Regulations will apply unless specified in the current 

Formula Ford Regulations issued by the Ford Motor Company: [K 1]; [K 1.4]; [K 1.6.3]; [K 1.6.4 (a) & (b)]; [K 2.1] to [K 

2.1.3]; [K 3]; [K 4]; [K 5]; [K 6]; [K 7.1] to [K 7.4]; [K 8]; [K 9]; [K 10.1] to [K 10.4]; [K 11] & [K 13]. 

5.4 General Technical Requirements And Exceptions 

5.5 Chassis 

Duratec Class 

Zetec Class 

As per 2013 Technical Regulations for Formula Ford with 1600cc Duratec engine 

As per 2013 Technical Regulations Formula Ford with 1800cc engine 

In addition the chassis may be identified by a MSA sealing tag, attached and recorded by the championship Eligibility 

Scrutineer. Any change of chassis may require a new seal being attached prior to any competition. Failure to comply 

may render the car ineligible. 

5.6 Bodywork 

Duratec Class 

Zetec Class 



5.7 Engines 

Duratec Class 

Zetec Class 




Duratec Class 

Zetec Class 




Duratec Class 

Zetec Class 




Duratec Class 

Zetec Class 



5.11 Brakes 

Duratec Class 

Zetec Class 



5.12 Wheels And Steering 

Duratec Class 

Zetec Class 



5.13 Tyres 

5.13.1 Specifications 

Page 11 of 12




Duratec Class 

Zetec Class 



5.13.2 Nominated manufacturers 

Dunlop 

5.13.3 For the whole duration of the race meeting, no artificial warming or cooling of the wheel, tyre, or other component of 

the inflated wheel assembly is permitted. Artificial cooling will include any means of transferring heat away from the 

wheel and tyre assembly other than by natural convection. Any tyre protection cover used during transit of the car 

within the confines of the circuit must be a loose fit onto the tyre, they must not be of a temporary construction and 

must be capable of being reused many times. No cleaning or removal of rubber pick-up, from the tread area of the tyres 

is permitted using any form of other mechanical aid. 

5.13.4 Each competitor may not for each event (including official qualifying) use more than 4 new tyres, except for their first 

event, where six tyres are permitted. For each Event, each competitor may also nominate one used front tyre and one 

used rear tyre per race meeting as spare tyres. A used tyre is defined as a tyre, which has been nominated for that 

competitor on a tyre nomination form at a previous round. All other tyres are deemed to be new tyres. 

5.13.5 Each competitor must nominate, on the form provided by the Championship Organisers, the manufacturers numbers of 

the tyres for use at each event. This form must be handed to the Championship Eligibility Scrutineer prior to the start of 

the first qualifying session. 

The nomination of tyres is specific to the driver. If the driver changes cars in a team, then he/she must use tyres 

previously declared for his/her use, plus any new tyres up to the maximum permitted by these regulations. In the case 

where a driver changes team during the season they may nominate tyres as shown above, However the used tyres must 

have been previously allocated to the car or team to which the transfer has taken place. Any new driver into the 

Championship can have 6 new tyres for his/her first race. 

5.13.6 The replacement of any tyre is subject to the prior agreement of the Championship Eligibility Scrutineer and a 

representative of the nominated tyre manufacturer. Any damaged or punctured tyre will be replaced on a “like for like” 

basis. 

5.13.7 Only tyres nominated for that event are permitted in the Pit Lane during official qualifying sessions and races. 


Duratec Class 

Zetec Class 


The minimum weight of the car at any time during the competition is 450Kg. The minimum weight 

of car plus driver at any time during the competition is 535Kg. 

5.15 Fuel Tank And Fuel 

Duratec Class 

Zetec Class 




Silencers must be maintained to comply with the Section "B" provisions of MSA Regulation [J 5.17] and [J 5.18] at all 

times. 


5.17.1 All cars must be identified by MSA Regulation [J 4.1] specification numbers displayed in positions acceptable to the 

Timekeepers 

5.17.2 The BRSCC and Championship sponsor’s decals must be displayed in an un-obscured position on both sides of the car to 

qualify for points and prizes. 

5.17.3 The BRSCC and sponsors decals will be provided by the Championship Organisers. Competitors are responsible for 

supplying numbers and backgrounds. 

Page 12 of 12

Published Copy 2013 Caterham Roadsport Championship ... - Knaf

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?